Wire Line Procedure Eni

ARPO ORGANISING TYPE OF ISSUING DOC. REFER TO PAGE.
1
ENI S.p.A. DEPARTMENT ACTIVITY' DEPT. TYPE SECTION N.
Agip Division OF 318

STAP P 1 M 7110
TITLE
GENERAL WIRELINE PROCEDURES MANUAL
DISTRIBUTION LIST
Eni - Agip Division Italian Districts

Eni - Agip Division Affiliated Companies
Eni - Agip Division Headquarter Drilling & Completion Units
STAP Archive
Eni - Agip Division Headquarter Subsurface Geology Units
Eni - Agip Division Headquarter Reservoir Units
Eni - Agip Division Headquarter Coordination Units for Italian Activities
Eni - Agip Division Headquarter Coordination Units for Foreign Activities
NOTE: The present document is available in Eni Agip Intranet (http://wwwarpo.in.agip.it) and a
CD-Rom version can also be distributed (requests will be addressed to STAP Dept. in
Eni - Agip Division Headquarter)
Date of issue: 28/06/99
Issued by G. Albasi C. Lanzetta A. Galletta

28/06/99 28/06/99 28/06/99
REVISIONS PREP'D CHK'D APPR'D
The present document is CONFIDENTIAL and it is property of AGIP It shall not be shown to third parties nor shall it be used for
reasons different from those owing to which it was given
ARPO IDENTIFICATION CODE PAGE 2 OF 318
ENI S.p.A.
Agip Division REVISION
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
INDEX
1. INTRODUCTION 9
1.1. DEFINITION OF WIRELINE 9
1.2. MANUAL OBJECTIVES 9
1.3. IMPLEMENTATION 9
1.4. DOCUMENTATION AND APPROVAL 9
1.5. UPDATING, AMENDMENT, CONTROL & DEROGATION 10
2. RESPONSIBILITIES AND CREWING 11

2.1. PERSONNEL RESPONSIBILITIES 11
2.2. TERMINOLOGY 11
2.2.1. Light Duty Operations 12
2.2.2. Heavy Duty Operations 12
2.3. CREW COMPOSITION 12
2.3.1. Light Duty Crew 12
2.3.2. Heavy Duty Crew 12
2.4. WIRELINE PERSONNEL QUALIFICATIONS 13
2.4.1. Chief Operator 13
2.4.2. Operator 14
2.4.3. Assistant Operator 14
3. TOOLSTRING SELECTION 15
3.1. GENERAL 15
3.2. ASSEMBLY SELECTION 17
3.2.1. Rope Socket 17
3.2.2. Stem 18
3.2.3. Jars 18
3.2.4. Tubular Jar 18
3.2.5. Knuckle Joints 22
3.2.6. Types Of Connections 23
4. SURFACE EQUIPMENT SELECTION 24

4.1. LIFTING EQUIPMENT 24
4.1.1. Gin Pole 24
4.1.2. Mast 25
4.1.3. Crane 25
4.2. ADAPTER FLANGE 26
4.3. BOPS 26
4.4. LUBRICATOR RISER 28
4.5. STUFFING BOX 29
4.6. INJECTION NIPPLE 31
4.7. SAFETY CHECK UNION 32
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
4.8. SWAB VALVE 33
5. WIRE SELECTION 34
5.1. WIRE DIAMETERS 34
5.2. MATERIALS 34
5.3. ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT 34
5.3.1. Counter Wheel 34
5.4. OTHER SHEAVES 35
5.5. COATED WIRE LINE CABLE 35
6. WIRELINE UNIT SELECTION 37

6.1. HEAVY DUTY LAND TRUCK 37
6.1.1. Truck Specification 37
6.1.2. Winch 38
6.1.3. Surface Equipment 38
6.2. LIGHT DUTY LAND TRUCK 39
6.2.1. Truck Specification 39
6.2.2. Winch 39
6.3. HEAVY DUTY OFFSHORE SKID 40
6.3.1. Skid Unit 40
6.3.2. Winch 41
6.4. LIGHT DUTY OFFSHORE SKID 42
6.4.1. Skid Unit 42
6.4.2. Winch 42
7. DOCUMENTATION 44
7.1.1. Preliminary Information 44
7.1.2. Wellsite Reports 45
7.1.3. Feed Back Reports 45
7.1.4. Other Reports 45
8. WIRELINE RIG-UP/DOWN OPERATIONS 46

8.1.1. Toolstring Weight Determination 46
8.2. RIG OPERATIONS 47
8.2.1. Land 48
8.2.2. Jack-Up/Fixed Platform/Barge 54
8.2.3. Drill Ship/Semi-Submersible 60
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
8.3. RIGLESS OPERATIONS 64

8.3.1. Heavy Duty Land Operation 65
8.3.2. Light Duty Land Operation 68
8.3.3. Heavy Duty Offshore Operation 73
8.3.4. Light Duty Offshore Operation 75
9. GENERAL WIRELINE PROCEDURES 79

9.1. SUMMARY OF GENERAL OPERATION 79
9.2. TUBING GAUGING 80
9.2.1. Gauging During Well Completion 81
9.2.2. Gauging During Production 83
9.3. PRESSURE & TEMPERATURE GRADIENT SURVEY 85
9.3.1. With Amerada Gauge 86
9.3.2. With Memory Gauge 88
9.4. BAILING 91
9.4.1. Sample Bailing 93
9.4.2. Sand Bailing 95
9.4.3. Hydrostatic Bailing 96
9.4.4. Drive Down Bailing 100
9.5. TUBING PERFORATING 102
9.6. SUB SURFACE CONTROLLED SAFETY VALVE OPERATION 113
9.6.1. Setting 116
9.6.2. Pulling 118
9.7. SURFACE CONTROLLED SUBSURFACE SAFETY VALVE OPERATION 120
9.7.1. Setting SCSSV 122
9.7.2. Pulling SCSSV 124
9.7.3. Installation During Completion 126
9.8. PLUGS 129
9.8.1. Setting 135
9.8.2. Pulling 137
9.9. SLIDING SLEEVE OPERATION 140
9.9.1. Open Up SSD 146
9.9.2. Open Down SSD 152
9.9.3. Selective Shifting 155
9.10. PACKER SETTING 162
9.10.1. One Trip Check Valve Operation 164
9.10.2. Two Trip Check Valve Operation 169
9.11. SCRATCHING 176
9.12. IMPRESSION TAKING 180
9.13. HYDRATE REMOVAL 183
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
10. SPECIFIC FLOW CONTROL PROCEDURES 187

10.1. OTIS W LOCK MANDREL 187
10.1.1. Equipment Required 187
10.1.2. Redressing/Preparation 188
10.1.3. Running Procedure 188
10.1.4. Pulling Procedure 188
10.2. OTIS D COLLAR LOCK MANDREL 190
10.2.1. Equipment Required 190
10.2.2. Redressing/Preparation 191
10.3. OTIS TYPE S & T LOCK MANDREL 194
10.3.1. Disassembly Procedure 195
10.3.2. Assembly/Preparation 196
10.4. OTIS TYPE X & XN LOCK MANDRELS 198
10.4.1. X and XN Disassembly Procedure 198
10.4.2. X and XN Assembly Procedure 198
10.4.3. X Running Procedure 199
10.4.4. X Pulling Procedure 199
10.4.5. XN Lock Mandrel 201
10.4.6. XN Disassembly Procedure 201
10.4.7. XN Assembly Procedure 201
10.4.8. XN Running Procedure 202
10.4.9. XN Pulling Procedure 203
10.5. OTIS TYPE R & RN LOCK MANDRELS 204
10.5.1. R Disassembly Procedure 204
10.5.2. R Assembly Procedure 204
10.5.3. R Running Procedure 205
10.5.4. R Pulling Procedure 205
10.5.5. RN Lock Mandrel 207
10.5.6. RN Disassembly Procedure 207
10.5.7. RN Assembly Procedure 207
10.5.8. RN Running Procedure 208
10.5.9. RN Pulling Procedure 209
10.6. OTIS X AND R PLUG CHOKES 210
10.6.1. PX and PR Plug Chokes 212
10.7. BAKER W & Z LOCK MANDRELS 214
10.7.1. Running Procedures 214
10.7.2. Pulling Procedures 214
10.7.3. Baker Bomb Hanger 216
10.7.4. Bomb Hanger Running Procedure 216
10.7.5. Bomb Hanger Pulling Procedure 216
10.8. CAMCO LOCK MANDRELS 217
10.8.1. DB-6 Lock Mandrel 217
10.8.2. Z-6 Running Tool 217
10.8.3. DB-6 Running Procedure 219
10.8.4. 'PRS' Pulling Procedure 220
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
10.9. BAKER TYPE B AND B1 LOCK MANDREL 221

10.10.SURFACE CONTROLLED SUBSURFACE SAFETY VALVES 222
10.10.1. SCSSV Running Procedure 222
10.10.2. SCSSV Pulling Procedure 222
11. WIRELINE PROBLEMS 223

11.1. WIRE BREAKS 223
11.1.1. Wire Breaks At Surface 223
11.1.2. Wire Break In The Well 225
11.1.3. Wire Stuck In The Stuffing Box 226
11.2. WIRELINE TOOLSTRING STICKING 227
11.2.1. During Gauging Operations 227
11.2.2. During Pressure and Temperature Surveys 227
11.2.3. During Perforating Operations 227
11.2.4. During Lock Setting/Retrieving 228
11.2.5. During Packer Setting 228
11.2.6. During Scratching Operations 228
11.2.7. During Hydrate Removal 229
11.3. TOOLSTRING PROBLEMS 229
11.3.1. Toolstring Breakage 229
11.3.2. Toolstring Disconnection 229
11.4. FISHING 230
11.4.1. Standard Well Site Inventory Of Fishing Tools 230
11.4.2. General 230
11.4.3. Fishing Prevention Measures 231
11.4.4. Fishing Assembly 232
11.5. SLICKLINE FISHING PROCEDURES 235
11.5.1. Wireline Finder/Retriever 235
11.5.2. Running A Wire Finder 237
11.5.3. Wireline Grabs 238
11.5.4. Alligator Grab 240
11.5.5. Go Devil 242
11.5.6. Cutter Bar 243
11.5.7. Blind Box 249
11.5.8. Special Tools 251
11.5.9. Centre Spears 253
11.6. LOST TOOL FISHING PROCEDURE 256
11.6.1. Impression Block 257
11.6.2. LIB Running Procedure 258
11.6.3. Fishing Magnet 259
11.6.4. Type BB Pulling tool 261
11.6.5. Overshot 263
11.7. WIRE RECOVERY 267
11.7.1. Wire Recovery Procedure 267
11.8. TOOL RECOVERY 269
11.8.1. Tool Recovery Procedure 269
11.9. FISHING FOR KNOWN/UNIDENTIFIED OBJECTS 270
12. TOOLSTRING WEIGHT FOR FLOWING WELLS 271

12.1. PISTON EFFECT 271
12.2. FORCE ON TOOLSTRING SECTION 276
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
12.3. FORCE DUE TO FRICTION OF THE TOOLSTRING AT SURFACE 278
13. WIRELINE TESTING 283

13.1. TORSION TEST 283
13.1.1. Test Objective 283
13.1.2. Procedure 283
13.1.3. Wireline Test Analysis 284
13.1.4. General Guidance Notes 287
13.2. EDDY CURRENT NDT 287
14. WIRELINE ANGLE AND STRETCH CORRECTION FACTORS 288

14.1. LINE STRETCH CALCULATION 288
14.2. CALCULATION OF LINE STRETCH 291
15. WIRELINE EQUIPMENT NDT PROCEDURES 292

15.1. SURFACE EQUIPMENT TEST SCHEDULES 293
15.1.1. Stuffing Box 293
15.1.2. Safety Check Union 293
15.1.3. Injection Nipple 293
15.1.4. Lubricator (5,000 through 20,000psi WP) 293
15.1.5. BOPs 294
15.1.6. Adapter Flange 294
15.2. EQUIPMENT NDT PROCEDURES 294
15.2.1. Visual Inspection Procedure 294
15.2.2. Lubricator Component Pressure Test Procedure 295
15.2.3. BOP Pressure Test Procedure 295
15.2.4. Magnetic/Ultrasonic Examination Procedure 295
15.2.5. Radiographic Examination (X-Ray) Procedure 296
15.2.6. Hardness Test Procedure 296
15.3. NDT REPORT FORMS 296
15.3.1. Visual Inspection Report 297
15.3.2. Pressure Test Report 298
15.3.3. BOP Pressure Test Report 299
15.3.4. Magnetic/Ultrasonic Examination Report 300
15.3.5. Radiographic Examination Report 301
15.4. FIELD TESTS 302
15.4.2. Pressure Test Procedure 302
15.5. INSPECTION OF WIRELINE AND CABLE 303
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
16. SAFETY 304

16.1. POLICY 304
16.2. SAFETY AUDIT 304
16.3. RISK ASSESSMENT 304
16.4. SAFETY TRAINING 304
16.5. PERSONNEL SAFETY EQUIPMENT 304
16.6. WIRELINE UNIT SAFETY EQUIPMENT 305
16.7. OPERATIONAL SAFETY 305
16.7.1. General 305
16.7.2. Site Safety 306
16.8. H2S PROCEDURES 306
16.8.1. General H2S Guidelines 306
16.8.2. Operational H2S Guidelines 306
16.8.3. Safety Recommendations 307
16.8.4. Emergency Procedure 307
16.9. CORROSIVE AND HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES 308
16.10.REPORTING OF SAFETY INCIDENTS 308
APPENDIX A - REPORT FORMS 309

A.1. Initial Activity Report (ARPO 01) 309
A.2. Daily Report (ARPO 02) 310
A.3. Wireline Report (ARPO 11) 311
A.4. Pressure And Temperature Survey Report (ARPO 12) 312
A.5. Malfunction & Failure Report(FB-1) 313
A.6. Contractor Evaluation (FB-2) 314
APPENDIX B - ABBREVIATIONS 315
APPENDIX C - BIBLIOGRAPHY 318

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1. DEFINITION OF WIRELINE

Wireline is a well intervention service for the servicing, maintenance and logging of wells
whether during the drilling/completion or production phases. This is achieved by the
deployment of various service or logging tools on a toolstring attached to the end of a
wireline deployed into the hole. The wireline is stored on a winch and the tools run into, and
pulled out, of the well by manipulation of the winch.
It is the most widely used well intervention method and less costly due to the easier rigging
up and speed of operations in the hole, however as the wireline is relatively small and has
low tensile strength, there is always a risk of becoming stuck or breaking the wire.
1.2. MANUAL OBJECTIVES

The purpose of this manual is to define Eni-Agip Division and Affiliates procedures for
general wireline operations.
This manual has been published to assist users in avoiding discrepancies in the
performance of wireline operations, therefore minimising risk to personnel and installations,
resulting in protection of Eni-Agip from major cost penalties due to inefficient or dangerous
practices.
It is intended to guide users towards using procedures which have been found to provide the
most efficient and cost effective operations.
The policies herein are considered to be the minimum requirement, or standard, but locally
dictated conditions, legislation or third party contractor procedures may demand more
stringent procedures to be adopted.
1.3. IMPLEMENTATION
The policies and procedures included in this manual apply to all Eni-Agip Divisions and
Affiliates operations.
All supervisory and technical personnel engaged in Eni-Agips wireline operations are
expected to make themselves familiar with these and comply with the policies and
procedures specified and contained in this manual.
1.4. DOCUMENTATION AND APPROVAL

The control of every day wireline operations is governed by the policies laid down in this
manual.
Deviations from these policies will only be approved after detailed consideration of the
specific circumstances of the operation which is to be undertaken.
The reasons for deviations to existing policies will be fully documented along with any
implications that the variation will or may have to Eni-Agip Division and Affiliates before
approval for the deviations is granted.
Approval for variations to policy will only be granted for specific circumstances and will not
apply to subsequent operations. If it is deemed necessary to formally amend the policy
document, approval for variation to policy must be continued to be obtained on an individual
basis until the amendments have been approved.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
1.5. UPDATING, AMENDMENT, CONTROL & DEROGATION

This manual is a live controlled document and, as such, it will only be amended and
improved by the Corporate Company, in accordance with the development of Eni-Agip
Division and Affiliates operational experience. Accordingly, it will be the responsibility of
everyone concerned in the use and application of this manual to review the policies and
related procedures on an ongoing basis.
Locally dictated derogations from the manual shall be approved solely in writing by the
Manager of the local Drilling and Completion Department (D&C Dpt.) after the
District/Affiliate Manager and the Corporate Drilling & Completion Standards Department in
Eni-Agip Division Head Office have been advised in writing.
The Corporate Drilling & Completion Standards Department will consider such approved
derogations for future amendments and improvements of the manual, when the updating of
the document will be advisable.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
2. RESPONSIBILITIES AND CREWING
This section outlines personnel responsibilities and contains the terminology for the various
operational requirements and the composition of wireline crews for the these requirements.
2.1. PERSONNEL RESPONSIBILITIES

1) The Eni-Agip Drilling and Workover Engineering Department is responsible for the
compilation and submission of the Wireline Programme.
2) The Wireline Superintendent is responsible for wellsite operations and wireline crew
organisation as outlined below.
3) The Wireline Supervisor is responsible for the distribution of documentation necessary
to carry out the wireline operations and for the filing in of the ARPO reports forms.
4) It is responsibility of the Wireline Service Contractor Chief Operator (or Eni-Agip Chief
Operator when the operation is performed by the Company wireline department) to
ensure surface pressure control equipment and bottom hole equipment is in good
operating condition.
5) The Wireline Superintendent and Eni-Agip Supervisor are responsible for any
variations to the programme which must be agreed before implemented.
6) The Eni-Agip Supervisor must approved all actions to be undertaken for the solution of
well problems that may arise during the execution of operations.
2.2. TERMINOLOGY
Wireline operations are split into two distinct categories of operation, Light Duty
Operations and Heavy Duty Operations, according to the following criteria:
Completion type
Completion size
Surface equipment size
Surface equipment working pressure rating
Operational complexity.
For the execution of light duty operations, it is recommended that the crew be composed as
listed in section 2.2.1 below, otherwise termed a Light Duty Crew.
Likewise for heavy duty operations, it is recommended that the crew composition is a Heavy
Duty Crew, Refer to section 2.2.2.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
2.2.1. Light Duty Operations

Light duty wireline operations are defined by:
Operations performed on completed wells or during the completion phase, with
7
tubing < 2" /8 OD.
1
Operations carried out using surface equipment < 2 /2 nominal OD.
Operations carried out using surface equipment < 5,000 psi WP.
Operations requiring the use of a gin pole for lifting equipment.
For particular operations within the criteria listed above such as fishing, paraffin removal,
etc., the Wireline Superintendent may decide the operations are heavy duty.
2.2.2. Heavy Duty Operations

Heavy duty wireline operations are defined by:
Operations performed on completed wells or during the completion phase, with
1
tubing > 3 /2 OD.
Operations carried out using 3 nominal OD or larger surface equipment.
Operations carried out using 10,000psi WP or higher surface equipment.
All operations performed on HP/HT wells.
Operations requiring the use of crane for lifting equipment.
For particular quick and easy operations such as tubing gauging, bottom hole depth control
etc., the Wireline Superintendent may decide that the operation is light duty.
2.3. CREW COMPOSITION

2.3.1. Light Duty Crew
A light duty wireline crew is employed for light duty operations. The light duty crew will
consist of the following personnel:
Chief Operator
Operator
Assistant Operator.
2.3.2. Heavy Duty Crew

A heavy duty wireline crew is employed for heavy duty operations. The heavy duty crew
consists of the following personnel:
Chief Operator
Operator
Two Assistant Operators.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
For particular operations, especially on HP/HT wells, the following crew compositions are
recommended:
Composition #1 Composition #2
One Chief Operator Two Chief Operators
Two Operators Two Operators
One Assistant Operator
For operations on HP/HT wells, the Wireline Chief Operators experience must satisfy the
additional requirements described in section .
2.4. WIRELINE PERSONNEL QUALIFICATIONS

The wireline crew will consist of personnel from the three following grade levels:
Chief Operator
Operator
Assistant Operator.
The experience and academic qualifications for these grades are given in the following sub-
sections.
2.4.1. Chief Operator

Experience:
More than eight years in wireline operations or less than four years as an
Operator. Must have performed operations on gas wells, sour gas wells and oil
wells with static top hole pressures over 5,000psi.
Additional Requirements For HP/HT Operations:
More than two years as Chief Operator and two years experience on HP/HT
wells.
Educational Qualification:
At least a professional diploma.
Specialist Wireline Courses:
Basic Wireline
Advanced Wireline
Wireline Fishing
H2S
First Aid
Fire Fighting
Offshore Courses:
Survival
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
2.4.2. Operator
Experience:
More than four years in wireline operations or less than two years as an
Operator. Must have performed operations on gas wells, sour gas wells and oil
wells with static top hole pressures over 5,000psi.
Basic Wireline
H2S
First Aid
Fire Fighting.
Offshore Courses:
Survival.
2.4.3. Assistant Operator

Experience:
As per his employers hiring criteria.
Basic Wireline
H2S
First Aid
Fire Fighting
Offshore Courses:
Survival
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
3. TOOLSTRING SELECTION
3.1. GENERAL
The Wireline String is defined as the down hole equipment connected with the slickline
cable, fit to allow the running and the operations with wire line tools in an oil or gas well,
furnishing the weight and the necessary impact force to operate.
The wire line working string is composed by :
Rope Socket
Stems
Jars
Knuckle joints.
The service tools (running tools, pulling tools etc.) are not considered integral part of the wire
line working string.
1 1 7
The standard sizes for Wireline String are 1 /4, 1 /2" and 1 /8 OD.
11
Sizes 1", 1 /16 could be used for special operations or conditions, only if planned or under
the Wireline Superintendents authorisation.
The matching between sizes of wire line string and completion tubing are shown in the
following A - B - C schedules.
Key
Recommended
Recommended only in particular operating conditions
Not recommended
Tubing Diameter
3 7 1 1
1.9 2 /8 2 /8 3 /2 4 4 /2 5 7
Gradient Survey
Flow Control Redress
SCSSV Operation
Gauging
Fishing
Bailing
Tubing Perforating
SSD Operations
Packer Setting
Scratching
Impression Taking
Hydrates Removal
Running in Flowing Well
Table 3.A - Schedule A 11/4 OD Wireline Toolstring
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Tubing Diameter
3 7 1 1
1.9 2 /8 2 /8 3 /2 4 4 /2 5 7
Gradient Survey
SCSSV Operation
Gauging
Fishing
Bailing
Tubing Perforating
SSD Operations
Packer Setting
Scratching
Impression Taking
Hydrate Removal
Table 3.B - Schedule A 11/2 OD Wireline Toolstring
Tubing Diameter
3 7 1 1
1.9 2 /8 2 /8 3 /2 4 4 /2 5 7
Gradient Survey
SCSSV Operation
Gauging
Fishing
Bailing
Tubing Perforating
SSD Operations
Packer Setting
Scratching
Impression Taking
Hydrates Removal
Table 3.C - Schedule A 17/8 OD Wireline Toolstring
The standard material for the wire line string equipment is AISI 4140.
The material for the wireline string equipment to be used in sour gas wells will be defined
every time by the Wireline Superintendent and by STAP and TEAP departments.
The hardness for H2S service carbon steels must be less than 22 Rockwell C.
All the wire line string equipment must be supplied with proper external fishing necks, suited
to be hooked with a standard Halliburton/Otis type or Camco type pulling tool.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
3.2. ASSEMBLY SELECTION

3.2.1. Rope Socket
The Rope socket is defined like as the upper part of the wireline string connecting with the
wireline cable.
The use of the rope socket Disk-Spring Type (Refer to figure 3.b) for light duty operations is
suggested.
The use of the rope socket No-Knot Type (Refer to figure 3.a) for heavy duty operations
and with H2S service wireline cable is suggested.
For 0.125" OD wireline cable size, only the use of the No-Knot Type rope socket is allowed.
Figure 3.A - Knot Type Rope Socket Figure 3.B - No-Knot Type Rope Socket
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
3.2.2. Stem
Stem is defined as the bar used to add weight to the wireline string; they must be installed
immediately under the rope socket, to furnish the necessary weight to allow the running in
hole and the necessary impact force for the jar action.
The length of the wireline stem are 1ft, 2ft, 3ft and 5ft length. Wireline stem (Refer to figure
3.c) must be obtained by machining out of a single piece of forged steel.
In order to obtain a more compact wireline string, the use of Filled Type Stem (Refer to
figure 3.d) is suggested. The use of Filled Type Stem only with a tungsten alloy inside core
is allowed.
The Filled Type Stem external barrel must have an equalising hole and the threads locked
by an Allen screw.
Operations in high deviated wells, may be performed by using Roller Stem provided with
rollers. The friction reduction of the wireline string (Refer to figure 3.e) is a function of the
number of wheels and size.
The wheels must be made by material compatible with the tubing material.
3.2.3. Jars
Jars are defined as the tools that, installed below the stems in the wireline string, allow to
operate the down hole tools applying force of impact, toward the top and toward the bottom.
The link jars and the tubular jars are the type of jars having the capability to operate in both
upward and downward directions.
Link Jar
A link jar (Refer to figure 3.f) must be always be included in the wireline string assembly, with
the exception of when running Amerada gauges or memory gauges.
The length of the jar stroke must be as longest as possible, compatibly with completion
characteristics and planned wireline operation.
The shot force of the link jar is related to the jar opening speed.
The link jar external diameter must be the same of rope socket and stems external
diameters.
The link jar must be periodically inspected on the brackets and extremities. The link jar that
highlights contingent anomalies on these parts (bending, cracks, rapping etc.) must be
rejected.
3.2.4. Tubular Jar

The tubular jar (Refer to figure 3.g) is a tool that can be used during fishing operations. For
safety reasons, when performing fishing operations, a tubular jar is preferred to the link jar
because of its particular design.
The tubular jar is not a particularly strong tool, as consequence its use in normal wireline
operations is not recommended.
The tubular jar external diameter must be the same of rope socket and stem external
diameters.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Figure 3.C - Stem Figure 3.D - Filled Stem Figure 3.E - Roller Stem
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Hydraulic Jar
The Hydraulic jar is a tool able to perform only upstroke jar action.
The shot force is related to the applied over pull to the wireline string, at the jar release
moment.
The hydraulic jar shooting time depends on the hydraulic oil characteristics, selected
according to the well temperature. The choice of an oil with viscosity such to allow the jar
action 15-20secs after the overpull applied, is suggested.
The hydraulic jar external diameter must be the same of rope socket and stem external
diameters.
The hydraulic jar must be connected in the wireline string immediately above the link jar.
Use of the hydraulic jar in gas wells is not recommended. A leakage on the hydraulic section
can produce the gasification phenomenon in the hydraulic oil, loosing the jar action.
Mechanical Up-stroke Jar (Spring Type)

The mechanical up-stroke jar is a tool able to perform only the up stroke action. The shot
force is function of the opposing mainspring load. The up-stroke jar is activated when the
compression force of the mainspring is reached, acting the releasing mechanism.
The hydraulic jar must be connected in the wire line string immediately above of the link jar.
The mainspring could be: at fixed setting (ex. up-stroke jar Flopetrol type), to change the
setting, this mainspring must be replaced; adjustable setting (ex. up-stroke jar Petroline
type).
The external diameter of the hydraulic jar must be the same of the external diameter of rope
socket and stems.
Use of the mechanical up stroke jar is the alternative choice of the hydraulic jar.
Hydro-Mechanical Up-stroke Jar (Spring Type)

The hydro-mechanical up-stroke jar is a tool able to perform only up stroke action.
The shot force is related to the applied overpull to the wireline string, at the moment of jar
release.
The main differences between hydro-mechanical up-stroke jar and hydraulic jar are the
smaller hydraulic section drawing of the first one, the jar rod that is not part of the hydraulic
section, on which is not necessary to have a travelling hydraulic sealing.
The external diameter of hydro-mechanical up-stroke jar must be the same of the external
diameter of the rope socket and stem.
The use of mechanical up stroke jars is the alternative choice to the hydraulic jar and
mechanical up-stroke jar.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Figure 3.F - Link Jar Figure 3.G - Tubular Jar Figure 3.H - Hydraulic Mechanical
Jar
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
3.2.5. Knuckle Joints

The knuckle joint (Refer to figure 3.i) is a string tool that provides wireline string flexibility. It
is used to run wireline equipment in deviated wells or to simplify the down hole equipment
retrieving in particular situations.
The number and position of knuckle joints are planned in accordance with the completion
type, well deviation, type of wireline operation to be performed, and previous experience.
The insertion of knuckle joints in the wire line string for operations on vertical wells, or in
heavy jarring operations is not suggested because, due to its constructive design, it
represents a weak point in the wire line string.
Figure 3.I - Knuckle Joint

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
3.2.6. Types Of Connections

The connections of the wireline string tools for standard operations must be threaded.
Operations on flowing wells, heavy jar operations, and operations on HP/HT wells must be
performed by using a wireline string with Quick Lock Connections.
1 1 15
The thread of 1 /4 and 1 /2 OD wireline string tools is /16 - 10 UNF
5
The thread of 1" OD wireline string tools is /8 - 11 UNF
11 7 1
The thread of 1 /16 and 1 /8 wireline string tools is 1 /16 - 10 UNF
The Quick Lock Connection must be compatible with the wireline string standard external
diameters. They must have a design that allows its releasing exclusively by the operators
hand action, without keys or a pipe wrench.
The service tools (running tools, pulling tools etc.) will be provided with Quick Lock
Connections, or have the standard threaded connection and a pinned crossover.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
4. SURFACE EQUIPMENT SELECTION
Wire Line Surface Equipment is defined as the necessary equipment to perform wireline
operations in a pressure well, included connection with the wellhead, safety equipment and
the lifting equipment.
It consists of :
Lifting Equipment
Adapter Flanges
BOP
Lubricator Riser
Stuffing Box
Injection Nipple
Safety Check Union
Swab Valve
4.1. LIFTING EQUIPMENT

Lifting Equipment is defined as the equipment used to rig up, to lift, to position on the well
head and to hold in position the Pressure Control Equipment, during the execution of the
wire line operation.
The Lifting Equipment, in relation to the type of Pressure Control Equipment and to the
operational conditions, could include:
Gin Pole
Mast
Crane.
4.1.1. Gin Pole

The gin pole is a telescopic antenna made by three pipe sections, about 8ft long each, with
1 1
2 /2, 2" and 1 /2" sizes, respectively. The last upper section hold the flag which has the
purpose to hook the top pulley of the rope blocks. The steel used is grade N80 or better. All
three pipe sections are gifted of 16mm ID holes each foot about in order to effect their
connection with dedicate 15mm OD pins.
5
The gin pole is connected to the wellhead by load binder and chain. The use of a /16"
diameter chain is suggested. The two points of anchorage must be at a distance of 1m at
least, and the chain must be crossed between the hooking points (8 shape).
The lifting of the lubricator is effected by a rope blocks system, with the fixed block
connected to the flag and the travelling block connected to the lubricator itself, by means of
a hook. The use of 18mm diameter nylon rope is suggested; the pulley mechanical
advantage must be 3:1 or 4:1.
On some wellheads, the gin pole may be already installed, secured to the well head by
clamps. This system implicates the existence of a protection cage on the Xmas tree or, in
few cases, the top flange of the Xmas tree at the ground level.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
4.1.2. Mast
The mast is defined like the gin pole for offshore operation.
It consists of :
A frustum pyramidal base with perimeter dimension 4 times bigger than the main
deck scuttle.
Pipe sections as described in section 4.1.1. The lower gin pole section is
connected to the base by two ties, set on top and at the bottom of the pyramidal
base, with a pin hinge that allows, in case of necessity, laying down the gin pole.
The mast shall be installed in the best position to satisfy the verticality of the lubricator on the
wellhead. The lifting of the lubricator comes effected by a rope blocks system, with the fixed
block connected to the flag and the travelling block connected to the lubricator itself, by
means of a hook. The use of 18mm diameter nylon rope is suggested; the pulley mechanical
advantage must be 3:1 or 4:1.
4.1.3. Crane
The use of the crane to lift the lubricator equipment is subordinate to the job purpose, as
anticipated in section 2.2.
The choice of the crane is done according to the following criteria:
a) Minimum operating range to guarantee:
Lift of the lubricator for all its vertical length. The travelling block of the crane
must remains at least 2m far from the stuffing box sheave bracket assembly,
after the connection with the well head.
The effective hook load, with lubricator connected at the well head, must be the
sum of the double lubricator weight plus the maximum allowable pull on line.
b) Hydro-mechanical features:
The adjustable crane jib must be able to not slack off the weight for at least
24hrs, independently from the meteorological conditions.
The hook must be equipped with safety shut off device.
The following elements must be subject to CND at least every year: hook,
dedicated cables to wire line works, power cable.
Spark arrester on the muffler.
c) Operator:
Four years of experience in the oil patch, at least two of which in rigless and wire
line operations.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
4.2. ADAPTER FLANGE

Adapter Flange is defined the linking element between the Xmas tree top flanges and the
Wireline BOP bottom connection. The Adapter Flange must be machined from one piece of
forged and worked steel; the flange characteristics (nominal diameter, working pressure,
type of ring joint), and the top connection must be marked on.
The steel type shall be corrosion resistant to all the fluids in hole.
The working pressure of adapter flanges must be equal to, or higher than, the wellhead
working pressure.
Adapter flanges with API EUE bottom threaded connections must not be used.
Figure 4.A - Typical Adapter Flange
4.3. BOPS
A BOP is defined as the surface equipment element that provides the emergency shut on
the wire line . Only BOPs with wire shaped rams are allowed.
BOPs are the safety surface equipment elements that provides emergency shut-in on the
wireline in the event of a leak or accidental well flow (Refer to figure 4.b) and is sometimes
still referred to as a wireline valve. Only BOPs dressed with wire shaped rams are to be
used.
The specification of the BOP must be resistant to all corrosion from the well fluids and the
WP must be equal to, or higher than, the Xmas tree WP. The ID must be compatible with
the maximum tool OD to be run during operations and the bottom connection must be
compatible with the adapter flange and lubricator bottom connection.
The BOP must be equipped with an equalising valve to enable equalisation of pressure
before opening the BOP rams.
figure 4.b shows a typical single ram BOP and figure 4.c a concentric piston design.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Figure 4.B - Typical Single Ram Hydraulic Wireline BOP
Figure 4.C - Typical Concentric Piston BOP

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
The BOP must be hydraulic and/or manually controlled. The hydraulic control circuit must be
equipped with accumulators to provide a shut-in, open, shut again cycle within 90secs.
Hydraulic hose connections of snap type are allowed. The use of manual hydraulic pump is
1
allowed only for 2 /2 nominal size BOPs. The hydraulic control pump must be equipped,
downstream the fluid end, if necessary, with check valve + Tee + bleed off valve of the
proper WP.
The BOPs hydraulic control unit must be positioned a minimum of 30m away from the well
head. The hose WP must be at least equal or higher than the BOP working pressure.
The wire rams must be replaced after an emergency shut in on the slickline.
4.4. LUBRICATOR RISER

The Lubricator is composed of sections of tubes of about 8ft long. The Lubricator connection
must be of the Quick Union type, with the hydraulic seals as follow :
Lubricator connections must be of the Quick Union type, with the hydraulic seals as follows
in table 4.a.
Working Pressure Seal Type

5,000 psi Oring
10,000 psi Oring with seal protector ring
15,000 psi Oring with seal protector ring and non-extrusion ring
Table 4.A- Lubricator Seal Criteria
The connection among pipes and quick union must be integral type or weld-on type. The use
of Lubricator Risers with threaded connection among pipes and quick union is allowed for
working pressure up to 5,000psi, and in any case it is subordinate to the Wireline.
Superintendents approval.
The type of steel and the elastomeric seals will be corrosion resistant to all the fluids in hole.
The Lubricator working pressure must be equal or higher than the well head working
pressure. The Lubricator ID must be compatible with the maximum tool OD to be run during
1
the operation. In the lower section of the Lubricator a /2" NPT threaded hole for WPs up to
1
10Kpsi shall be present, or 1 /2" UNF metal seal threaded hole for greater WP (Refer to
figure 4.d). The Lubricator pressure bleeding off shall be carried out using one bleed off
valve for WPs up to 5,000psi, and two bleed off valves for WPs > 5,000psi.
On the Lubricator bleed off point a wear joint must be applied. The bleed off valves WP must
be equal or higher than the Lubricator working pressure, and must be made of material
resistant to all the fluids in hole.
To lift the lubricator, its upper section must be equipped with lifting tie, installed 2 to 3ft from
the stuffing box, able to hang the surface equipment weight.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Figure 4.D - Typical Lubricator Section (Lower)
4.5. STUFFING BOX

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
The Stuffing Box is defined as the surface equipment element that guarantees the hydraulic
seal on the wireline cable by means of sealing elements during the operations in hole (Refer
to figure 4.e). The Stuffing Box must be equipped with a top pulley (Sheave Bracket Assy)
and bottom connection fit to the lubricator upper section connection.
The type of steel and the elastomeric seals will be corrosion resistant to all the fluids in hole
for quick union seals and packing element as well.
The Stuffing Box WP must be same as the other surface equipment WP.
Figure 4.E - Typical Stuffing Boxes
The Stuffing Box must be hydraulically controlled and the hydraulic control pump positioned
in safe position. Hydraulic hose connections pull-push type are allowed.
The hydraulic control pump must be equipped, downstream the fluid end, if necessary, with
check valve + Tee + bleed off valve of the proper WP.
The hoses WP must be at least equal or higher than the Stuffing Box working pressure.
The sheave bracket assy dimensions shall be changed according to the wire diameter and
material.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
The quantity and quality of packing elements in the Stuffing box packing unit shall be
changed in accordance with the fluid in hole and with the wire line steel type. They must be
replaced as per the following criteria:
Characteristics of the fluid in hole.
HP-HT situations.
Work typology and duration.
Packing type versus wire line material compatibility
Experiences in analogous situations.
The stuffing box packing conditions must be compulsory inspected before starting to run in
hole with any tools.
4.6. INJECTION NIPPLE

Injection Nipple (Refer to figure 4.f) is defined the part of the Lubricator equipment that
allows the injection in hole, during the Wireline operations and directly onto the wire, of the
chemical products.
Figure 4.F - Typical Injection Sub
The use of the Injection Nipple during wells operations with hydrates, asphaltene or paraffin
problems is suggested.
The Injection Nipple must be installed, on the Pressure Control Equipment, between the
upper section of the lubricator and the Stuffing Box.
The Injection Nipple working pressure must be same or higher than the wellhead working
pressure, and in any case equal to the Lubricator working pressure at least.
The Injection Nipple connections must be of the Quick Union type with hydraulic seal, to
allow the link with the Lubricator upper section and the Stuffing Box without crossovers.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
The type of steel and the elastomeric seals will be corrosion resistant to all the fluids in hole
1
even for quick union seals and packing element. A /2" NPT threaded hole for WP up to
1
10Kpsi, or 1 /8" UNF metal seal threaded hole for greater WP shall be present on the
Injection Nipple external body.
The use of needle valve and/or check valve on the injection line, connected directly to the
Injection Nipple in standing position, is suggested.
4.7. SAFETY CHECK UNION

The Safety Check Union (Refer to figure 4.g ) is defined as the part of Lubricator equipment
to block, automatically and in brief times, the well flow through the Stuffing Box in case of
breaking and expulsion of the wire from the well.
Figure 4.G - Safety check Union
The use of Safety Check Union is compulsory during wireline operations on sour gas and oil
wells.
The Safety Check Union must be installed, in the Pressure Control Equipment, between the
upper section of the Lubricator and the Injection Nipple.
The Safety Check Union working pressure must be same or higher than the wellhead
working pressure, and in any case equal to the Lubricator working pressure.
The Safety Check Union connections must be Quick Union type with a hydraulic seal, to
allow the link with the Lubricator upper section and the Injection Nipple without crossovers.
The type of steel and the elastomeric seals will be corrosion resistant to all the fluids in hole.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
4.8. SWAB VALVE

Swab Valve is defined the upper vertical valve of the Xmas Tree. In some types of
wellheads, this valve is not present in normal producing conditions.
The presence of a Swab Valve having the same characteristics of the Xmas Tree Master
Valve is compulsory in case of wire line operations with the well flowing, and suggested for
wire line operations in static conditions.
The hydraulic test on the Swab Valve at the Working Pressure must be recorded before the
installation. The flanged connection between the Swab Valve and the Xmas Tree must be
hydraulically tested at Working Pressure before the Pressure Control Equipment rig up.
The use of an additional hydraulic Swab Valve having the same characteristics and the
same Working Pressure of the Christmas Tree Working Valve is suggested for wireline
operations on wells with STHP higher than 10,000psi.
The hydraulic actuator of the additional hydraulic Swab Valve must be the double effect type.
Fail Safe Hydraulic Swab Valve are not allowed.
The hydraulic Swab Valve control unit must be positioned minimum 30m away from the
wellhead.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
5. WIRE SELECTION
The following section describes the various sizes and types of wireline available and the
criteria for use.
5.1. WIRE DIAMETERS

API specification 9A gives the industry standard for wireline sizes although other products
may be available on the market out with API specifications for specialised operations or
conditions.
The specification lists the following wire sizes for slickline:
0.066 (1.68mm) OD
0.072 (1.83mm) OD
0.092 (2.34mm) OD
0.108 (2.74mm) OD
0.125 (3.17mm) OD.
Eni-Agip standardises on the use of only the last three sizes (Refer to section 3 of STAP- P-
1-M-6066).
The 0.092 wire shall be used for light duty operations.
The minimum wire size to be used for heavy duty operations must have at least twice the
yield strength than the maximum tension expected pull on the line for the particular operation
although unexpected operations such as fishing, etc., must be taken into consideration.
The use of 0.108" or 0.125" slickline to perform heavy duty operations is recommended.
The Wireline Superintendent may make exceptions to these regulations by selecting and
authorising a wireline for some special operations (i.e. gradient recording on HP/HT wells).
5.2. MATERIALS
Wireline steel grades must be compatible with the well fluids (Refer to STAP M-1-M-4001).
5.3. ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT

5.3.1. Counter Wheel
The minimum dimensions of the counter wheel (Refer to figure 5.a) depends on the steel
grade and size of the wire to be used. This is ensure depth measurement accuracy and also
to prevent fatigue to the wire.
The following formula may be applied to calculate the minimum wheel diameter:
d Eq. 5.A
D = C 10 6
Rm
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
where:
D = Wheel Diameter, ins
d = Wire Diameter, ins
Rm = Tensile strength, psi
C = Constant of proportionality
The counter wheel groove bottom diameter must be altered in accordance with wire size
being used and the depth measurement equipment (odometer). The wire depth
measurement is calculated on the centre of the wire and the turns on the counter wheel.
The wireline must have one complete turn around the counter wheel and be held in position
by two pressure wheels to prevent jumping off during jarring and other rigorous operations.
Figure 5.A - Measuring Wheel
5.4. OTHER SHEAVES

The formula given above also determines the minimum diameter of all the other sheaves
which includes the hay pulley and stuffing box sheaves. This is not for accurate depth
measurement in these cases but to prevent fatigue of the line.
5.5. COATED WIRE LINE CABLE

For wireline operations in wells completed with internal coated tubing, the utilisation of
external coated wireline or slickline (Refer to figure 5.b) can be considered.
At the current time, this type of wire has given some problems due to the different elasticity
between the wire and the coating. However, it is envisaged in the near future that the
development of these new products will overcome the problems.
Steel wire
OD
Coating
Figure 5.B - Coated Wireline

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
When selecting a coated wireline, the following considerations must be applied:

The steel grade of the line shall be for standard service (plough steel)
The coating material must be compatible with the tubing coating.
The final coated line OD must be included in the standard in 5.1.
Associated equipment specification and wheels diameters must be supplied by
the seller of the wireline.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
6. WIRELINE UNIT SELECTION
The Wireline Unit is the surface equipment necessary to deploy the toolstrings into and
retrieval from the well and consists of a winch and power pack and relevant auxiliary
equipment.
The various wireline units have been designed in accordance with the operations for which
they have to perform. In Eni-Agips case, as per the following criteria:
For a heavy duty operation a heavy duty wireline unit will be used.
For a light duty operation a light duty wireline unit will be used.
The use of a truck mounted wireline unit for onshore operations is recommended.
The use of skid mounted wireline unit for offshore operations is mandatory.
Truck mounted wireline units as well as the skid mounted wire line units may be, either,
heavy duty or light duty types.
6.1. HEAVY DUTY LAND TRUCK

6.1.1. Truck Specification
a) The truck must have mechanical characteristics (wheel base, number of driving
axles, tires, gear ratio etc.) correct for the area of operation.
b) The available power for the hydraulic pump must be at least 1.2 times higher
than the winch required power.
c) The use of the truck motor as the power source is recommended for operations
in areas with a temperate climate. In the areas with arid climate, it is possible to
carry out the wireline operations with a dedicated power source.
d) The separation between the winch room from the operators cabin is
recommended.
e) The operating cab (winch and operators cabin) must be provided with internal
lighting. The heavy duty wire line unit should be equipped with a generating set,
compressor and auxiliary external electric plant.
f) All the electric systems must be explosion-proof.
g) The mufflers of the motors must be equipped with spark arresting exhaust
silencers.
h) The cab should be manufactured from stainless steel for use in continental
climates.
i) The carrying capacity of the truck must be greater than the weight of reel,
contingent dedicated power unit and all the wireline equipment.
j) The overall dimensions of the truck must meet with the regulations of the country
in which it must operate.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
6.1.2. Winch
a) The power transmission between motor and winch must be hydraulically driven.
b) The motor-hydraulic pump group must furnish the sufficient power to the
performance of the winch, approximately 40-50 HP.
c) Reel capacity must be not less than 25,000ft of 0.092" wire or 20,000ft of 0.108"
wire.
d) Minimum line speed is 1,800ft/min at surface.
e) Maximum pull on line must be not less than 2,100lbs at 20,000ft.
f) The hydraulic circuit must have:
The capability to exert a line pull and line speed with stepless control.
To regulate and maintain the maximum practicable tension on the line.
To use the hydraulic motor as brake during the running in hole.
Equipped with safety pressure relief valves on the hydraulic pump and
hydraulic motor to drain the pressure from the high to the low pressure
circuit.
Equipped with safety pressure relief valves to drain from the low pressure
circuit to atmosphere.
Must operate with readily available hydraulic oil.
g) The winch equipment necessary is:

Weight indicator composed by hydraulic load cell and reading gauge
having the full-scale not less than the breaking strength of the wireline with
a resolution which must be not greater than 5lbs full scale.
Depth indicator counter wheel, with 0.5m resolution.
Hydraulic high pressure circuit manometer, hydraulic oil thermometer,
hydraulic oil level indicator and alarm, motor oil manometer and motor
cooling circuit thermometer.
6.1.3. Surface Equipment

a) Surface equipment with a diameter, working pressure and correct length for the
planned operations.
b) Quantity of wireline tools to be sufficient for the composition of two toolstrings.
c) Down hole equipment in accordance with the planned operations.
d) Fishing tools provided for contingency in retrieval of wire and toolstrings.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
6.2. LIGHT DUTY LAND TRUCK

6.2.1. Truck Specification
a) The truck must have mechanical characteristics (wheel base, number of driving
axles, tires, gear ratio etc.) correct for the area of operation.
c) The use of the truck motor as the power source is recommended for operations
in areas with a temperate climate. In the areas with arid climate, it is possible to
carry out the wireline operation with a dedicate power source.
d) The separation between the winch room from the operators cabin is
recommended.
e) The operating cab (winch and operators cabin) must be provided with internal
lighting.
f) All the electric systems must be explosion proof.
g) The mufflers of the motors must be equipped with spark arresting exhaust
silencers.
h) The cab should be manufactured from stainless steel for use in continental
climates.
i) The carrying capacity of the truck must be greater than the weight of reel,
contingent dedicated power unit and all the wireline equipment.
j) The overall dimensions of the truck must meet with the regulations of the country
in which it must operate.
6.2.2. Winch
c) Reel capacity must be not less than 15,000ft of 0.092" wire.
circuit.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
a) The winch equipment necessary is:


planned operations.
6.3. HEAVY DUTY OFFSHORE SKID

6.3.1. Skid Unit
a) The cab must have the minimum possible overall dimensions and equipped with
certified lifting points. The total weight and the overall dimensions must be easily
observable.
c) The use of a diesel power pack with an electric start is recommended.
d) The power pack must be separated from the operators cabin both physically and
acoustically. The use of a power pack completely separate from the wireline skid
is permitted.
e) Separation of the winch from the operators cabin is recommended.
f) The operating cab (both winch and operators cabin) must be supplied with
internal lighting. Equipping a heavy duty wireline unit with a generating set is
recommended.
g) All the electric systems must be explosion proof.
h) The muffler of the motor must be equipped with spark arresting exhaust
silencers.
i) The cab should be manufactured from stainless steel for use in continental
climates.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
6.3.2. Winch
c) Reel capacity must be not less than 25,000ft of 0.092" wire or 20,000ft of 0.108"
wire.
circuit.
g) The winch equipment necessary is:


planned operations.
e) The surface equipment may be stored on the completing cab of the wireline
heavy duty skid, with the tools stored separately in a toolbox.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
6.4. LIGHT DUTY OFFSHORE SKID

6.4.1. Skid Unit
a) The cab must have the minimum possible overall dimensions and equipped with
certified lifting points. The total weight and the overall dimensions must be easily
observable.
c) The use of a diesel power pack with an electric start is recommended.
d) The power pack must be separated from the operators cabin both physically and
acoustically. The use of a power pack completely separate from the wireline skid
is permitted.
e) Separation of the winch from the operators cabin is recommended.
f) The operating cab (both winch and operators cabin) must be supplied with
internal lighting. Equipping a heavy duty wireline unit with a generating set is
recommended.
g) All the electric systems must be explosion proof.
h) The muffler of the motor must be equipped with spark arresting exhaust
silencers.
i) The cab should be manufactured from stainless steel for use in continental
climates.
6.4.2. Winch
c) Reel capacity must be not less than 15,000ft of 0.092" wire.
circuit.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
a) The winch equipment necessary is:


planned operations.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
7. DOCUMENTATION
This section outlines the documentation necessary for conducting efficient wireline
operations and reporting.
7.1.1. Preliminary Information

Before performing any well operations the following documentation and information must be
available:
a) A detailed programme including:
Name of Field
Name of Well
Well Code
Cost Centre Number
Progressive Number for the Operation (where applicable)
RKB Elevation
Completion String Profile (completion components ID, length, tubing
size/weight, depths, etc.)
Tubing Entry Guide Depth
Intervals Open
Type of Flange to Connect Wellhead
Type of Back Pressure Valve (where scheduled )
Date and Magnitude of the Last Recorded WHP
Type and Characteristics of Well Equipment
Design of the Wireline Toolstring
Type and Specifications of Surface Equipment
Type and Specifications of Wireline Tools
Type and Diameter of Wire
Deviation Report.
b) Up to date Well Report (ARPO-02)

c) Up to date Wellhead Report
d) Last Wireline Operation Report (ARPO-11)
e) Last recorded Pressure and Temperature Gradient Report (ARPO-12)
f) Last Production Well Testing Report (ARPO-10).
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
7.1.2. Wellsite Reports

To schedule future operational programmes, all rigless wireline operations must be properly
documented and kept on file to maintain the history of operations performed on any well.
The wireline operations performed during rig operations (completion string gauging, packer
setting, etc.) will not be reported in the Wireline Report (ARPO-11) but in the Daily Report
(ARPO-02). Also, at the end of operations the Wireline Chief Operator will provide to the Eni-
Agip Representative a 'Wellsite Report' containing a full description of the operations
performed.
The wireline operations performed during rig operations that gives the configuration of the
well at the end of completion operations (plug setting, SCSSV setting, BPV setting, etc.)
must be reported on the ARPO-11.
It is responsibility of the Wireline Superintendent to inform the Eni-Agip Representative on
how to compile the necessary reports.
It is responsibility of the Company Representative to compile and forward the reports
(indicated below) to the Wireline Superintendent. The Wireline Superintendent will then
check and approve the reports before distribution and filing.
7.1.3. Feed Back Reports

The following reports are compiled at the end of the operations:
a) ARPO 02 Daily Report
b) ARPO 11 Wireline Report
c) ARPO 12 Pressure and Temperature Survey Report
d) FB-01 Report on Equipment Damage and Malfunctions
e) FB-02 Service Company Evaluation Report
Refer to Appendix A for copies of appropriate reports.
7.1.4. Other Reports

The Eni-Agip Representative must sign the Service Report of the Service Company which
must include the following information :
Name of Well
Name of Field
Order Number
Date
Personnel and equipment used
Description of the operations conducted.
Prior to the commencement of operations the Eni-Agip Representative must confirm the Job
Permission document is duly compiled and approved by the Operations Manager or his
designate.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
8. WIRELINE RIG-UP/DOWN OPERATIONS
Rig up and Rig down Operations are defined by operations that precedes and follows
running wireline tools into the hole; independent of the type of work to be carried out.
Type of work includes handling, make-up, lifting and installing surface facilities, positioning
the unit by means of lifting and make-up of the wireline string.
The Wireline Chief Operator is responsible to check the equipment condition, make-up,
lifting and installing the equipment.
The Eni-Agip Representative shall ensure that:
Manuals and procedures are available at rig site.
Wireline Crew have at their disposal their own safety equipment.
Wireline Chief Operator to provide the documentation on the NDE (Non
Destructive Examination) performed on the equipment in use.
8.1.1. Toolstring Weight Determination

The weight of the wireline toolstring is the sum of required weights as follows:
a) to balance the force resulting from wellhead pressure acting on the wire area and
to overcome the friction of the wire on sheaves and stuffing box (which is defined
minimum weight, Pm ).
b) to provide mass for jar action, WR .
The minimum weight, Pm , is calculated with the following formula :
WL 2 Eq. 8.A
Pm = x x WHP x 1.5 [kg]
10 4
where:
Pm = Minimum weight, kg
WL = Wireline OD, mm
2
WHP = Wellhead pressure, kg/cm
The total weight will be then given by relation :

PT = Pm + WR [kg]
where:
PT = Total weight, kg
PM = Minimum weight, kg
WR = Additional weight for jar impact action, kg
It is then possible to calculate the total length of the wireline string to make up, according to
the diameter selected and the material of which it is made.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Wireline carbon steel stem:

PT [m]
L STEM = 2
1 SG x 7.85 x STEM x

7.85 100 4

10
Wireline tungsten carbide filled stem:

PT [m]
L STEM = 2
SG STEM
1 11.5 x 11.5 x 100 x 4

10
8.2. RIG OPERATIONS
Rig Operations are defined as operations carried out on rigs for drilling or workovers, either
onshore or offshore, with the use of equipment and Wireline Crews for HD (Heavy Duty) or
LD (Light Duty) Jobs, according to the type of equipment, completion and duration of the
operation.
It is the responsibility of the Eni-Agip Supervisor to provide instructions and documentation
required by the operation, in particular:
Operation programmes
Completion design including depths and diameters of equipment
Height of rotary table floor from a reference point (base flange or upper flange of
the tubing spool)
Type and characteristics of fluid present in the string
It is the responsibility of the Eni-Agip Supervisor to give instructions to the Rig Contractor
regarding the location of the wireline unit at rig site and assist the Wireline Crew during the
operation.
The Wireline Crew shall be qualified to deal with all planned operations without creating
interruptions in the activity. For this purpose, the organisation of the Wireline Crew is the
responsibility of the Wireline Superintendent.
The Wireline Crew shall observe the general safety conditions given by the operations
responsible according to both the rig site or platform logistic and of the possible danger of
fluids present on location.
Control of the regulation's application by the Wireline Crew is the responsibility of the Drilling
Contractor.
The Wireline Crews equipment shall include individual protection equipment and fire
prevention equipment required to comply with the rules issued by the responsible
department.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
8.2.1. Land
A) Rig Up During Well Completion
Rig up during well completion operations are wireline operations performed during the well
completion phase, i.e. tubing gauging and depth control of the landing nipples which are
performed during or at the end of the completion running and before the wellhead
installation.
Selection of surface facilities:
a) Sub tubing threaded pin down x quick union box up with connection for lifting
sub.
b) T member threaded quick union pin x box and 2 Weco lateral outlet (Fig. 1002
or 1502).
c) Wireline BOP with quick union pin down x box up.
The above components shall have an ID to allow the passage of the tool with a maximum
diameter according to the completion design.
The unit type shall be selected according to the type of completion and maximum working
depth. Wire size and metallurgy shall be selected according to the characteristics of the
completion fluid and possible presence of corrosive fluids (e.g. H2S, brine with corrosive
components).
The Wireline Crew shall be qualified to withstand all planned operations without creating
interruptions in the activity. Light Duty Crew shall be used when dealing with a single
completion on wells of a limited depth. Heavy Duty Crew shall be used when dealing with
single selective or dual completion with several sliding sleeves, landing nipples, surface
controlled safety valves.
The Wireline unit shall be equipped with at least the following :
a) Components of the wireline string sufficient to make up two strings.
b) Gauge cutters suitable to the completion design.
c) Wire suitable to fluids present/expected in hole as well as mechanical stress.
d) Fishing equipment suitable to the completion design (e.g. Wireline grabs, wire
cutters Go Devil , impression blocks, etc.), and wireline string used (pulling tools,
fishing socket, etc.).
Procedure
1) Position the wireline unit approximately 30m from the wellhead, in front of the pipe rack
walkway taking into consideration the logistics of the rig used.
2) Extend the wire, check it visually and perform an integrity test by way of a torsion test.
3) Bring the disassembled wireline working string, wheels and loading cell of the weight
indicator onto the rotary table floor.
4) Make up the rope socket (Refer to section 3.2.1):
For Heavy Duty Jobs use a no knot type.
For Light Duty Jobs the use of a conventional rope socket, making it with 15 turns, is
allowed.
5) After assembling, check that the rope socket is free to rotate around the wire.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
1) On the rig floor :

a) Install the loading cell of the weight indicator in optimal position to the sight of the
Wireline Operator so that he can easily see it. Install the first sheave to the
o
loading cell so that the wire forms an angle as close as possible to 90 .
b) Install sub tubing thread pin down x quick union box up + T member quick
threaded union pin x box and 2 Weco lateral outlet (Fig. 1002 or 1502) plus
Wireline BOP with quick union pin x box.
c) Connect the 2" Weco connection to the rig manifold for a possible kill.
d) Install the second sheave to the travelling block.
7) Pulling the wire, bring the rope socket previously composed to the rig floor.
8) Insert the wire into the groove of the wheels.
9) Connect at least one length of stem to the rope socket.
10) Lift the first sheave keeping the wireline string from snagging.
11) Complete the make-up of the toolstring according to the programme or Eni-Agip
Supervisors indications.
12) Make up the required wireline tool.
13) Lay down the wireline string onto the rotary table. The weight indicator should indicate
zero. Lift the string and check that the weight indicator reading corresponds to the
calculated weight. If the check is wrong, clean the line and/or manually re-adjust the
instrumentation.
14) With the Tool at rotary table level set the odometer to zero.
15) Perform the planned wireline operation.
16) Rig down procedures follows the opposite to the above mentioned procedures paying
particular attention to the following points:
a) Cut the wire only after having disassembled all the components of the wireline
string. To allow a faster and better rewinding of the wire for the initial recovery on
the drum of the drawworks move away from the rig floor. For this purpose make
an eye on the end of the wire.
b) It is necessary to put back the used components after they have been cleaned
and redressed. Perform the same maintenance on the BOP.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
B) Rig Up During Production

These are wireline operations carried out in a pressured hole.
The surface facilities are composed of a lubricator, stuffing box, BOP and adapter flange.
Such components shall be suitable to the operation according to the following criteria:
a) Lubricator ID adequate to the max. tool size of the equipment be used.
b) WP greater or equal to the Xmas tree WP.
c) Compatibility of materials with fluids present in hole.
d) Additional equipment, i.e. injection nipple and safety check union can be decided
according to the type of operation and well condition.
The unit type shall be selected according to the completion and maximum depth of work.
Wire size and metallurgy shall be selected according to characteristics of the completion,
formation fluids and reservoir temperature.
The composition of the Wireline Crew shall be qualified to withstand all planned operations
without creating interruptions in activity. The employment of Heavy Duty Crew or Light Duty
Crew depends on the diameter of the completion string, working pressure of surface
equipment, duration and type of operation.
The Wireline unit shall be equipped with a minimum of equipment including:
b) Gauge cutter of a suitable diameter to the completion design.
c) Wire suitable to fluids present or expected in the hole as well as mechanical
stress.
d) Fishing equipment suitable to the completion design (e.g.: Wireline. grabs, Go
Devil wire cutters, impression blocks, etc.), and to the wireline string used
(pulling tools, fishing socket, etc.).
e) Shifting tools, running and pulling tools of suitable size.
f) Amerada mechanical and/or memory gauges and all relevant equipment.
g) Plugs for possible shut off levels and well securing.
Procedure (Light Duty Operation)

1) Position the wireline unit at approximately 30 m from the wellhead in front of the pipe
rack walkway taking into consideration the logistic of the rig used.
2) Ensure that the wellhead is made safe (derrick floor, barriers, etc.) and remove all
objects from the rotary table floor that can constitute a hitch or risk to the operation.
3) Check the top flange of the wellhead and ensure that the required adapter flange is
available.
4) Ensure that the swab valve is completely closed.
5) If the programme or Eni-Agip Supervisor deems it necessary, function test the BOP.
6) Install the adapter flange.
7) Lift the BOP using the crane by hooking it up to the eye of the lifting plug and install it
on the adapter flange. In some cases, the surface equipment for Light Duty Jobs is
provided with a flanged BOP. In this situation skip step 6) of the procedure.
8) Take from the unit or basket the required joints of the lubricator and lean them on the
gantries.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
1) Remove thread protectors and properly clean sealing areas and all threads. Check
integrity of the O Ring on the pin.
2) Make up the lubricator on the appropriate gantry without removing the lower thread
protector. Install a bleeder valve on the lower joint of the lubricator.
3) Check, measure and mate each component of the wireline string before inserting into
the lubricator.
4) Check the stuffing box seals and if required replace them.
5) Extend the wire, visually check it and test integrity by way of a torsion test.
6) Insert the wire through the stuffing box seals and through the rope socket of a suitable
diameter.
7) Make up the rope socket (Refer to section 3.2.1):
For Light Duty Jobs the use of a conventional rope socket, making it with 15 windings,
is allowed.
17) Make up the rope socket onto the top of the string, block the wire in the groove of the
stuffing box sheave and pull back the wire until the string is set on the top of the
lubricator.
18) Connect the stuffing box to the lubricator.
19) Apply the lifting clamp of the lubricator plus two equal lengths of steel rope and
relevant eyebolts at about 2ft from the stuffing box
20) Install the loading cell of the weight indicator in optimal position to the sight of the
Wireline Operator so that he can easily see it. Install the first sheave to the loading cell
o
so that the wire forms an angle as close as possible to 90 .
21) Slowly lift the lubricator with the rig hoist or winch. In this phase the helper shall follow
the wire until the string runs to the bottom thread protector.
22) Place the lubricator onto the ramp of the pipe rack, hook off the hoist or winch and
hook up the travelling block to the lubricator with adequate steel ropes.
23) Insert the line into the groove of the sheave which is connected to the load cell of the
weight indicator.
24) Spool back the wire with the drawworks until the string is no longer on the bottom
thread protector.
25) Remove the thread protector from the bottom thread.
26) Lay down the wireline string on the rotary table. The weight indicator should indicate
zero. Lift the string and check that the weight indicator reading corresponds to the one
calculated. If the check is negative, clean the line and/or manually re-adjust the
instrumentation.
27) Connect the selected tool to the wireline string.
28) When the tool is at the rotary table level or at the reference flange, reset the odometer
to zero.
29) Retrieve the wireline string inside the lubricator.
30) Connect the lubricator to the BOP.
31) Install onto the bleeder valve a proper scaled gauge or the control line for the dead
weight tester.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
32) Perform the lubricator pressure test to the Xmas tree WP for 15mins by using water or
non-freezing fluid then bleed off pressure to zero.
33) The operator shall open/close the wellhead valves and count the revolutions. Slowly
open the swab valve until the fluid or gas fills the lubricator. When the pressure is
stable complete to open the swab valve.
35) When the wireline string is completely pulled out, ensure that the wireline tool is above
the swab valve. Close the swab valve and count the revolutions of the closing wheel.
36) The rig down procedures follows the opposite of the above mentioned procedures
paying particular attention to the following points :
Procedure (Heavy Duty Operation)

1) Position the wireline unit approximately 30m from the wellhead in front of the pipe rack
walkway keeping due consideration to the logistics of the rig.
available.
5) Install the wireline adapter flange.
6) Perform a torsion test on the wire and function test the BOP.
7) Lift the BOP with the crane by hooking it up to the eye of the lifting plug and install it on
the adapter flange.
8) Make up the lubricator on the ground or on the appropriate gantries.
9) Inspect the stuffing box, replace the packing if it is required. Extend the wire, insert it
through the stuffing box seals and through the rope socket of a suitable diameter.
Make up a no knot type rope socket (3.2.1).
10) Lift the lubricator by means of the crane and place it on the ramp of the pipe rack.
Ensure that the bottom connection is protected by an aluminium plug.
11) Hook up the lubricator to the travelling block by means of a hanger and steel ropes.
12) Remove the master bushing of the rotary table.
13) Lift the lubricator with the travelling block and insert it inside the rotary table.
14) Lift the stuffing box by means of an air hoist or winch and insert it inside the rotary
table.
15) Install the pressure transducer (load cell of the Martin-Decker) and the sheave on the
wellhead. Insert the line in the groove of the sheave.
16) Keep the stuffing box hoisted and make up the rope socket on at least 6ft of stem.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
1) Connect the stuffing box to the lubricator and bring the bottom connection of the
lubricator to the height of the derrick floor.
2) Remove the aluminium plug, lower the wireline string and complete the composition.
3) Check that the weight indicator reading in the operator box is equal to the theoretical
calculation, otherwise, adjust the instrumentation as per manufacturers instructions.
4) Lower the working string to the derrick floor, and make up the required tool.
5) Bring the tool to the height of the referenced flange and reset the odometer to zero.
6) Pull back the wireline string into the lubricator, and lower the lubricator by means of the
travelling block. Connect the lubricator to the BOP and close the bleeder valve (for a
surface assembly greater or equal to 10,000psi two bleeder valves in series are used).
7) Perform the lubricator pressure test to the Xmas tree WP for 15mins using water or
8) Slowly open the swab valve until the fluid or gas fills the lubricator. Check that there
are no leaks in the quick unions and stuffing box. When the pressure is stable
complete to open the swab valve counting the revolutions.
9) Install onto the bleeder valve a proper scaled gauge or control line for the dead weight
tester.
12) Bleed off pressure of the lubricator through the bleeder valve. In case of gaseous
hydrocarbon without H2S, release in the atmosphere is allowed.
In the case of liquid hydrocarbon the lubricator discharge shall be performed in a
dedicated container; in the case of H2S the above procedure shall be authorised by the
Safety Expert and added to the operating programme.
29) Loosen the connection between the lubricator and BOP, lift the lubricator by means of
the travelling block until the lower connection of the lubricator remains just above the
top connection of the BOP.
30) Lower the wireline string until the wire line tool is placed at derrick floor level, break off
the wireline tool and lower the wire line string as stated above then break off the
wireline string.
31) Lower the wire line string, cut the line approximately 6 above the rope socket and pull
out the wire outside the stuffing box. Spool back the wire into the reel taking care not
to bend it.
32) The rig down procedures follows the opposite to the above mentioned procedures
paying particular attention to the following point :
a) It is necessary to put back the used components after they have been cleaned
and redressed.
b) Perform the same maintenance on the BOP.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
8.2.2. Jack-Up/Fixed Platform/Barge

completion phase, i.e. tubing gauging and depth control of the landing nipple which is
installation.
Selection of the surface facilities:
sub.
b) T member threaded quick union pin x box and 2" Weco lateral outlet (Fig. 1002
or 1502).
depth. The wire size and metallurgy shall be selected according to the characteristics of the
completion fluid and the possible presence of corrosive fluids (e.g. H2S, brine with corrosive
components).
interruption in the activity. Light Duty Crew shall be used when dealing with a single
completion of a limited depth. Heavy Duty Crew shall be used when dealing with single
selective or dual completion with several sliding sleeves, landing nipples, surface controlled
safety valves.
The Wireline unit shall be equipped with at least the following :
b) Gauge cutters suitable for the completion design.
c) Wire suitable to fluids present/expected in hole as well as for mechanical stress.
d) Fishing equipment suitable for the completion design (e.g., Wireline grabs, Go
Devil wire cutters, Impression blocks, etc.) and wireline string used (pulling tools,
Procedure
1) Position the wireline unit approximately 30m from wellhead, in front of the pipe rack
walkway taking into consideration the logistics of the rig used.
indicator onto the rotary table floor
4) Make up the rope socket:
allowed.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
6) On the rig floor:
a) Install loading cell of the weight indicator in optimal position to the sight of the
Wireline operator so that he can easily see it. Install the first sheave to loading
cell so that the line forms an angle as close as possible to 90.
threaded union pin x box and 2 Weco lateral outlet (Fig. 1002 or 1502) plus
Wireline BOP with quick union pin x box.
c) Connect the 2" Weco connection at the rig manifold for a possible kill.
d) Install the second sheave to the travelling block.
7) Pulling the wire, bring the rope socket previously assembled on the rig floor.
9) Connect at least 1 stem to the rope socket.
10) Lift the first sheave keeping the wireline string.
11) Complete the make-up of the working string according to the programme or Eni-Agip
zero. Lift the string and check that the weight indicator reading corresponds to the one
calculated. If the check is negative, clean the line and/or manually re-adjust the
instrumentation.
14) With Tool at rotary table level set the odometer to zero.
16) The rig down procedures follows the opposite of the above mentioned procedures
paying particular attention to the following points:
the drum of the drawworks move away from the rig floor. For this purpose, make
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0

The surface facilities are composed of a lubricator, stuffing box, BOP and adapter
flange. Such components shall be suitable according to following criteria:
a) The Lubricator ID adequate to the max. tool size of the equipment to be used.
b) WP is greater or equal to the Xmas tree W P.
d) Additional equipment, i.e. injection nipple and safety check union can be decided
according to type of operation and well condition.
Wire size and metallurgy shall be selected according to the characteristics of the completion,
The composition of the Wireline Crew shall be qualified to withstand all the planned
operations without creating interruptions in the activity. The employment of a Heavy Duty
Crew or Light Duty Crew depends on the diameter of completion string, working pressure of
surface equipment, duration and type of operation.
The wireline unit shall be equipped with a minimum of equipment including :
c) Wire compatible to the fluids present/expected in hole as well as mechanical
stress.
d) Fishing equipment suitable to the completion design (e.g., Wireline grabs, Go
g) Plugs for the possible shut off levels and well securing.
Procedure (Light Duty Operation)

walkway taking into consideration the logistics of the rig.
available.
5) If the programme or Eni-Agip Supervisor deems it necessary, function test the BOP.
6) Install the adapter flange.
7) Lift the BOP using the crane by hooking it up to the eye of the lifting plug and install it
on the adapter flange. In some cases the surface equipment for Light Duty Jobs is
provided with a flanged BOP. In this case omit step 6) of this procedure.
gantries.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
1) Remove the thread protectors and properly clean sealing areas and all threads. Check
2) Make up the lubricator on the appropriate gantries without removing the lower thread
the lubricator.
6) Insert the wire through the stuffing box seals, and through the rope socket of a suitable
diameter.
7) Make the rope socket :
For Light Duty Jobs the use a conventional rope socket, making it with 15 turns, is
allowed.
16) Check that the rope socket is free to rotate around the wire.
17) Make up the rope socket on top of the string, block the wire in the groove of the
stuffing box sheave and pull back the wire until the string is set on top of the lubricator.
relevant eyebolts at about 2ft from the stuffing box.
Wireline Operator so that he can easily see it. Install the first sheave to the load cell so
that the wire forms an angle as close as possible to 90.
the wire until the string runs to the bottom thread protector.
22) Place the lubricator onto the ramp of the pipe rack, hook off the hoist or winch, and
hook up the travelling block to the lubricator with adequate steel ropes.
23) Insert the line in the groove of the sheave which is connected to the load cell of the
weight indicator.
24) Spool back the wire with the hoist until the string is no longer on the bottom thread
protector.
calculated weight. If the check is negative, clean the line and/or manually re-adjust the
instrumentation.
27) Connect the required tool to the wireline string.
28) When the tool is at rotary table level or at the reference flange, reset the odometer to
zero.
31) Install onto the bleeder valve a proper scale gauge or control line for the dead weight
tester.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
1) Perform the lubricator pressure test to the Xmas Tree WP for 15mins by using water or
open the swab valve until the fluid or gas fills the lubricator. When the pressure is
stable complete to open the swab valve.
5) The rig down procedure is the opposite of the above detailed procedure paying
Procedure (Heavy Duty Operation)

1) Position the wireline unit approximately 30m from wellhead, in front of the pipe rack
available.
5) Install the wireline adapter flange.
6) Perform a torsion test on the wire and function test the BOP.
7) Lift the BOP with the crane by hooking it up to the eye of the lifting plug and install it on
the adapter flange.
8) Make up the lubricator on the main deck or on the appropriate gantries.
9) Inspect the stuffing box, replace the packing if it is required. Extend the wire, insert it
through the stuffing box seals and through the rope socket of a suitable diameter.
Make a no knot type rope socket (Refer to section 3.2.1).
10) Lift the lubricator by means of the crane and place it on the ramp of the pipe rack.
Ensure that the bottom connection is protected by an aluminium plug.
11) Hook up the lubricator to the travelling block by means of a hanger and steel ropes.
12) Remove the master bushings of the rotary table.
13) Lift the lubricator with the travelling block and insert it inside the rotary table
14) Lift the stuffing box by means of an air hoist/winch and insert it inside the rotary table.
15) Install the pressure transducer (load cell of the Martin-Decker) and the sheave on the
wellhead; insert the line in the groove of the sheave.
16) Keep the stuffing box hoisted and make up the rope socket to at least 6ft of stem.
17) Connect the stuffing box to the lubricator, bring the bottom connection of the lubricator
to the height of the derrick floor.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
1) Remove the aluminium plug, lower the wireline string and complete the composition.
2) Check that the weight indicator reading in the operator box is equal to the theoretical
calculation, otherwise clean the line and/or manually re-adjust the instrumentation as
per manufacturers instructions.
3) Lower the workstring to the derrick floor and make up the required tool.
4) Bring the tool to the height of the referenced flange and reset the depth indicator to
zero.
5) Pull the wireline string back into the lubricator and lower the lubricator by means of the
travelling block. Connect the lubricator to the BOP and close the bleeder valve (for
surface assembly greater or equal to 10,000psi two bleeder valves in series are used).
6) Perform the lubricator pressure test to the Xmas tree WP for 15mins using water or
open the swab valve until the fluid or gas fills the lubricator. Check that there are no
leaks in the quick union and stuffing box. When the pressure is stable complete to
open the swab valve.
8) Install onto the bleeder valve a proper scaled gauge or the control line for the dead
weight tester.
11) Bleed off pressure in the lubricator through the bleeder valve. In case of gaseous
hydrocarbon without H2S, release into the atmosphere is allowed.
In the case of liquid hydrocarbon, the lubricator discharge shall be performed in a
dedicated container; in the case of H2S the above procedure shall be authorised by the
Safety Expert and added to the operating programme.
29) Loosen the connection between the lubricator and BOP, lift the lubricator by means of
the travelling block until the lower connection of the lubricator remains just above the
30) Lower the wireline string until the wireline tool is at the height of the derrick floor level,
break off the wireline tool and lower the wireline string as stated above then break off
the wireline string.
31) Lower the wireline string, cut the line approximately 6ins above the rope socket and
pull the wire outside the stuffing box. Spool back the wire manually taking care not to
bend it.
32) The rig down operation is the opposite of the above detailed procedure paying
particular attention to the following point :
a) It is necessary to put back the used components after they have been cleaned
and redressed.
b) Perform the same maintenance on the BOP.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
8.2.3. Drill Ship/Semi-Submersible

completion phase, i.e. tubing gauging and depth control of the landing nipples which are
installation.
Selection of surface facilities:
sub.
b) T member threaded quick union pin x box and 2 Weco lateral outlet (Fig. 1002
or 1502).
depth. Wire size and metallurgy shall be selected according to the characteristics of the
completion fluid and the possible presence of corrosive fluids (e.g., H2S, brine with corrosive
components).
interruptions in the activity. A Light Duty Crew shall be used when dealing with a single
completion on wells of a limited depth. A Heavy Duty Crew shall be used when dealing with
single selective or dual completion with several sliding sleeves, landing nipples, surface
controlled safety valves.
The wireline unit shall be equipped with at least the following :
c) Wire suitable to fluids present/expected in hole as well as for mechanical stress.
d) Fishing equipment suitable for the completion design (e.g., Wireline grabs, Go
Devil wire cutters, impression blocks, etc.), and wireline string used (pulling tools,
Procedure
indicator onto the rotary table floor.
4) Make up the rope socket :
allowed.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
1) On the rig floor:

a) Install the load cell of the weight indicator in an optimal position of the Wireline
Operator so that he can easily see it and in any case on the landing string and
not on the rotary table floor so that not feel the effect of the heave. Install the first
sheave to the load cell so that the wire forms an angle as close as possible to
90.
threaded union pin x box and 2" Weco lateral outlet(Fig. 1002 or 1502) plus
wireline BOP with quick union pin x box.
c) Connect the 2ins Weco connection at the rig manifold for a possible kill.
d) Install the second sheave at the rope of the air hoist or winch.
7) Pulling the wire, bring the rope socket previously assembled on the rig floor.
9) Connect at least one piece stem to the rope socket.
10) Lift the first sheave keeping the wireline string.
11) Complete the make-up of the working string according to the programme or Eni-Agip
instrumentation.
14) With the Tool at rotary table level set the odometer to zero.
16) The rig down procedure is the opposite of the above detailed procedures paying
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0

The surface facilities are composed of a lubricator, stuffing box and BOP. With a temporary
Xmas tree available, the connection to the lubricator normally takes place by means of a
crossover threaded pin down x quick union box up. Furthermore, the Xmas tree will be
already compensated by means of the lifting frame. Such components shall be suitable to
the operation according to following criteria:
a) The lubricator ID adequate to the max. tool size of the equipment to be used.
b) WP greater or equal to the Xmas tree WP.
d) Additional equipment, i.e., injection nipple and safety check union can be
decided according to type of operation and well conditions.
Wire size and metallurgy shall be selected according to the characteristics of the completion,
The composition of the Wireline Crew shall be qualified to withstand all planned operations
without creating interruptions in the activity. The employment of Heavy Duty Crew or Light
Duty Crew depends on the diameter of completion string, working pressure of surface
equipment, duration and type of operation.
c) Wire compatible to the fluids present/expected in hole as well as mechanical
stress.
d) Fishing equipment suitable to the completion design (e.g. Wireline grabs, Go
g) Plugs for the possible shut off levels and well securing.
Procedure
walkway keeping due consideration to the logistics of the rig.
4) Perform a function test of the BOP.
5) Install the crossover threaded pin down x quick union box up. Hook up the DP elevator
at the lifting frame and connect it by means of adequate steel cables to the motion
compensator.
6) Lift the BOP by the eye of the lifting plug and install it onto the Xmas tree.
gantries.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
1) Remove thread protectors and properly clean sealing areas and all threads. Check
the lubricator.
diameter.
7) Make up the rope socket. For Heavy Duty Jobs use the no knot type; for Light Duty
Jobs the use of a conventional rope socket, making it with 15 turns, is allowed.
relevant eyebolts at about 2ft from the stuffing box.
12) Install the loading cell of the weight indicator in an optimal position of the Wireline
Operator so that he can easily see it and in any case on the landing string and not on
the rotary table floor so that not feel the effect of the heave. Install the first sheave to
the loading cell so that the wire forms an angle as close as possible to 90.
the wire until the string runs to the bottom thread protector. Bring the lubricator onto
the vertical axis of the well.
14) Insert the line in the groove of the sheave which is connected to the load cell of the
weight indicator.
15) Spool back the wire with the hoist until the string is no longer on the bottom thread
protector.
instrumentation.
19) When the tool is at the rotary table level reset the odometer to zero.
21) Connect the lubricator to the BOP
22) Install onto the bleeder valve a proper scale gauge or the control line for the dead
weight tester.
23) Perform the lubricator pressure test to the Xmas Tree WP for 15mins by using water or
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
1) The operator shall open/close the wellhead valves and count the revolutions. If the
Xmas tree is of a temporary type (LT-20), the DST contractor will open/close the
valves. Slowly open the swab valve until the fluid or gas fills the lubricator. When the
pressure is stable, completely open the swab valve.
4) The Rig Down procedure is the opposite to the above detailed procedure paying
and redressed.
c) Perform the same maintenance on the BOP.
8.3. RIGLESS OPERATIONS

Rigless Operations are the operations carried out without rigs, either onshore or offshore by
using equipment and Wireline Crews for HD (Heavy Duty) or LD (Light Duty) Jobs, according
to the type of equipment, completion and duration of the operation.
It is the responsibility of the Eni-Agip Supervisor to give instructions and documentation
required for the operation and in particular:
Operations Programme
Completion Design
Wellhead Tubing Hanger Design
Last Wireline Report (ARPO-11)
Last P&T Gradients Report (ARPO-12)
Type and characteristics of the fluid present in the string.
The Wireline Programme shall report:

Type of wellhead connections.
Wire type and size to be used.
Design of the workstring to be used.
Maximum expected THP.
Type and position of the flow control equipment in the hole.
Type of running/pulling tools.
Type of pressure and temperature recorder.
Operation's summary.
It is the responsibility of the Eni-Agip Supervisor for conducting operations.

It is the responsibility of the Wireline Chief Operator for the Wireline personnel and
management of the equipment.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
interruptions in the activity. It is the responsibility of the Wireline Superintendent for the
organisation of the Wireline Crew.
The Wireline Crew shall follow the general safety conditions dictated by the Responsible
Operation Manager, or by his substitute, according to both the logistics of the rig site or
platform and the possible dangerous fluids present on location. In the case of one or more
service companies on rig site, the responsibility also includes of safety, as per the
appropriate Procedure for the Issue of Work Permits for the local area.
The control of the regulation's application for the Wireline Crew is the responsibility of the
Operations responsible or its substitute.
The Wireline Crew equipment shall include all equipment of individual protection and
firefighting required to comply with the rules issued by the Operations Responsible.
8.3.1. Heavy Duty Land Operation

Operations defined as Heavy Duty Land Operation are those conducted on wells completed
1
with 3 /2" tubing or higher size, or with surface equipment rated 15K psi or higher.
The type of work depends on the necessity to perform the equipment rig up/down with a
crane.
The surface equipment shall be selected according to the following parameters:
a) WP and Xmas tree size.
b) Max. size of the tools to be used according to the nipples present in the string.
c) Characteristics of the fluids present in hole.
d) The composition of the Wireline Crew and the type of unit shall be required by
HD type.
The wireline unit shall be equipped with a minimum of equipment including:

a) Components of the wireline string sufficient to make up two strings
Devil wire cutters, impression block, etc.) and wireline string used (pulling tools,
fishing socket, etc.)
e) Amerada mechanical and/or memory gauges and relevant equipment.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Procedure
1) Remove from the area surrounding the wellhead all objects that can constitute
hitch/risk to the operation. Verify that the cellar is free from H2O and/or inflammable
material and the practicability of walkways and barriers.
2) Check the top flange of the wellhead and verify to be in possession of the adapter
required.
3) Close the swab valve and count the number of revolutions to make sure it has
completely closed.
4) Position the crane laterally to the wellhead; position the wireline truck in the vicinity of
the wellhead and discharge BOP, lubricator, stuffing box, etc. by means of the crane.
5) If the dimensions of the location allow, position the wireline truck, at 30m from the
wellhead.
7) Close the gauge cock on the top adapter, remove carefully the gauge, bleed off
pressure above the swab valve.
8) Disassemble the top adapter, verify and if necessary replace the ring joint, install the
wireline adapter.
9) Lift the BOP with the crane hooking it up to the eye of the lifting plug and installing it on
the adapter flange.
10) Pull out from the unit the required joints of the lubricator leaning them on gantries.
the integrity of the O Ring on the pin.
12) Make up the lubricator on the ground or on appropriate gantries without removing the
lower thread protector, by means of the crane. Install a bleeder valve on the lower joint
of the lubricator.
the lubricator.
16) Insert the wire through the stuffing box seals and through the rope socket of a suitable
diameter.
17) Make up a no knot type rope socket.
18) After assembling check that the rope socket is free to rotate round the wire.
19) Make up the rope socket onto the top of the string, block the wire in the groove of the
stuffing box sheave and pull back the wire until the string is set on top of the lubricator
21) Apply the lifting eyebolt of the lubricator.
Wireline Operator so that he can easily see it. Install the first sheave to the loading cell
o
so that the wire forms an angle as close as possible to 90 .
23) Slowly lift the lubricator with the hook of the crane In this phase the helper shall follow
the wire until the string runs to the bottom thread protector. Bring the lower connection
to just above the top connection of the BOP.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
1) Insert the wire into the groove of the sheave connected to the loading cell of the weight
indicator.
2) Lift the wireline workstring spooling back the wire with the drawworks until the string is
no longer on the bottom thread protector.
3) Remove the bottom thread protector.
4) Lower the wireline string at the ground floor. The weight indicator should indicate zero.
Lift the string and check that the weight indicator reading corresponds to the one
calculated. If the check is negative clean the wire and/or manually operate on the
instrumentation as per manufacturers instructions.
5) Lower the workstring at the ground floor and connect the required tool.
6) Bring the tool at the height of the reference flange and reset the depth indicator to
zero.
7) Retrieve the wireline string inside the lubricator, lower the lubricator by means of the
crane, connect the lubricator to the BOP, close the bleeder valve (for surface assembly
greater or equal to 10,000psi two bleeder valves in series are used). (Refer to figure
8.a).
8) Install a proper scale gauge or the control line for the dead weight tester onto the
bleeder valve.
9) Pressure test the lubricator with water or non-freezing fluid to the Xmas tree WP for
15mins then bleed off the pressure. If the programme entails several consecutive runs,
on several wells, without disassemble the surface facilities, the pressure test will be
performed only at the first installation.
10) Slowly open the swab valve until the fluid or gas fills the lubricator. Check that there
are no leaks on all the quick union and on the stuffing box .
11) When the pressure is stable complete the opening of the swab valve counting the
revolutions.
12) Perform the programmed wireline operation.
13) When the wireline string is completely pulled out, make sure that the wireline tool is
above the swab valve, close the swab valve and count the revolutions of the closing
wheel.
14) Bleed off lubricator pressure through the bleeder valve. In case of gaseous
hydrocarbon without H2S, release in the atmosphere is allowed.
15) In case of liquid hydrocarbon the lubricator discharge shall be performed in a
dedicated container; in case of presence of H2S the above procedure shall be
authorised by the Safety Expert and added to the operating programme.
16) Loosen the connection between lubricator and BOP, lift the lubricator by means of the
crane so that the lower connection of the lubricator remains just above the top
connection of the BOP.
17) Lower the wireline string until the wireline tool is placed at the height of the ground
floor, break off the wireline tool, lower the wireline string as stated above and break off
the jar.
18) Lower the wireline string, cut the line approx. 6ins above the rope socket; move away
from the lubricator and break off the remaining part of the wireline string on the
ground.
19) Spooling back the wire with the drawworks, pull the wire out of the stuffing box. When
winding the wire onto the reel a man must keep it manually taking care not to bend it.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
1) Disassemble the lubricator, stuffing box and BOP with a procedure opposite to the
installation procedure.
2) Install the top flange on the wellhead; install the gauge, open the gauge cock, open the
swab valve counting the number of revolutions and check that no leaks occur on the
connections.
3) Abandon the location restoring its conditions.
Figure 8.A - Land Well Light Duty Rig-Up
8.3.2. Light Duty Land Operation

These are operations conducted on wells completed with a maximum tubing diameter of
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
7
2 /8" and with surface equipment not exceeding the 10Kpsi.
The type of work depends on the necessity to perform the equipment rig up/down with a gin
pole.
a) WP and Xmas tree size.
The composition of the Wireline Crew and the type of unit shall be required by LD type.
Devil wire cutters, impression block, etc.) and wireline string used (pulling tools,
fishing socket etc.)
Procedure
1) Remove from the area surrounding the wellhead all object that may constitute having a
hitch/risk to the operation. Verify that the cellar is free from H2O and/or inflammable
material and the practicability of walkways and barriers.
2) Check the top flange of the wellhead and confirm possession of the adapter required.
3) Close the swab valve and count the number of revolutions to make sure it has
completely closed.
4) If the dimensions of the location allows position the wireline truck, at 30m from
wellhead.
7) Disassemble the top adapter, verify and if necessary replace the ring joint.
8) Install the wireline adapter.
9) If the installation of the gin pole is required, the use of protection cage for the wellhead
that should result in good safe working conditions (if the wellhead is not provided with
a protection cage the use of the crane is necessary: see HD procedures).
10) Install the gin pole closed with chain and chain tightener, hoist the flag on the top of
the upper section of the gin pole.
11) Inspect the crown block, travelling block and rope; hook up the crown block to the flag
on top of the gin pole; extend the telescopic gin pole inserting pins into the holes till to
get to the desired height.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
1) Lift the BOP with the gin pole travelling block, hooking it up to the eye of the lifting plug
and install it on the adapter flange. Some Surface Equipment for Light Duty Jobs are
equipped with a flanged BOP. In this case ignore step 8) of the procedure.
2) Pull out the required joints of the lubricator from the unit leaning them on gantries.
3) Remove the thread protectors and properly clean all sealing areas and threads. Check
the integrity of the Oring on the pin.
the lubricator.
6) Check the stuffing box seals and, if required, replace them.
7) Extend the wire, visually check it and test the integrity by a torsion test.
diameter.
9) Make up the standard rope socket with 15 turns.
10) After assembling check that the rope socket is free to rotate round the wire.
13) Apply the lifting eyebolt of the lubricator.
14) Install the load cell of the weight indicator in optimal position to the sight of the Wireline
Operator so that he can easily see it. Install the first sheave to the loading cell so that
the wire forms an angle as close as possible to 90.
15) With the gin pool travelling block slowly lift the lubricator. In this phase the helper shall
follow the wire until the string runs to the bottom thread protector. Block the lifting rope
so that the lubricator is on the vertical axis of the well.
16) Insert the wire into the groove of the sheave connected to the load cell of the weight
indicator.
17) Lift the wireline workstring spooling back the wire with the drawworks until the string is
no longer on the bottom thread protector.
18) Remove the bottom thread protector.
19) Lower the wireline string at the ground floor. The weight indicator should indicate zero.
Lift the string and check that the weight indicator reading corresponds to the calculated
weight. If the check is negative clean the line and/or manually re-adjust the
instrumentation.
21) With the tool at the referenced flange level reset the odometer to zero.
23) Connect the lubricator to the BOP .
24) Install a proper scale gauge or the control line for the dead weight tester onto the
bleeder valve.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
1) The operator shall open/close the wellhead valves and count revolutions. Slowly open
the swab valve until the fluid or gas fills the lubricator. Check that there are no leaks on
all the quick union and stuffing box. When the pressure is stable complete to open the
swab valve.
above the swab valve. Close the swab valve and count the revolutions of the closing
wheel.
4) Bleed lubricator pressure through the bleeder valve. In case of gaseous hydrocarbon
without H2S, release in the atmosphere is allowed.
5) In case of liquid hydrocarbons, the lubricator discharge shall be performed in a
dedicated container; in case of presence of H2S the above procedure shall be
authorised by the Safety Expert and added to the operating programme.
travelling block so that the lower connection of the lubricator remains just above the
7) Lower the wireline string until the wireline tool is placed at the height of the ground
the jar.
8) Lower the wireline string, cut the wire approx. 6ins above the rope socket; move away
ground.
9) Spooling back the wire with the drawworks, pull the wire out of the stuffing box. When
winding the wire on the reel a man must keep it manually taking care not to bend it.
connections.
12) Abandon the location restoring its condition.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Figure 8.B - Land Well Heavy Duty Rig-Up

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
8.3.3. Heavy Duty Offshore Operation

This is the definition of operations conducted on wells, located on production fixed platforms,
1
completed with 3 /2 tubing or higher, or with 15Kpsi surface equipment or higher.
The type of work depends on the necessity to perform the rig up/down of the equipment with
a crane.
a) WP and size of the Xmas tree
The composition of the Wireline Crew and the type of unit shall be of type HD.
The wireline unit shall be equipped with a minimum equipment including:
b) Gauge cutter of a diameter suitable to the completion type
c) Wireline suitable to the characteristics of the fluid present in hole as well as
mechanical stress
d) Fishing equipment suitable to the completion type (e.g., Wireline grabs, wire
cutters, Go Devil, impression block, etc.) and wireline string used for pulling
tools, fishing socket etc.)
Procedure
1) Position the wireline unit approx. 30m from wellhead, in front of the trap door of the
same.
2) Make sure that the wellhead is safe (derrick floor, barriers, etc.).
3) Position the crane in the best position in relation to the Xmas tree.
4) Make sure that the swab valve is completely closed and bleed off pressure through
gauge cock set on the top adapter.
5) Perform a function test on the BOP.
6) Close the swab valve and count the number of revolutions to make sure of the
complete closure of the same.
8) Disassemble the top adapter, verify and, if necessary, replace the ring joint, install the
adapter wireline.
9) Lift the BOP with the crane hooking it up to the eye of the lifting plug and install it on
the adapter flange.
10) Pull out the required joints of lubricator from the unit leaning them on gantries set on
the main deck.
protector. Install a bleeder valve on the joint lower of lubricator.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
1) Check, measure and mate each component of the wireline string and insert in
lubricator.
2) heck the sealing status of the stuffing box, and if required replace it.
3) Extend the wireline, check it visually and test its integrity with a torsion test.
4) Insert the wireline inside the sealing of the stuffing box, slip it into the rope socket of
suitable diameter.
5) Make up a no knot type rope socket.
6) Check that the rope socket is free to rotate on the line contained inside.
7) Make up the rope socket onto the top of the string, block the line in the groove of the
stuffing box sheave and pull back the line until the string is set on the top lubricator.
8) Connect the stuffing box to the lubricator
9) Apply the lifting clamp of the lubricator + 2 steel ropes of equal lengths and relevant
eyebolts to about 2ft from the stuffing box
10) Install the loading cell of the weight indicator so that the Wireline Operator can easily
see it. Install the first sheave to the loading cell so that the line forms an angle as close
as possible to 90.
11) With the crane lift the lubricator slowly. In this phase the helper shall follow the line
until the string runs to the plug set on the bottom thread.
12) Insert the line in the groove of the sheave connected to the loading cell of the weight
indicator.
13) Recover the line with the drawworks until the string weight is off the thread protector of
the bottom thread
14) Remove the thread protector of the bottom thread.
15) Lean the wireline string on a piano. The weight indicator set in the unit shall indicate
zero. Lift the string and check that the recorded weight corresponds to the calculated
weight. If the check is negative clean the line and/or manually re-adjust the
instrumentation.
16) Connect the desired tool to the wireline string which has been already checked.
17) With the tool at the level of the referenced flange reset the odometer to zero.
18) Retrieve the wireline string inside the lubricator, lower the lubricator by means of the
crane, connect the lubricator to the BOP, close the bleeder valve (for surface assembly
greater or equal to 10,000psi, two bleeder valves are used).
19) Install a gauge of a proper scale or the control line for the dead weight tester on the
bleeder valve.
20) Pressure test the lubricator with water or non-freezing fluid to the WP of the Xmas tree
for 15mins; then bleed off pressure to zero. If the programme provides several
consecutive runs without disassemble of the surface facilities, then a pressure test will
be only performed at the first installation.
21) Slowly open the swab valve until the pressure fills the lubricator. Check that there are
no leaks on all the quick unions and stuffing box.
22) Completely open the swab valve counting the revolutions.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
higher than the swab valve, close the swab valve and count the revolutions of the
closing wheel.
2) Bleed off pressure of the lubricator through the bleeder valve. If the discharge
contains:
Hydrocarbon without H2S: it can be released into the atmosphere
Liquid hydrocarbons: it shall be performed into a proper container.
In case of H2S the discharge procedure shall be dictated by the Safety Expert and set
out in the operations programme.
crane so that the lower connection of the lubricator remains just above the top
39) Lower the wireline string until the wireline tool is placed at the height of the derrick
the jar.
from the lubricator, and break off the remaining part of the wireline string on the
ground.
41) Pull out the line with the drawworks out of the stuffing box, manually wind it onto the
reel keeping it tight and taking care not to bend it.
43) Install the top flange on the wellhead; install the gauge, open the gauge cock and
swab valve counting the number of revolutions. Check that no leaks occur on the
connections.
44) Leave the platform restoring its conditions.
8.3.4. Light Duty Offshore Operation

This is the definition of operations conducted on wells, located on production fixed platforms,
7
completed with 2 /8 tubing or smaller, or with 10Kpsi surface equipment or less.
The type of work depends on the necessity to perform the rig up/down of the equipment with
the gin pole.
The selection of the surface equipment shall be done according to the following parameters:
a) WP and size of the Xmas tree
b) Max. size of the tools to be used according to the nipples present in the string
c) Characteristics of the fluids present in hole
The composition of the Wireline Crew and the type of unit shall be of type LD.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
The wireline unit shall be equipped with a minimum equipment and including:
b) Gauge cutter of a diameter suitable to the completion type
c) Wireline suitable to the characteristics of the fluid present in hole as well as
mechanical stress
d) Fishing equipment suitable to the completion type (e.g.: wieline grabs, wire
cutters go devil, impression block, etc.) and type of wire string used (pulling
tools, fishing socket etc.)
Procedure
1) Remove from the surrounding area of the wellhead any objects that may constitute a
hitch/risk to the operation.
2) Check the top flange of the wellhead and verify possession of the adapter required.
3) Make sure that the swab valve is completely closed. Position the wireline skid, if the
dimensions of the platform allows it, 30m from wellhead. For particular applications, on
structures of small dimensions (e.g. monotubular), dispensation from the above, is only
allowed by the Well Area Manager.
5) Close the gauge cock on the top adapter, carefully remove the gauge, bleed off
6) Disassemble the top adapter, verify and if necessary replace the ring joint.
7) Install the wireline adapter.
8) Install an offshore type of gin pole and the flag onto the top of the first section of the
gin pole.
9) Inspect the crown block, travelling block and rope; hook up the crown block to the flag
on top of the gin pole; extend the gin pole telescopic inserting pins in the holes till the
desired height is obtained.
10) Lift the BOP with the gin pole hooking it up to the eye of the lifting plug and install it
onto the adapter flange. Some Surface Equipment for Light Duty Jobs are equipped
with a flanged BOP. In this case ignore step 7) of the procedure.
11) Pull out the required joints of lubricator leaning them on the gantries.
12) Remove the thread protectors and properly clean all sealing areas and threads. Check
protector. Install a bleeder valve on the lower joint of lubricator.
14) Check, measure, mate components and insert in the lubricator.
15) Check the sealing status of the stuffing box and, if required, replace it.
16) Extend the wireline, check it visually and test its integrity with a torsion test
17) Insert the wireline inside the sealing of the stuffing box, slip it into the rope socket of a
suitable diameter.
18) Make the rope socket standard with 15 turns.
19) Check that the rope socket is free to rotate on the line contained inside.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
1) Make up the rope socket on the top string, block the line in the groove of the sheave of
the stuffing box and pull back the line until the string is set on the top lubricator.
2) Connect the stuffing box to the lubricator
3) Apply the support eye of the lubricator.
4) Install the load cell of the weight indicator so that the Wireline Operator can easily see
it. Install the first sheave to the loading cell so that the line forms an angle as close as
possible to 90.
5) With the gin pole, slowly lift the lubricator. In this phase the helper shall follow the line
until the string runs to the plug set on the bottom thread. Block the rope so that the
lubricator is on the vertical axis of the well.
6) Insert the line in the groove of the sheave connected to the load cell of the weight
indicator.
7) Recover the line with the drawworks until the string weight is off the thread protector of
the bottom thread
8) Remove the thread protector of the bottom thread.
9) Lay down the wireline string on the floor. The weight indicator set in the unit shall
indicate zero. Lift the string and check that the recorded weight corresponds to the
calculated weight. If the check is negative clean the line and/or the manually re-adjust
the instrumentation.
10) Connect the desired tool to the wireline string.
11) With the tool at the level of the referenced flange reset the odometer to zero.
12) Retrieve the wireline string into the lubricator.
14) Install a gauge of a proper scale, or the control line for the dead weight tester, on the
bleeder valve.
15) The operator shall perform the operation of opening/closing the valves and count
revolutions. Slowly open the swab valve until the pressure fills the lubricator. Check
that there are no leaks on all the quick unions and on the stuffing box.
17) When the wireline string is pulled out completely, make sure that the wireline tool is
higher than the swab valve. Close the swab valve and count the revolutions of the
closing wheel.
18) Bleed off pressure of the lubricator through the bleeder valve. If the discharge
contains:
Hydrocarbons without H2S: they can be released into the atmosphere.
Liquid hydrocarbons: shall be performed into a proper container.
In case of H2S the discharge procedure shall be dictated by the Safety Expert
and set out in the operations programme.
gin pole so that the lower connection of the lubricator remains just above the top
20) Lower the wireline string until the wireline tool is placed at the height of the derrick
the jar.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
ground.
2) Pull out the line with the drawworks out of the stuffing box, manually winding it on to
the reel, keeping it taut, and taking care not to bend it.
connections.
5) Leave the platform restoring its conditions.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
9. GENERAL WIRELINE PROCEDURES
9.1. SUMMARY OF GENERAL OPERATION

As General Operations are defined all the wireline operations that commonly are performed
during carrying out of Completion, Production & Workover on wells either onshore or
offshore.
They could be summarised as:
Tubing Gauging: all the operations relevant to the control of the string size of the
completion tubing.
Pressure & Temperatures Gradient Survey: all the operations that regard
recording of pressure and temperatures with the well in flowing or static
condition.
Bailing: all the operations concerning removal of sand or scale from the inside of
the completion tubing string.
Tubing Perforating: all the operations concerning perforating of completion
tubing.
SSCSV Operation: all the operations concerning retrieving and redressing of
SSCSV Safety Valve.
SCSSV Operation: all the operations concerning perforating and redressing of
SCSSV Safety Valve.
Plugs: all the operations concerning running and retrieving of plugs
Sliding Sleeve Operation: all the operations concerning opening and closing of
Sliding Sleeves.
Packer Setting: all the operations relevant to packer setting
Scratching: all the operations concerning deposit removal of asphaltene and/ or
paraffin.
Impression Taking: all the operations of taking impressions.
Hydrates Removal: all the operations concerning removal of hydrates from tubing
string.
Running in Flowing Well: part of the up listed operations may be carried out with
the well flowing.
Depending on the type of the operation, Light Duty Operation or Heavy Duty Operation, the
surface equipment has different characteristics and different is the composition of the Crew.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
9.2. TUBING GAUGING

Tubing gauging is defined the operation of tubing calibration, performed on drilling, workover
or production rigs, either onshore or offshore with use of equipment and Wireline Crew for
LD (Light Duty) or HD (Heavy Duty) job. The operation could be performed during the
completion or well production. During the running of the completion it has the purpose to
check the drift of the tubing, verifying the inside diameter of the string in particular the
threaded connections, and to be certain of the inside diameter and the depth of those
completion elements such as: Landing Nipples, Crossovers, SCSSV, remarkable to the
success of the completion operation. Different shape of caliper gauges could be used :
suggested is the use of Paraffin Cutter Gauges, because their shape is such to allow a
considerable speed also in fluid, and the possibility to remove possible small obstructions.
The choice of the diameter and the metallurgy of the wireline is function of the completion
characteristics, the fluids in well and the producing zone temperatures.
The composition of the Wireline Crew must be such to perform all the foreseen operations
without giving place to interruptions in the activity. Wireline Superintendent is responsible on
wireline Crew organisation.
The equipment of the Wireline Crew must include all those individual and fireproof protection
equipment necessary as support to the normative issued by the job Manager.
The wireline unit must be equipped with :
a) Wireline tools enough to rig up two strings
b) Gauge cutters OD suitable to the type of completion
c) Wireline suitable to the possible well fluids as well as to the mechanical stress
d) Fishing tools suitable the type of completion (Wireline Grabs, Wire Cutters, Go
Devil, Impression Blocks etc.), and to the type of wireline string used (Pulling
Tools, Fishing Socket etc.).
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
9.2.1. Gauging During Well Completion

It is responsibility of the Agip Supervisor to furnish the dispositions and the necessary
documentation to the carrying out of the operation, and particularly:
The programme of the operations.
The completion profile with depth and size of the Completion Equipment.
The height of the rotary table from the reference point (Basic flange or upper
flanges of the Tubing Spool).
Type and characteristics of the fluids present in the string.
It is responsibility and care of the Chief Operator to furnish to the Agip Supervisor, during the
operation all the information inherent the carrying out and the result of the same. At the end
of the operation, the Chief Operator will give the Agip Supervisor a Rig Site Report. The
operation of Tubing Gauging during the completion doesn't origin a self report, but will be
reported by the Agip Supervisor, on the SPER 41.
The actions to undertake for the solution of the problems that could emerge during the
carrying out of the operation must be approved by Agip Supervisor.
Figure 9.A - Typical Gauge Cutter

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Formality of Execution:
a) Perform the assembly procedure of the surface equipment.
1
b) The wireline string will be made up according to the well size, preferably 1 /2" and
composed by:
Rope socket
Stem
Knuckle joint
3ft stroke Mechanical Jar
Proper gauge cutter size for the purpose.
c) For particularly deviated wells and/or presence of dog legs the maximum rigidity
will be not more than 6ft. The presence in string of an Up-stroke jar o Hydraulic
jar will be agreed with the Wireline Superintendent.
d) Assemble the Gauge Cutter to the wireline String and make the zero of reference
for the measurements.
e) Run in well to limited speed (not more than 10m/min) for the first 2-3 joints.
Running ahead at a moderate speed, paying attention to the pull on the wire.
f) Perform a weight indication pull at least every 500m before reaching the no-go
depth. If the well profile and/or the completion profile require it, perform weight
indication pulls even at preceding and intermediate depth. Perform the last
weight indication a few meters before reaching the scheduled depth.
g) Reach the locating depth very slowly, without performing jar down action.
h) Perform the exact measure of depth pulling out, repeating the operation at least
two times.
i) Pull out to surface the Gauge Cutter to a compatible speed with the tension on
the wire and the type of fluid in well.
j) With the tool at 100m, slow down to 10m/min until zero meters.
k) Slow down to a minimum speed, pull out the wireline string from the completion
string.
l) Repeat the operation when necessary. If the programme foresees only one
series of calibration, at the end of the completion string running, the gauging of
the landing nipples in the string is performed with a Gauge Cutter having the
1
maximum OD /10 millimetre less than the ID of the first Completion Tool, and at
1
least /10 millimetre more than the ID of the Landing Nipple to be verified. In this
case have particular attention during the crossing of the restrictions of the
completion (Crossovers, SCSSV, Landing Nipples), slow down to 10m/min.
m) If no more operations are to be performed, rig down the surface equipment.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
9.2.2. Gauging During Production

The tubing gauging operation, or more frequently, Landing Nipple Gauging, on a well in
production always precedes an other Specific Wireline Operation and must be done with
well closed.
It is allowed the gauging operation with well flowing only after Wireline Superintendent
authorisation.
For the choice of the surface equipment, type of unit and the Wireline Crew members, will be
considered as per Specific Wireline Operation that will follow the calibration.
documentation to the carrying out of the operation, and particularly:
Programme of the operations.
Design of the completion with depth and diameters of the Completion Equipment.
Height of the rotary table from a point of reference (basic flange or upper flanges
of the Tubing Spool).
Type and characteristics of the present fluid in the string.
Copy of last operation report and possible former.
It is responsibility and care of the Chief Operator to furnish, to the Agip Supervisor, during
and at the end of the operation all the relevant information of the execution and the result of
the same. It will be responsibility and care of the Agip Supervisor filling the ARPO-11
containing the chronology of the operations and all the information regarding :
TBG and annulus pressure
Well depth
Type of bottom sample
Indications on possible over pull.
Possible variations to the programme are agreed between Wireline Superintendent and Agip
Supervisor that will give immediate communication to the Chief Operator.
The actions to undertake for the problems solution that could emerge during the carrying out
of the operation must be approved by Agip Supervisor.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Formality of Execution
1
1) The wireline string will be made up according to the well size, preferably 1 /2" and
composed by:
Rope socket
Stem
Knuckle joint
Proper size gauge cutter for the purpose.
For particularly deviated wells and/or presence of dog legs the maximum rigidity will be
not more than 6ft. The presence in string of an Up-stroke jar o Hydraulic jar will be
agreed with Wireline Superintendent.
2) Connect the Gauge Cutter to the wireline string and pull in lubricator.
3) Perform the assemble procedure of the lubricator and open the well head valves.
4) Run in the well. Cross the well head valves and the tubing hanger with very limited
speed (not more than 5m/min). Running ahead in with limited speed, to avoid an
accidental expansion of the slips, having particular care to cross the completion
restrictions (Crossovers, SCSSV, Landing Nipples), slowing down to 10m/min.
5) Perform a weight indication pull at least every 1,000m before reaching the no-go
depth. If the well profile and/ or the completion profile require it, perform weight
indication pulls even at preceding and intermediate depth. Perform the last weight
indication a few meters before reaching the scheduled depth.
6) Reach the locating depth very slowly, without performing jar down action.
7) Perform the exact measure of depth pulling out, repeating the operation at least two
times.
8) Pull out to surface the gauge cutter to a compatible speed with wire tension and type of
fluid in well. Have particular care to cross the completion restrictions (Crossovers,
SCSSV, Landing Nipples), slow down to 10m/min.
9) With the tool at 100m, slow down to 10m/min until zero meters.
10) Slow down to a minimum speed, the Operator, placing himself between the unit and
the load cell of the weight indicator, will practice a pressure on the wire, with both
arms, such to perceive and reduce the shot between the rope socket and the stuffing
box, advising immediately and without doubt of such contact to the Chief Operator.
11) The Operator is responsible for closing/ opening of well head valves counting their
turns. Slowly close the swab valve.
12) Bleed off the pressure of lubricator through the needle valve.
13) Perform the recovering procedure of the tool from lubricator.
14) Carry on with the operations.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
9.3. PRESSURE & TEMPERATURE GRADIENT SURVEY

Pressure & Temperature Gradient Survey is defined as the operation of recording pressure
and/or temperature gradient by means of Mechanical Gauge (Amerada) or Electronic
Memory Gauges, performed on drilling, workover rigs, or production wells, either onshore or
offshore, with use of equipment and Wireline Crew for LD (Light Duty) or HD (Heavy Duty)
job.
The operation could be done at the end of the completion phase, or during the well
production. The scope of operation is to obtain the reservoir pressure and/or the
temperature, and the distribution of the fluids in well. During the static profile recording it is
recommended to perform the second last step at the bottom of perforations and the last step
10m under the bottom of perforations. Recording of steps under the tubing shoe of the short
string in a double completion must be planned in the programme and confirmed by the
Wireline Superintendent.
The composition of the wireline string for dynamic profiles recording must be programmed
1
as said in section 12 and in any case the OD must not overcome 1 /4 for tubing ID up to
1
3 /2".
The gradient survey operation will be performed always after the operation of sample bailing
to obtain an analysis of the sample on site, for the water quality and salinity determination.
The choice of size and metallurgy of the wireline is taken according to the completion
characteristics, fluids in well and reservoir temperatures.
The composition of the Wireline Crew must be considered to perform all the operations
foreseen without any to interruption in the activity. The Wireline Superintendent is
responsible on Wireline Crew organisation.
The Wireline Crew must have all the individual, fireproof and protective equipment, as per
the normative issued by Job Manager.
The wireline unit must be equipped with:
1) Components of the wireline string enough for two string.
2) Sample bailer of the size as same as the wireline string.
3) Wireline fit to the fluids present in well and mechanical stress as well.
4) Fishing equipment fit to the type of completion (e.g. Wireline Grabs, Wire Cutters go
devil, Impression Blocks etc.), and to the type of wireline string used (Pulling Tools,
Fishing Socket etc.).
5) Equipment for salinity and pH of the recovered sample determination.
6) Right range Gauges.
7) Crossover: Amerada x Wireline string thread.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
9.3.1. With Amerada Gauge

The Amerada (figure 9.b) is a mechanical gauge, consisting of two parts: sensor and
recording section. Sensors could be Pressure sensing or Temperature sensing, with range
up to 30,000psi or 370C. A recording section could be joined with only one sensor.
Recording duration depends on the type of clock used; the sample rating is fixed; data are
recorded on a 5" x 2" chart; for chart reading a scanner is necessary.
Agip Supervisor is responsible for dispositions and the necessary documentation to the
carrying out of the operation, and particularly:
Operating programme.
Design of the completion with depths and size of the Completion Equipment
Height of the rotary table from the reference point (Basic flange or upper flanges
Type and characteristics of the fluid in the string.
Type and range of the gauge/gauges to be used.
Number and depth of the steps to be performed.
Steps duration.
operation, all information suitable to the execution of the operation and its result.
Agip Supervisor is responsible for data reliability control and for ARPO-12 compilation.
Actions to undertake for the solution of the problems that could arise during the execution of
the operation must be approved by the Agip Supervisor.
1) Perform the assembling procedure of the surface equipment.
2) Perform the Sample Bailing operation up to the well depth determination, as per
procedure.
3) Wireline string will have the same size and length of that one used for the Sample
Bailing operation, eliminating any type of Jar. For operations on HP- HT wells, use of
an up-stroke jar is recommended. For particular deviated wells and/ or presence of dog
legs, the maximum rigidity will be not more than 6ft. For operations in HP-HT wells,
recording is performed by two tools together.
4) Make up Amerada Gauge as per manufacturer manual, being sure of stylus and clock
functionality, and interpretation of reference base line for reading.
5) Screw the Amerada Gauge with wireline string and perform the zero reference depth.
6) Pull the wireline string into lubricator. Perform the procedure for connection with the
well head and the well head valves opening.
7) Run the tool down in well, position it at the zero reference depth and perform the first
step. At the same time record STHP by a Dead Weight Tester.
8) Run in ahead. Cross the well head valves and the tubing hanger at very limited speed
(not more than 5m/min). Running ahead with a speed that could be up to 100m/min,
depending on the type of wire used, fluid in well, well deviation, having particular care
to cross the completion restrictions (Crossovers, SCSSV, Landing Nipples), slow down
to 10m/min.
9) Slow down gradually until the depth of the second step, stop for the time planned of
the programme, recording STHP with Dead Weight Tester. Resume running-in
increasing the speed gradually.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
10) Repeat step 9 for all the steps foreseen by the programme.
11) Pull out of hole the Amerada Gauge at a speed compatible with the wire tension, and
type of fluid, having particular care while crossing of the completion restrictions
(Crossovers, SCSSV, Landing Nipples).
12) With the tool at 100m, slow down to 10m/min until zero m.
13) Slow down to a minimum speed; the Operator will place himself between the unit and
the load cell of the weight indicator, he will practice a pressure on the wire, with both
the arms, such to perceive and reduce the shot between the rope socket and the
stuffing box, advising immediately and without doubts of such contact to the Chief
Operator.
14) The operator is responsible for closing/opening of well head valve, counting the turns.
Close the swab valve slowly.
15) Bleed off the lubricator pressure through the needle valve.
16) Perform the procedure to extract tools from the lubricator.
17) Unscrew the Amerada Gauge, check recorded chart and verify the interpretation.
18) Rig down the surface equipment if no other operations are planned.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Figure 9.B - Amerada Pressure/Temperature Gauge
9.3.2. With Memory Gauge

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Memory Gauge is an electronic recording tool, composed of two parts: sensor-recorder and
battery housing.
Sensors can record both Pressure and Temperature, with range that could reach 20,000psi
and 200C. They are classified as Crystal Gauge, Strain Gauge and Capacitance Gauge,
depending on the type of sensing element. The memory is EEPROM type, and may store, as
per last models, hundred of thousand data.
Memory Gauge could be equipped with different types of batteries to work up to 6 months
with temperatures around 100C.
It could have up to 16 sections of acquisition, programmed with different sampling rate and
duration rate. For gradients acquisition use of a low-time stabilisation type Memory Gauge,
1
of 1 /4" diameter is recommended.
Agip Supervisor is responsible for dispositions and necessary documentation to carry out the
operation, and particularly:
Design of the completion with depths and size of the Completion Equipment.
Type and rating of the gauge/gauges to be used.
Number and depth of the steps to be performed.
Steps duration.
Agip Supervisor is responsible for data reliability control and for ARPO-12 compilation.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
2) Perform the operation of Sample Bailing up to the determination of the well depth, as
per procedure.
3) Wireline string will have the same size and the same length of that one used for the
Sample Bailing operation, eliminating any type of Jar. For operations on HP-HT wells
use of an up-stroke jar is recommended. For particular deviated wells and/or presence
of dog legs, the maximum rigidity will be not more than 6ft.
4) For operations in HP-HT wells, the recording is performed by two tools together.
5) Make up the Memory Gauge as per Manufacturer manual, performing the procedure
for programming. Make sure of the recording start using the appropriate tool.
6) Screw the Memory Gauge with the wireline string and perform the zero reference
depth.
7) Pull the wireline string into lubricator. Perform the procedure for connection with the
well head and well head valves opening.
8) Run the tool down in well, positioning it at the zero reference depth and perform the
first step, At the same time record STHP by a Dead Weight Tester.
9) Run in ahead. Cross the well head valves and the tubing hanger to very limited speed
(not more than 5m/min). Run in ahead whit a speed that could be also 100m/min,
depending on the type of wire used, fluid in well, well deviation, having particular care
to cross of the completion restrictions (Crossovers, SCSSV, Landing Nipples), slow
down to 10m/min.
10) Slow down gradually until the depth of the second step, stop for the time planned on
the programme, taking an STHP with Dead Weight Tester. Resume running in
increasing the speed gradually.
11) Repeat point 9 for all the steps foreseen by the programme.
12) Pull out of hole Amerada Gauge at a compatible speed with wire tension, and the type
of fluid, having particular care to cross the completion restrictions (Crossovers,
SCSSV, Landing Nipples).
13) With the tool at 100m, slow down to 10m/min until zero m.
stuffing box, advising immediately and without doubts such contact to the Chief
Operator.
15) The operator is responsible for closing/opening of the well head valves, counting the
turns. Close the swab valve slowly.
16) Bleed off the pressure in the lubricator through the needle valve.
18) Unscrew the Memory Gauge, check recorded chart and verify the interpretation.
19) Rig down the surface equipment, if no other operations are planned,.
Note: In case of operations in heavy oil wells, recording the gradient pulling out
of the hole is advisable.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
9.4. BAILING
Bailing operations are defined as the operations of collecting and/or cleaning the string,
carried on drilling, workover and production wells either onshore or offshore, with the use of
equipment and Wireline Crew for HD (Heavy Duty) or LD (Light Duty) Job, in function of
completion type and programmed operating time, in order to get the evaluation of the bottom
hole fluids and sediments, or the re-establishment of fundamental depths like:
Top mandrel SSCSV (for SSCSV redressing and top sediments evaluation)
Landing nipple (for plugs or slim pack screens setting)
SSD ( for level change).
and all the operations that allow to release at the bottom hole or at the top of flow control
equipment fluids like:
Glycol (for equalising operations)
Solvent (for particular pulling operations)
Acid (for partial acid washings).
In detail bailing operations could be performed through the use of:

Sample bailing
Sand bailing
Hydrostatic bailing
Drive down bailing.
All these operations must be performed with the well shut in. Operation of Sample Bailing
with well flowing is allowed only upon authorisation of the Wireline Superintendent.
The surface equipment is composed by lubricator, stuffing box, BOP and by adapter flange.
These elements must be suitable to the operation to be performed in function of the
following criteria:
a) ID suitable to the well equipment size
b) WP same or higher than that one of X-mass tree
c) Material compatible with the well fluids.
Use of additional equipment, like Injection Nipple and Safety Check Union could be decided
in relationship to the operation type and to the well conditions.
The choice of the reel unit type must be taken in function of the completion type and
maximum operating depth. The choice of size and metallurgy of the wireline is taken
according to the completion characteristics, fluids in well and reservoir temperatures.
foreseen without any to interruption in the activity. Wireline Superintendent is responsible on
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Operating programme
Height of the rotary table from the reference point (basic flange or upper flanges
of the Tubing Spool)
Type and characteristics of the fluid in the string
Copy of the last operation report.
Agip Supervisor is responsible for ARPO-11 compilation containing the operations
chronology and all the information regarding :
Well depth
Type bottom sample
Indications of possible over pull.
Possible variations to the programme are agreed between the Wireline Superintendent and
The Agip Supervisor that will give immediate communication to the Chief Operator.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
9.4.1. Sample Bailing

Are defined in this way the operations of bottom hole depth verification and bottom hole
sample collecting.
a) Components of the Wireline string enough for two string
b) Gauge cutters OD suitable to the completion design
c) Wireline fit to the fluids present in well and mechanical stress as well
d) Fishing equipment fit to the type of completion (e.g. Wireline Grabs, Wire Cutters
go devil, Impression Blocks etc.), and to the type of wireline string used (Pulling
Tools, Fishing Socket etc.)
e) Sample bailer of proper size to the operations to be performed. (figure 9.c)
Figure 9.C - Sample Bailer

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
1
composed by:
Rope socket
Stem
Knuckle joint
Sample bailer of proper size and type for the job.
For particularly deviated wells and/or in presence of dog legs the maximum rigidity will
be not more than 6ft.
3) Screw the sample bailing to the wireline string and pull it up in the Lubricator.
4) Perform the lubricator assembling procedure and the Well Head valves opening
procedures.
5) Run in the well. Cross the well head valves and the tubing hanger at very limited speed
(not more than 5m/min). Running ahead with limited speed, to avoid an accidental
expansion of the slips, having particular care to cross the completion restrictions
(Crossovers, SCSSV, Landing Nipples), slow down to 10m/min.
6) Perform a weight indication pull every 1,000m before reaching the estimated depth of
the well. If the well profile and/or of the completion requires it, perform more weight
indication pulls. Perform the last weight indication pull 10-20m before reaching the
estimated depth.
7) Reach the bottom hole very slowly, without any jar down action.
8) Perform the exact measure of Bottom Hole pulling out, repeat the operation at least
two times.
9) Take a bottom hole sample with jar down action.
10) Pull out the sample bailer in surface to a compatible speed with wire tension and type
of fluid in well, having particular care to cross the completion restrictions (Crossovers,
11) With the wireline string at 100m, slow down to 10m/min until zero m.
Operator.
16) If no more operations are planned, perform the rig down procedure
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
9.4.2. Sand Bailing

Are defined in this way, the operations of string cleaning from sediments (sand). The sand
bailing is defined Heavy Duty operation. Use of sand bailer is possible only in presence of
liquid column above the top sediments.
a) Components of the wireline string enough for two string.
b) Gauge cutters OD suitable to the completion design.
c) Wireline fit to the fluids present in well and mechanical stress as well.
e) Two Sand Bailers with size suitable to the completion type (figure 9.d).
It is suggested to perform equalisation of the pressure in the lubricator, before the opening
of the swab valve, especially if the programme foresees the removal of sand bridges in the
string.
1
composed by:
No knot Rope socket
Stem
Knuckle joint
1.5ft Stroke mechanical jar
Suitable sand bailer.
2) Screw the sand bailer to the wireline string and pull it up in the Lubricator.
procedures.
4) Run in hole. Cross well head valves and tubing hanger at very limited speed (not more
than 5m/min). Running ahead at maximum possible speed, depending on the type of
wire used, fluid in well, well deviation, having particular care to cross the completion
restrictions(Crossovers, SCSSV, Landing Nipples), slow down to 10m/min.
5) Perform a weight indication pull every 1,000m before reaching the estimated bottom
hole depth. If the well profile and/ or of the completion requires it, perform more weight
indication pulls. Perform the last weight indication pull 10-20m before reaching the
estimated depth.
7) Perform the exact measure of bottom hole pulling out, repeat the operation at least two
times.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
1) With SB at Bottom Hole release the weight and begin the sand bailing action having
care not to lift the wireline string, acting on the SB piston run, and in function of
penetration rate and presumed recovery, perform weight indication pull and pull out
above the initial top of sediment.
2) Pull out of hole: With the wireline string at 100m, slow down to 10m/min until zero m.
Operator.
7) For an effectiveness action evaluation, compare permanence time at bottom hole,
recovered volume and penetration rate, as per the results obtained, set in system for
the operations carrying out until it gets to the desired depth.
8) Clean and redress the sand bailer. Before performing other runs, verify the state of the
wire above the rope socket. In case of long operations due to difficult advancements,
every once in a while cut a few meters of wire.
9) If no more operations are planned, perform the rig down procedure .
Figure 9.D - Typical Sand Bailer
9.4.3. Hydrostatic Bailing

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
In this way are defined the operations performed to clear the fishing neck partially obstructed
from sediments, when the sand bailing loses of effectiveness. The possibility to jar down on
a solid surface like the fishing neck of a Lock Mandrel is essential, in order to shear out the
shear disk.
e) Hydrostatic Bailer suitable for the operation type (figure 9.e)
f) Sufficient spare Shear Discs.
1
1) The wireline string will be made up according to the well profile, preferably 1 /2" and
composed by:
Rope socket
Stem
Knuckle joint
Hydrostatic bailer of proper size and type.
2) Screw the hydrostatic bailer to the wireline string, making sure that the Shear Disk
thickness is compatible with the max. differential pressure expected, and pull it in the
Lubricator.
procedures.
5) Perform a weight indication pull every 1,000m and the last 50m before reaching the
estimated bottom hole. If the well profile and/or of the completion requires it, perform
more weight indication pulls. .
7) Release the wireline string weight being sure to be to the desired depth. Jar down
once to shear the shear disk. (figure 9.f)
8) Wait the necessary time for the g of the Hydrostatic Bailers chamber filling. (figure 9.f)
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
1) Pull out of hole: with the wireline string at 100m, slow down to 10m/min until zero m.
Operator.
6) Before unscrewing the Housing for the cleaning, manipulate the Manual Pressure
Relief, open it with caution, to prevent a possible malfunction of the Automatic
Pressure Relief. (figure 9.f)
7) For an effectiveness action evaluation, compare permanence time at bottom hole,
recovered volume and penetration rate, as per the results obtained, set in system for
the operations carrying out until it gets to the desired depth.
8) If a single run is not enough to solve the problem, redress hydrostatic bailer and repeat
the operation.
9) At the operations end, perform the rig down procedure.
Figure 9.E - Hydrostatic Bailer

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Figure 9.F - Hydrostatic Bailer Operation

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
9.4.4. Drive Down Bailing

Drive Down Bailing is defined as the releasing of fluid (solvent, glycol, acid, etc.) suitable to
the dissolving/breaking up of paraffins, asphaltenes, scale or hydrates, onto the top of a
Lock Mandrel. Essential is the possibility to jar down on of a solid anchored surface, to shear
a pin. It is suggested to operate in absence of liquid in the well, if it is not possible.
Analyse the bottom liquid sample
The Well Area Engineering in collaboration with the Wireline Superintendent will
decide on the effectiveness and/or possible interactions between the fluids and
the feasibility of the operation.

e) Dump Bailer suitable for the operation.
f) Sufficient spare Pins.
g) Proper containers and equipment for the handling and/or transferring of
dangerous substances.
It is suggested to equalise the pressure in the lubricator, before the opening of the swab
valve, especially if the programme foresees the removal of hydrates or asphaltenic bridge.
1
composed by:
Rope socket
Stem
Knuckle joint
Dump bailer suitable for the operation.
For particularly deviated wells and/ or in presence of dog legs the maximum rigidity will
2) Perform a calibration with gauge cutter size same to the tubing drift or having a
diameter of 0.1mm smaller than the ID of the Landing Nipples that will be crossed, and
in each case not smaller than the OD of the Dump Bailer, up to the depth decided.
3) Redress and revise a Dump Bailer with diameter and dimensions suitable to the
purpose, replacing Orings or sealing parts, verifying the shearing parts, remove the
Top Sub.
4) Complying to the laws in force on the subject and making uses of all the personal
clothes foreseen, fill the Dump Bailer. Re-screw the Top Sub to the Dump Bailer being
careful not to warp the Body.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
1) Screw the Dump Bailer to the wireline string, doing attention to the possible leak of
fluid from the Equalising Port of the Top Sub, and pull it in the Lubricator
procedures.
4) Perform a weight indication pull every 100m and the last 50m before reaching the
estimated bottom hole depth. If the well profile and/or of the completion requires it,
perform more weight indication pulls.
6) Begin a careful control of tubing pressure.
7) Release the weight being sure to be to the desired depth. Jar down once to shear the
shear pin.
8) Wait the necessary time for the output of the fluid from the dump bailer.
9) Pull out of hole: With the wireline string at 100m, slow down to 10m/min until zero m.
Operator.
14) Redress the Dump Bailer and repeat the necessary runs.
15) At the operations end, perform the rig down procedure.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
9.5. TUBING PERFORATING

Tubing perforating is defined as the operation of tubing perforation, performed on drilling,
workover or production rigs, either onshore or offshore with the use of equipment and
Wireline Crew. Due to the delicacy of the operation, it is considered like HD (Heavy Duty)
job.
3
The use of a mechanical perforator allows to perform only a /8" hole for each run and
requires setting, as a support, of a Tubing Stop or a Collar Stop. The field experience has
carried out the separation of the Tbg stop setting, from the running of Perforator, and to the
use of a perforated Tubing Stop. The mechanical perforator is a jar-up tool that allows, in
case of difficulty, jar-down release. In case of multiple operation, it is suggested the
application of a spacer to the bottom of the Perforator, such to use the same Tubing Stop as
a support.
following criteria:
a) ID suitable to the well equipment size.
foreseen without any interruption in the activity. The Wireline Superintendent is responsible
on wireline Crew organisation.
of the tubing spool)
The Wireline Crew must have all the individual, fireproof and protective
equipment, as per the normative issued by Job Manager.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0

e) Perforator fit to the Tubing size.
f) Proper type and size Tubing Stop or Collar Stop.
g) Proper type and size Running Tool.
h) Proper type and size Pulling Tool.
Well depth
Type bottom sample
This operations must be performed with well shut in.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Setting Tubing Stop
The Tubing Stop is used as a Tubing Perforator support in wells completed with metal seal
tubing where the completion string doesn't have discontinuity in the inside diameter.
1
composed by:
Rope socket
Stem
Knuckle joint
Proper size Otis type SB or Camco JDC jar down pulling tool
Proper type and size TBG Stop, it is suggested perforated. (figure 9.g)
be no more than 6.
3) Perform a calibration with gauge cutter of the same diameter to the tubing drift or
having a diameter of 0.1mm smaller than the ID of the Landing Nipples that will be
crossed, and in each case not smaller than the OD of the same Perforator, up to the
depth decided for making hole.
4) Redress a jar down Pulling Tool Otis type SB or Camco JDC of proper size to engage
the Tubing Stop, pinning it with brass shear screws
5) Redress a Tubing Stop (possible light pinning of reservedness)
6) Assemble the wireline string, and a 3ft stroke Mechanical Jar.
7) Screw the Pulling Tool-Tubing Stop assembly to the wireline string.
procedures.
9) Run in the well. Cross the well head valves and the tubing hanger at very limited speed
expansion of the slips, having particular care to cross the completion restrictions
(Crossovers, SCSSV, Landing Nipples), slow down to 10m/min.
10) Perform a weight indication pull at least 50m before reaching the setting depth. If the
well profile and/or of the completion requires it, perform more weight indication pulls.
11) Reached the setting depth, with a sudden acceleration of the wireline string run-in
speed, free the slips and engage them to the TBG.
12) With jar down action complete the setting and shear the Pulling Tool shear pin.
13) Pull out the wireline string in surface to a compatible speed with wire tension and type
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Operator.
Figure 9.G - Tubing Stop

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Setting Collar Stop

The Collar Stop is used as a Tubing Perforator support in wells completed with tubing API
External upset or non upset, where the completion string does not have Landing Nipples.
Otis F is the most used.
1
composed by:
Rope socket
Stem
Knuckle joint
Proper size of type C Otis Running tool
Proper size and type of Collar Stop (figure 9.h).
For particularly deviated wells and/ or presence of dog legs, the maximum rigidity will
2) Perform a calibration with gauge cutter same to the drift of the Tubing to the setting
depth were the holes are to be performed.
3) Redress a Collar Stop Otis type F crossing the Release Spring between them and
pinning it to the Collet (figure 9.i)
4) Redress the Running Tool type C that will properly engage the Collar Stop, pinning it
with aluminium shear screws to the Collar Stop (figure 9.j).
5) Assemble the wireline string, and a 3ft stroke Mechanical Jar .
6) Screw the Running Tool-Collar Stop assembly to the wireline string.
procedures.
8) Run in the well. Cross the well head valves and the tubing hanger to very limited speed
expansion of the springs.
9) Reached the setting depth, go a few meters below the coupling were the Collar Stop
will be set, pull the wireline String above the selected coupling releasing the dogs, run-
in again locating the coupling of the Tubing.
10) With jar down action, complete the setting and shear the pin of the Running Tool
Operator.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0

Figure 9.H - Collet Stop Figure 9.I - Set the Collet Figure 9.J - Pinning the
Stop Collar Stop
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Tubing Perforating
1
composed by:
No knot Rope socket
Stem
Knuckle joint
Upstroke or hydraulic jar
3ft stroke mechanical jar
Proper size tubing perforator to the diameter and weight tubing
not more than 6ft.
2) Redress the Tubing Perforator and make sure of its perfect functionality on surface.
Pin it following the manufacturer operating instructions (figure 9.k).
3) Assemble the wireline string, make up an Up-Stroke Jar in sequence (or a Hydraulic
Jar), and a 3ft stroke mechanical Jar .
4) Make up the Tubing Perforator to the wireline string
5) Make sure that the pressures are balanced at the depth to which the tubing will be
perforated. If not, provide for the pressures equalisation.
procedures.
9) Reach the Tubing Stop depth slowly without jar down action.
10) Verify the exact depth.
11) check tubing and annulus pressures.
12) Stop on the Tubing Stop and with jar down action arm the Tubing Perforator shearing
the restraining shear pin.
13) Lift the wireline string making Body move towards the top, causing the Perforator
anchor slips expansion and the exit of the Puncher.
14) With jar up action, provoke the progressive moving out of the punch and consequent
perforation of the tubing wall, privileging the upstroke/hydraulic jar action, made up on
the wireline string (figure 9.l).
15) After the tubing perforation the Tubing Perforator disengages automatically.
16) A J55 or N80 tubing, in a vertical well, could be perforated with ten jar up hits. If a
prolonged action of jar up does not perform any effects, or slips are sliding on the
tubing wall, suspend the operation.
17) In case of difficulty, it is possible, with jar down action, to disarm the shearing system
by shearing a safety pin, that allows the interruption of the operation for the extraction
in surface of the wireline string.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Figure 9.K - Otis Tubing Perforator
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0

Operator.
24) If necessary repeat the procedure for the following runs.
Pulling Tubing Stop/ Collar Stop

1
composed by:
No not rope socket
Stem
Knuckle joint
3ft stroke mechanical jar
Proper size jar up pulling tool type Otis RB or Camco JUC.
For particularly deviated wells and/ or presence of dog legs the maximum rigidity will
2) Redress jar up Pulling Tool Otis type RB or Camco JUC of proper size to engage the
Tubing Stop.
3) Assemble the wireline string, screw an Up-Stroke Jar in sequence (or a Hydraulic Jar),
and a 3ft stroke Mechanical Jar.
4) Screw the jar up Pulling Tool to the wireline string
procedures.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Figure 9.L - Perforating Sequence

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
8) Reach the Tubing Stop depth slowly without any jar down action.
9) Verify the depth.
10) With jar down action engage the Tubing Stop. Verify if engaged.
11) With jar up action release the Tubing Stop.
12) In case of difficulty in releasing the Tubing Stop privilege the upstroke/ hydraulic jar up
action .
13) Pull out of hole the Tubing Stop at a speed compatible with wire tension, and type of
fluid, having particular care to cross the completion restrictions (Crossovers, SCSSV,
Landing Nipples).
Operator.
19) Perform the rig down procedure.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
9.6. SUB SURFACE CONTROLLED SAFETY VALVE OPERATION

Sub Surface Controlled Safety Valve (SSCSV) Operations are defined as the operations of
setting, fishing, redressing, calibration of Storm Choke or Ambient Type Safety valves,
performed on drilling, workover and production rigs either onshore or offshore, by using
equipment and Wireline Crew for HD (Heavy Duty) or LD (Light Duty) Job, in function of the
completion type and operation time.
Storm Choke type valve (figure 9.m) is a safety valve normally open, operated by means of
a closing mechanism, activated by the force resulting from the pressure drop (P) due to
well fluid passage through a choke inside the valve. In Normal Flowing conditions the
differential pressure through the choke will be balanced by the opposite force of a calibrated
spring; but in case of a substantial increase of the flowing rate, due to wrong manoeuvres in
surface and/or well head damage, the greater differential force releases the closing
mechanism.
Ambient type valve (figure 9.m) is sensitive to the well pressure at setting point: when the
pressure goes under the calibration value, the valve closes.
Re-opening these valves requires the pressures equalising across the same: it can be
carried out by pressurising the string, or mechanically, by opening an equalising valve (figure
9.n) that must always be present between the valve body and Lock Mandrel used for the
setting in well. The selection of the Lock Mandrel will be made in function of the completion
profile, using the Landing Nipple fitter to the purpose.
following criteria:
b) WP same or higher than that one of X mass tree
The choice of the unit must be taken in function of completion type and maximum depth of
the well. The choice of size and metallurgy of the wireline is taken according to the
completion characteristics, fluids in well and reservoir temperatures.
foreseen without any to interruption in the activity. The use of Heavy Duty Crew or Light Duty
Crew depends on the completion size, surface equipment working pressure, programmed
operation time. Wireline Superintendent is responsible on wireline Crew organisation.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Operating programme
Size and type of Lock Mandrel
Size and type of equalising valve
Type size and setting parameters of safety valve
Indications of possible over pulls.
The actions to undertake for the solution of the problems that could arise during the
execution of the operation must be approved by the Agip Supervisor.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Figure 9.M - Typical SSCSV Types

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
9.6.1. Setting
Are defined in this way the operations of setting a Lock Mandrel fit to undertake a Tubing
Safety Valve. Operation shall be performed exclusively with well in static conditions.
e) Pulling and Running Tool suitable to the scheduled Lock Mandrel
f) Pulling and Running Prong suitable to the scheduled Equalising Valve
g) Scheduled Safety Valve
h) Chokes of different diameter and spare spacers
i) Spare Orings, Vpacking or sealing parts for the Lock Mandrel
j) Shear pins fit to the type of Pulling and Running Tool
Figure 9.N - Typical; Equalising Valves

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
1
composed by:
Rope socket
Stem
Knuckle joint
3ft stroke Mechanical Jar,(the running of an hydraulic/ upstroke jar will be agreed
with the AGIP Supervisor)
Proper size and type of running tools
Lock mandrel, equalising valve and safety valve of proper size and type.
3) Perform a calibration with gauge cutter with diameter at least equal to the ID of the
scheduled Landing Nipple, up to the depth of the same Landing Nipple.
4) Select the Lock Mandrel of proper type and size for the Landing Nipple scheduled,
controlling the dimensional characteristics.
5) Redress the Lock Mandrel replacing eventually sealing parts (Orings, V packing etc.)
6) Check, redress and fix the Safety Valve setting parameters replacing eventually the
sealing parts.
7) Check and redress the Equalising Valve replacing eventually the sealing parts.
8) Redress a Running Tool of proper type to engage the Lock Mandrel, having particular
care to the cutting areas.
9) Assemble Lock Mandrel, Equalising Valve, and Safety Valve.
10) Pin the Running Tool to the Lock Mandrel as per manufacturer Tech. Manual.
11) In presence of fluid with density and/or particular viscosity in well, foresee if possible,
the Running Prong so that the Equalising Valve acts like an open By pass.
12) Assemble the wireline string and a 3ft Stroke Mechanical Jar.
13) Screw the Running Tool-Lock Mandrel assembly to the wireline string and pull it in the
Lubricator.
procedures.
16) Perform a weight indication pull 50m at least before reaching the Landing Nipple
depth. If the well profile and/or the completion requires, perform more weight indication
pulls.
17) Set the Lock Mandrel following the instructions of the Manufacturer Manual.
18) Pull the Running Tool in surface to a compatible speed with wire tension and type of
fluid in well, having particular care to cross the completion restrictions (Crossovers,
19) With the tool at 100m, slow down to 10m/ min until zero meters.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Operator.
24) If other operations are not scheduled, perform surface equipment rigging down
procedure
9.6.2. Pulling
Are defined in this way the operations of retrieving a Lock Mandrel fit to undertake a Tubing
Safety Valve. The operation must be performed exclusively with well in static conditions.
g) Scheduled Safety Valve
h) Chokes of different diameter and spare spacers
i) Spare Orings, V packing or sealing parts for the Lock Mandrel
1
1) The wireline string will be made up according to the size of the well, preferably 1 /2
and composed by:
Rope socket
Stem
Knuckle joint
3ft stroke Mechanical Jar, (the running of an hydraulic/ upstroke jar will be
agreed with the AGIP Supervisor)
Right size and type of pulling tool fit for the purpose.
not more than 6ft.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
2) Perform a calibration with gauge cutter size at least equal to the OD of the Lock
Mandrel, up to the top of the same Lock Mandrel.
3) Redress a proper size and type Jar up Pulling Tool fit to the Lock Mandrel to fish,
giving particular care to the cutting areas. Use a brass Shear Pin.
4) Make sure that the pressure across the Lock Mandrel are equalised, if not provide for
the pressurising.
5) For isolated well jobs, or in case of doubts on the real STHP, make up on Pulling Tool
the Pulling Prong for the Equalising Valve, foreseeing if necessary, to pump or release
with Dump Bailer, hydrates inhibitor to the top of the Mandrel in well.
6) Assemble the wireline string and a 3ft Stroke Mechanical jar.
7) Make up the Pulling Tool to the wireline string and pull it in the Lubricator.
procedures.
10) Perform a weight indication pull 50m at least before reaching the depth of the Landing
Nipple. If the well profile and/or the completion requires, perform other weight
indications at preceding depths.
11) Perform the procedure of retrieving the Lock Mandrel as per Constructor Manual.
12) In case of fishing with Pulling Prong, run Top Mandrel depth, inserting the P.P. in the
Equalising Valve, without Jar down action to engage the Lock Mandrel, verifying with
care the equalisation; certain of the correct operation done, engage, release and pull
out the Lock Mandrel.
13) Pull Running Tool and SSCSV to surface at a speed compatible with wire tension and
type of fluid in well, having particular care to cross the completion restrictions
14) With the tool at 100m, slow down to 10m/min until zero meters.
Operator.
19) If other operations are not scheduled, perform surface equipment rigging down
procedure
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
9.7. SURFACE CONTROLLED SUBSURFACE SAFETY VALVE OPERATION

Surface Controlled Subsurface Safety Valve (subsequently said: SCSSV) are defined the
Wireline retrievable Safety valves controlled from the surface through a control line and a
hydraulic panel to automatically shut the Safety Valve if necessary .
following criteria:
Figure 9.O - Typical SCSSV Hydraulic Landing Nipple

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
The surface equipment must include the BOP, the Lubricator, the Stuffing Box and the
Adapter Flange adequate to the diameter of the equipment to be used in well and the same
or higher working pressure to that of the Well-Head.
The use of Light Duty or Heavy Duty equipment is decided in relationship to well profile,
type of SCSSV and well head working pressure ;
The necessary equipment must also include :
Manual hydraulic pump having suitable working pressure
Hydraulic pump for SCSSV functional test
Running tool and running prong specific for the SCSSV
Pulling tool and pulling prong specific for the SCSSV
Hydraulic hoses having suitable working pressure
Air compressor to feed the hydraulic pomp for the SCSSV tests.
Operating programme
Actual flow rate of the well
Scheduled flow rate at the end of operation
Copy of the last operation report and possible previous accidents.
Well depth
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
9.7.1. Setting SCSSV
The wireline string to set the SCSSV is composed by:

Rope socket
Tungsten filled stem
5ft Spang Jar
Running tool + prong.
1
The wireline string OD must not be smaller than 1 /2", the use of bigger diameters must
be reported on operating programme and in agreement with the Wireline
Superintendent.
The running prong must have the lower end, that is positioned through the flapper/ ball
valve, preferably brass made, in order to prevent damages in the sealing parts of the
SCSSV
Figure 9.P - Typical SCSSV Assembly

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
1) Perform the assembly procedure of the surface equipment .
2) Redress the Running Tool
3) Check the status of the SCSSV to run in the well, in particular the chevron packing.
Acquire Part Number and Serial Number of the SCSSV that will be reported again on
the ARPO-11.
4) Pin Running Tool + Running Prong to the SCSSV
5) Assemble the wireline string, with running tool + prong + SCSSV in the lubricator.
6) Connect a manual hydraulic pump to the needle valve on the well head that controls
the SCSSV, excluding the hydraulic panel for the automatic control .
procedures.
8) Flush the control line.
9) Run in the well the SCSSV Cross the well head valves and the tubing hanger at very
limited speed (not more than 5m/min). Running ahead at maximum possible speed,
depending on the type of wire used and fluid in well. If problems are verified during the
production head and tubing hanger crossing, like obstructions or jar down action
necessity, pull out of hole and check the status of the SCSSV
10) Perform the setting procedure of the SCSSV as per Tech manual procedure of the
manufacturer, pressurise the control line to be sure that the SCSSV is held opening.
11) Pull out of hole the running tool at the maximum compatible speed with wire tension
and type of fluid in well. Care must be taken when crossing the well head valves, slow
down to 10m/min until zero m.
Operator.
16) Rig up the lubricator, open 50% the well head swab valves, perform the test procedure
of the SCSSV as per document STAP M-1-S-5010 DEFINITION OF SCSSV
PERIODIC TEST CRITERIA.
17) Rig down wireline equipment, re-connect the hydraulic control panel to the SCSSV,
restore the well flowing conditions as before the wireline operation
18) The Agip Supervisor will take care of the ARPO-11 compilation.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Figure 9.Q - Typical Running Tool
9.7.2. Pulling SCSSV

The wireline string to retrieve the SCSSV is composed by:
Rope socket
Tungsten Filled Stem
5ft Spang Jar
Pulling tool + prong.
1
The wireline string OD must not be smaller than 1 /2", the use of bigger diameters must be
reported on operating programme and in agreement with the Wireline Superintendent.
The up-stroke jar or hydraulic jar may only be used if planned for the job and authorised by
the Wireline Superintendent. The pulling prong must have the lower end, that is positioned
through the flapper/ ball valve, preferably made of brass to prevent damages to the sealing
parts of the SCSSV
1) Perform the assembling procedure of the surface equipment .
2) Redress the suitable Pulling Tool for the SCSSV in the well, preferably jar down
operating.
3) Assemble the wireline string, with pulling tool + prong in the lubricator.
4) Connect a manual hydraulic pump to the needle valve on the well head that controls
the SCSSV, excluding the hydraulic panel for the automatic control.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
procedures. With the manual pump bring the SCSSV in open position. If the valve is a
Non-Equalising type, proceed to equalise pressures above and below the SCSSV
before pressurising the control line.
2) Run in the well the pulling tool. Cross the well head valves and the tubing hanger at
very limited speed (not more than 5m/min). Running ahead at maximum possible
speed, depending on the type of wire used and fluid in well. At the SCSSV setting
depth, engage the valve releasing the wireline string weight and eventually with a light
jar down action; unseat the SCSSV with jar up action and retrieve paying particular
care to possible over pulls and to cross the well head valves. Verify that the SCSSV
was retrieved, checking the pressure loss at the control line pressure gauge.
3) The operator is responsible for closing/opening of well head valves, counting the turns.
6) Rig down the wireline equipment, re-connect the SCSSV hydraulic control panel The
well without Safety Valve must be left with all the well head valves in closed position. If
the SCSSV retrieving is not immediately followed by the redressed valve installation, it
is suggested foresee the planning of a Back Pressure Valve in the Tubing Hanger.
7) It will be care of the Agip Supervisor take note again of the Part Number and Serial
Number of the SCSSV that will be reported on the ARPO-11.
Figure 9.R - Typical Pulling Tool

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
9.7.3. Installation During Completion

This operation is performed during the final phase of the completion operation and is
performed with the well killed.
The operation is defined Heavy Duty Operation or Light Duty Operation depending to well
configuration, type of equipment and operation time; in relationship to the above statement,
the equipment and the Wireline Crew must be suitable to the type of operation.
The necessary equipment must include:
Top Pulley for the right size wireline.
Intermediate Pulley for the right size wireline with suitable length weight indicator
hydraulic hose.
Three way nipple with connection for the kill line, flange for wireline BOP and
thread to be connected on the tubing string of the completion.
Wireline BOP with ID suitable to the wireline equipment programmed.
Manual hydraulic pump for the control line test.
Hydraulic Pump for SCSSV test.
Connecting hydraulic hoses with suitable working pressure.
Hoses for compressed air supply.
Dummy valve.
Running tool + Proper Running prong.
Pulling tool + Proper Pulling prong.
The wireline string must be composed by:

Rope socket
Tungsten filled stem
5ft Spang jar
Running Tool or Pulling Tool.
1
The wireline string OD must not be smaller than 1 /2", the use of bigger diameters must be
reported on operating programme and in agreement with the Wireline Superintendent.
The up-stroke jar or hydraulic jar may only be used if planned for the job and authorised by
the Wireline Superintendent.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
1) Perform assembling procedures for the surface wireline equipment to be used during
the completion.
2) As per completion procedures make up the landing nipple and perform the connection
of the control line.
3) Set the dummy valve in the landing nipple and record the control line connection and
seal bore hydraulic test, to well head working pressure value,
4) Rig down the surface wireline equipment.
5) As per completion procedures continue to run the tubing string until the tubing hanger
is made up.
6) Perform the control line to tubing hanger connection, record the tubing hanger-control
line connection hydraulic test, to the well head working pressure value.
7) As per completion procedures go on and set the tubing hanger in the tubing spool.
8) If planned on the completion programme, repeat the control line test with the BOP
stack lifted to uncover the extended neck of the tubing hanger, and record it.
9) As per completion procedures go on and set the tubing hanger in the tubing spool.
10) With the well head rigged up, perform the assemblage procedure of the wireline
surface equipment and connect a manual hydraulic pump to the SCSSV needle valve.
11) Open the well head valves, run in well the pulling tool. Have particular care to cross
production head and tubing hanger (max. 5m/min). Running ahead at maximum
possible speed, depending on the type of wire used, fluid in well. Engage and retrieve
the dummy valve.
12) Perform the programmed clean up and well testing operations.
13) Redress the Running Tool
14) Check the status of the SCSSV to run in the well, in particular the chevron packing.
Acquire Part Number and Serial Number of the SCSSV that will be reported again on
the ARPO-11.
15) Pin Running Tool + Running Prong to the SCSSV
16) Assemble the wireline string, with running tool prong SCSSV in the lubricator.
17) Connect a manual hydraulic pump to the needle valve that controls the SCSSV
procedures.
19) Flush the control line.
20) Run in the well the SCSSV Cross the well head valves and the tubing hanger at very
limited speed (not more than 5m/min). Running ahead at maximum possible speed,
depending on the type of wire used and fluid in well. If problems are verified during the
production head and tubing hanger crossing, like obstructions or jar down action
necessity, pull out of hole and check the status of the SCSSV
21) Perform the setting procedure of the SCSSV as per Tech manual procedure of the
manufacturer, pressurise the control line to be sure that the SCSSV is held opening.
22) Pull out of hole the running tool at the maximum compatible speed with wire tension
and type of fluid in well. Care must be taken when crossing the well head valves, slow
down to 10m/min until zero m.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Operator.
5) Rig up the lubricator, open 50% the well head swab valves, perform the test procedure
of the SCSSV as per document STAP M-1-S-5010 DEFINITION OF SCSSV
PERIODIC TEST CRITERIA.
6) The Agip Supervisor will take care of the ARPO-11 compilation.
7) Rig down wireline equipment. Rig up Extractor to set the BPV.
8) Run and set the right type and size of BPV in the Tubing Hanger.
9) Bleed off STHP to zero. Close all the well head valves. Be sure that the control line
pressure was bled off to zero
10) Rig down Extractor.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Figure 9.S - Typical Dummy Valve
9.8. PLUGS
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Wireline Plugs are tools that, run in with a Lock Mandrel, once in there profile, perform an
hydraulic seal in the tubing. They are used to have the well in safety conditions, to isolate
two productive zones in a selective completion, to test the completion string etc.
They could be classified, in relationship to the construction and to the function in:
Plug Bean (figure 9.t) / Circulating plug (figure 9.u) (with hydraulic seal from the
bottom towards the top)
Check Valve (figure 9.v) / Standing Valve / Testing Tool (figure 9.w) (with
hydraulic seal from the top towards the bottom )
Blanking Plug (figure 9.x/ Plug Choke (figure 9.y) (with hydraulic seal in both
ways).
They can also be classified in relationship to the type of operation necessary:

One run to set- one run to pull
One run to set- two runs to pull
Two runs to set- two runs to pull.
Figure 9.T - Typical Plug Bean Figure 9.U - Typical Circulating Plug
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Figure 9.V - Typical Check Valve Figure 9.W - Typical Test Tool
An equalising valve must always be present between the wireline Plug and the Lock
Mandrel used for the setting in the well. The choice of the Lock Mandrel will be made in
function of the completion profile. The use of equipment and Wireline Crew for HD (Heavy
Duty) or LD (Light Duty) Job, is decided in function of completion type and operation time.
The pulling operation of a wireline Plug is only possible after having equalised the pressures
equalisation through the plug. This could be dictated from the same tool sketch (Plug Choke,
two runs to pull), or by means of a proper prong to run together with the pulling tool, or
otherwise, when possible, equalising from surface.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Figure 9.X - Typical Blanking Plug Figure 9.Y - Typical Plug Choke
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
following criteria:
Choice of reel unit is take in relationship to completion type and maximum operating depth.
foreseen without any to interruption in the activity.. The use of Heavy Duty Crew or Light
Duty Crew depends on completion size, surface equipment working pressure, planned
operating time and operation type. Wireline Superintendent is responsible on wireline Crew
organisation.
TBG and annulus pressures
Size and type of Lock Mandrel
Size and type of equalising valve
Type and size of wireline Plug.
Indications on possible over pulls.
Plug pressure test data.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
9.8.1. Setting
Are defined in this way the operations of setting a Lock Mandrel fit to undertake a wireline
Plug. Operation to be performed exclusively with well shut in.
For the setting of Plug Bean or Circulating Plug, the running tool must be equipped with the
proper running prong.
e) Pulling and Running Tool suitable to the type of scheduled Lock Mandrel
g) Scheduled wireline Plug
h) Spare seals for the wireline Plug
i) Spare Orings, Vpacking or sealing parts for Lock Mandrel and Equalising
Valve.
1
composed by:
Rope socket
Stem
Knuckle joint
Up stroke/Hydraulic jar (for operations less than 1,000m the decision is up to the
Wireline Supervisor )
3ft stroke mechanical Jar
Running tool (with running prong) fit for the purpose
Lock mandrel, equalising valve and plug of right size and type.
3) Perform a calibration with gauge cutter to the planned landing nipple. The gauge cutter
size will be same to the Landing Nipple ID
4) Choose the Lock Mandrel of right type and size for the Landing Nipple scheduled.
Check the dimensional characteristics.
5) Redress the Lock Mandrel replacing eventually sealing parts (Orings, V packing,
etc.)
6) Check and redress the wireline Plug replacing eventually the sealing parts.
7) Check and redress the Equalising Valve replacing eventually the sealing parts.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
1) Redress a Running Tool of proper type to engage the Lock Mandrel, having particular
care to the cutting areas. Choose the running prong, check dimensions, compatibility
and functionality with running tool and equalising valve.
2) Assemble the Lock Mandrel, the Equalising Valve and the wireline Plug.
3) Pin the Running Tool to the Lock Mandrel as per manufacturer Tech. Manual.
4) Assemble the wireline string and a 3ft stroke Mechanical Jar.
5) Screw the Running Tool-Lock Mandrel assembly to the wireline string and pull it in the
Lubricator.
procedures.
9) Set the Lock Mandrel following the instructions of the Constructor Manual.
10) Pull out the Running Tool in surface to a compatible speed with wire tension and type
Operator.
16) If the wireline Plug run is Two runs to set type, repeat the procedure above described
setting inside the wireline Plug the relative Equalising Prong
17) Bleed of STHP to value pointed out in the programme, check for 15 minutes.
18) If other operations are not scheduled, perform rig down procedure.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
9.8.2. Pulling
Are defined in this way the operations to retrieving a Lock Mandrel fit to undertake a wireline
Plug. Operation to perform exclusively with well shut in.
g) Spare O rings, V packing or sealing parts for the Lock Mandrel
h) Shear pins fit to the type of Pulling and Running Tool
Formality of Execution (one run to pull )

1
composed by:
Rope socket
Stem
Knuckle joint
3ft stroke Mechanical Jar, (the running of an hydraulic/upstroke jar will be agreed
with the AGIP Supervisor).
Right size and type pulling tool fit for the purpose.
2) Perform a calibration with gauge cutter to the planned Lock Mandrel. The gauge cutter
size will be equal to the Lock Mandrel OD.
3) Redress a Jar up Pulling Tool fit to the Lock Mandrel to retrieve, giving particular care
to the cut areas. Use a brass Shear Pin.
4) Make sure that the pressures across the Lock Mandrel are equalised, if not, provide for
the pressurising .
5) For isolated well jobs, or in case of doubts on the real STHP, make up the Pulling
Prong for the Equalising Valve on to the Pulling Tool, foreseeing if necessary, to pump
or release with Dump Bailer, hydrates inhibitor to the top of the Mandrel.
6) Assemble the wireline string and a 3ft Stroke Mechanical jar.
7) Screw the Pulling Tool to the wireline string and pull it in the Lubricator.
procedures.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
3) Perform the retrieving procedure of the Lock Mandrel as per Constructor Manual.
4) In case of fishing with Pulling Prong, run to the Lock Mandrel depth, insert the P.P. in
the Equalising Valve, without Jar down action to engage the Lock Mandrel, verify with
care the equalisation; certain of the correct operation done, engage, release and pull
out the Lock Mandrel.
5) Pull out the Lock Mandrel in surface to a compatible speed with wire tension and type
Operator.
11) If other operations are not programmed, perform the rig down procedure.
Formality of Execution (two runs to pull )

This series of operations is necessary when a wireline Plug having two independent
assemblies: Lock Mandrel & Valve and Equalising Prong must be retrieved from a well.
These types of Plug are exclusively type Plug Choke.
In the programme must be noted the maximum differential pressure to retrieve the
Equalising Prong.
1
composed by:
Rope socket
Stem,
Knuckle joint
3ft stroke Mechanical Jar, (the running of an hydraulic/ upstroke jar will be
Agreed with the AGIP Supervisor)
Pulling tool fit for the purpose.
For particularly deviated wells and/or presence of dog legs the maximum rigidity will be not
more than 6ft.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
2) Perform a calibration with gauge cutter to the planned Lock Mandrel. The gauge cutter
size will be equal to the Lock Mandrel OD.
3) Redress a Jar up Pulling Tool fit to the equalising prong to retrieve, giving particular
care to the cut areas. Use a brass Shear Pin.
4) Assemble the wireline string with a Mechanical 3ft Stroke jar and an upstroke jar.
procedures.
9) Engage the equalising prong and pull it from the lock mandrel equalising the
pressures. The differential pressure allowed to perform the operation depends on type
of fluid in well and Valve and Equalising Prong design, and in each case must be
underlined in the programme .
10) Pull out the Equalising Prong in surface to a compatible speed with wire tension and
Operator.
16) Disengage Pulling Tool and Equalising Prong from the wireline string.
17) Redress a Jar up Pulling Tool fit to the Lock Mandrel to retrieve, giving particular care
to the cut areas. Use a brass Shear Pin.
procedures.
22) Perform the Lock Mandrel & Valve retrieving procedure as per Constructor Manual.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
1) Pull out the Lock Mandrel & Valve in surface to a compatible speed with wire tension
and type of fluid in well, having particular care to cross the completion restrictions
Operator.
7) If other operations are not programmed, perform rig down procedure.
9.9. SLIDING SLEEVE OPERATION

Sliding sleeves operation are defined operations of opening and/or closing circulating valves
with inner sleeves, performed on drilling or workover rigs or on production well, either
onshore that offshore with use of equipment and Wireline Crew for HD (Heavy Duty) or LD
(Light Duty) Job, in function of the completion type and time for the operation carrying out.
Most of the circulating valves found on the fields, are:
Otis - A simple circulating valve (figure 9.z)
- A with the possibility to have the profile of a Landing Nipple type X from
which the denomination XA(figure 9.aa)
- A with the possibility to have the profile of a Landing Nipple type R, from
which the denomination RA.
These types of valves have elastomeric seals and are equipped with an intermediate
equalising position, Upshift to Open and Downshift to Close (it is possible to find the reverse
configuration Downshift to Open, Upshift to Close with denomination O, XO, RO) (figure
9.bb). They are operated in opening and/or closing with a Shifting Tool type B(BO Down
Shift to Open ) (figure 9.cc).
Baker - L Sliding sleeve with F profile Seating Nipple (figure 9.dd.
This type of valve has an elastomeric seal and is not equipped with intermediate equalising
position, Upshift to Open and Downshift to Close. This sleeve is operated in opening and/or
closing with a Shifting Tool type D2(figure 9.ee)
Baker - CM. Is a circulating valve with the possibility to have in the upper part, a
landing nipple profile as Customer request.
This valve is a non elastomeric seal type and is equipped with intermediate equalising
position, Upshift to Open and Downshift to Close from which - CMU. The reverse
configuration Downshift to Open and Upshift to Close from which - CMD (figure 9.ff). These
valves are operated with a Shifting Tool type B (BO Down Shift to Open ).
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Better tools will be developed to the traditional Shifting Tool, able to allow opening of
circulating valves, provided of Equalising Position, in safety, maintaining the Tool engaged,
not allowing the shifting sleeve to move further than the equalising position while Equalising.
It is suggested the use of these tools as soon as the market will have furnished the
necessary guarantees of effectiveness and reliability of the same, to avoid those
drawbacks/accidents more frequently due to a wrong equalisation of the Tubing-Annulus
pressures.
The surface equipment is composed by the lubricator, the stuffing box, the BOP and by the
adapter flange. These elements must be suitable to the operation to be performed in
function of the following criteria:
a) ID adequate to the equipment size to be used in the well
b) WP same or higher to that of X-mass tree
c) Material compatible to the present fluids in well.
The use of additional equipment, like Injection Nipple and Safety Check Union could be
decided in relationship to the operation type and to the well conditions.
The choice of diameter and metallurgy of the wireline is decided in function of the completion
characteristics, of the fluids in well and of the field temperatures.
The Wireline Crew composition must be such to be able to run all the operations foreseen
without giving place to interruptions in the activity. The organisation of the Wireline Crew for
such job is a responsibility of the Wireline Superintendent.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Figure 9.Z - Otis Type A Sliding Sleeve Figure 9.AA - Otis type XA T Sliding Sleeve
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Figure 9.BB - Otis Type XO Sliding Sleeve Figure 9.CC - Otis Type B Shifting Tool
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Figure 9.DD - Baker Type L Sliding Sleeve Figure 9.EE - Baker Type D2 Shifting Tool
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
documentation to carrying out the operation, and particularly:
The programme of the operations
The completion profile with depth and diameters of the Completion Equipment
The height of the rotary table from a point of reference (basic flange or upper
flanges of the Tubing Spool)
Type and characteristics of the fluids present in the string.
Theoretical pressure behind the Sliding Sleeve
The Wireline Crews equipment must include all those individual protection equipment and
fireproof necessary to support the normative issued by Job Director.
Figure 9.FF - Baker CMD Type Sliding Sleeve

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
It is responsibility and care of the Chief Operator to furnish, to the Agip Supervisor, during
and at the end of the operation, all the inherent information of the carrying out and the result
of the same. It will be responsibility and care of the Agip Supervisor compile the ARPO-11
containing the operations chronology and all the information regarding :
Bottom hole depth
Bottom hole sample
Indications on possible over pulls.
The actions to undertake for the solution of the problems that could emerge during the
carrying out of the operation, must be approved from the Agip Supervisor.
9.9.1. Open Up SSD

Open up SSD are defined the opening operations of a Upshift to Open type circulating
valve with inner sleeve, independently from the model and the manufacturer, being the
operating principal the same.
This operation can be performed only with the well in static conditions. The tools that
manipulate (opening and closing) the circulating valves are:
Shifting Tool Otis type B for valves - Otis A
- Otis XA
- Otis RA
- Baker CMU
Shifting Tool Baker D2 for valves - Baker L
b) Gauge cutters OD adequate to the completion type
c) Wireline suitable to the possible well fluids, as well as to the mechanical
solicitations
d) Fishing tools suitable to the completion type (Wireline Grabs, Wire Cutters go
devil, Impression Blocks etc.), and to the type of wireline string used (Pulling
e) Shifting Tool right type and size.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Shifting Tool Otis type BO(no Selective Shifting Keys)
Verify on the completion profile that the Sliding Sleeve to open is not below a Landing Nipple
Otis series S pos. 1, with the same diameter of the valve to operate, and/or of another
valve of the same type and diameter, since, in these cases, the Shifting keys of the Shifting
Tool Otis BO would engage the profile S 1 of the Landing Nipple, or the Sleeve profile of
the upper valve, without the possibility to go below (during the closing procedure), or opening
the upper Sliding Sleeve (during the opening procedure). In these cases a Shifting Tool Otis
Selective is needed.
1
1) The wireline string will be made up in function of the well size, preferably 1 /2 and
composed by:
No knot rope socket
Stems
Knuckle joint
3ft Stroke mechanical jar
Shifting Tool type BO fit to the tubing diameter and valve to be opened.
2) Perform a calibration with gauge cutter having same diameter of the Tubing drift or
having a diameter 0.1mm less than the Landing Nipples ID that will be crossed, and in
each case not less than the OD of the same Shifting tool, up to the depth of the valve.
3) Redress a Shifting Tool type B and make sure of the perfect functionality on surface,
verifying attentively: cutting area, diameter and integrity of the Shifting Keys profile.
Pin the tool with a brass shear pin.
and a 3ft Stroke Mechanical Jar.
5) Screw the Shifting Tool to the wireline string, being sure that the Top Sub is turned
towards the bottom, otherwise (top sub screwed on the wireline string), the tool is in
closing position.
6) Make sure that the Tubing - Annulus pressures are equalised at the SSD depth, before
and after the opening. Otherwise provide for the equalisation.
(not more than 5m/min). Go on running in at the maximum speed possible in function
of the type of wire, type of fluid in the well and deviation. Have particular care the
crossing of the completion restrictions (Crossovers, SCSSV, Landing Nipples), slow
down to 10m/min.
9) Perform a weight indication pull 50m at least before reaching the depth of the valve. If
the well profile and/or the completion requires, perform other weight indications at
preceding depths.
10) Reach the depth of the valve slowly without practising jar down action.
11) Verify the engaging depth of the sleeve with the Shifting Keys, in positive case their
will be the indication of an over pull.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
1) Control with attention the Tubing-Annulus pressures.

2) With a vigorous jar up action shift the sleeve towards the top provoking the progressive
opening of the valve, privileging, if necessary, the action of the Upstroke/Hydraulic jar
present in the wireline string. Reached the intermediate Equalising position, there
where it is possible to identify it, stop the jar up action, having under control tubing-
casing pressure (figure 9.gg)
3) Continue jar up action completing the opening of the sleeve (figure 9.gg)
4) Once opened, the sleeve will have done the full run, provoking the shifting tool to
release from the same. The releasing of the tool is possible only if the sleeve is fully
open.
5) In case of difficulty in operating the valve, the jar up action, instead of relieving on the
sleeve, will beat on the shifting tool safety shear pin, shearable in jar up, getting loose
the tool.
6) Pull the Running Tool to surface to a compatible speed with the tension on the wire,
and the type of fluid, have particular attention crossing the completion restrictions
7) Perform the procedure of closing well.
8) Perform the procedure of extraction tool from the lubricator.
9) Verify the integrity of the shear pin in surface, to prove the good result of the operation,
otherwise, repeat the procedure, because the sleeve has not shifted all the way.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Figure 9.GG - SSD Upward Opening Procedure

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
In case of closing operation, refer to the procedure of Opening Down SSD or to the
procedure of Selective Shifting type X.
Shifting Tool Baker Type D 2

The Baker Type D 2 shifting tool is the tool that allows to operate (opening and closing) the
Baker L type circulating valve in any number and sequence. One of the characteristics, in
addition to the selectivity, is also its resistance against the differential lift during the opening
operation, (the differential pressure entering in the tubing pushes the skirt towards the top,
keeping the dogs of the tool engaged to the opening sleeve, always that the operator
maintains tension on the wireline string).
1
1) The wireline string will be made up in function of the size of the well, preferably 1 /2
and composed by:
No knot rope socket
Stem
Knuckle joint
Shifting Tool Baker type D-2 fit to the tubing diameter and to the valve to be
opened.
not more than 6'.
2) Perform a calibration with gauge cutter having same diameter than the Tubing drift or
each case not less to the OD of the same Shifting tool, up to the depth of the valve.
3) Redress a Shifting Tool Baker type D-2 and make sure of the perfect functionality on
surface, verifying attentively: cutting area, diameter and integrity of the Collet profile
and Shifting Dogs. Give the tool the Upshift to Open configuration (Collet in upper
position). Pin the tool with brass shear pins.
5) Screw the Shifting Tool to the wireline string.
of the type of wire, type of fluid in the well and deviation. Have particular care during
the crossing of the completion restrictions (Crossovers, SCSSV, Landing Nipples),
slowing down to 10m/min. If necessary, perform jar down action to go through
completion equipment where Collet hangs up.
preceding depths.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
1) Reach the depth of the valve slowly without practising jar down action . If the
completion profile foresees the crossing of other valves of the same type, the Collet
will engage the profile F in the upper part of the valve, go through it with light jar down
action.
2) Reached the valve to operate, the Collet will engage the profile F, unload the weight
of the wireline string slowly, compressing the main spring, that will spread out the
Shifting Dogs. A pull on the wireline string will confirm that the sleeve is engaged.
opening of the valve privileging, if necessary, the action of the Upstroke/Hydraulic jar
present in the wireline string (figure 9.hh)
5) Opened the SSD, the Sleeve will have done all its run, continue with jar up action will
release the Tool . The tool will disengage only if the sleeve is totally open.
Figure 9.HH - Baker D Shifting Tool Operation

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
sleeve, will beat on the shifting tool safety shear pins, shearable in jar up, getting loose
the tool.
16) Pull the Shifting Tool to surface to a compatible speed with the tension on the wire,
and the type of fluid, have particular attention during the completion restrictions
crossing (Crossovers, SCSSV, Landing Nipples).
19) Verify the integrity of the shear pins in surface, to prove the good result of the
operation, otherwise, repeat the procedure, because the sleeve has not shifted all the
way.
20) For closing procedure, refer to the exact contrary of the procedure above described,
having care to run the Shifting Tool with the Collet in lower position.
9.9.2. Open Down SSD

Open down SSD are defined the operations of opening a circulating valve with shifting
sleeve type Downshift to Open, independently from the model and the Manufacturer, being
the operational beginnings the same. This operation is executable only with the well in static
conditions. The tool that operates (opening and closing) the circulation valves are:
Shifting Tool Otis type BO for valves - Otis O
- Otis XO
- Otis RO
Baker CMD
Selective Positioning Tool Otis 142BO for valve - Otis O
- Otis XO
- Otis RO
- Baker CMD
One of the principal characteristics of the Selective Positioning Tool Otis 142BO (figure 9.ii)
is the selectivity given from a similar Lower Body to that of the Running Tool Otis X that
allows the opening of an any present valve in the completion. This tool is not provided of a
safety release system, because it is possible to retrieve it in any moment, without interfering
during the crossing of other valves at higher depths.
b) Gauge cutters OD adequate to the completion type
c) Wireline suitable to the possible well fluids, as well as to the mechanical
solicitations
d) Fishing tools suitable to the completion type (Wireline Grabs, Wire Cutters go
devil, Impression Blocks etc.), and to the type of wireline string used (Pulling
Tools, Fishing Socket, etc.).
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Selective Positioning Tool Otis 142BO
1
and composed of:
No knot rope socket
Stem
Knuckle joint
Shifting Tool type 142BO fit to the tubing diameter and to the valve to be
opened
Figure 9.II - Otis Selective B Shifting Tool

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
3) Redress a Shifting Tool type 142BO and make sure of the perfect functionality on
surface, verifying attentively: mechanism of the Selective Keys, diameter and integrity
of the Shifting Keys profile.
4) Assemble the wireline string and a 3ft Stroke Mechanical Jar.
5) Screw the Shifting Tool to the wireline string.
of the type of wire, type of fluid in the well and deviation. Have particular care crossing
of the completion restrictions (Crossovers, SCSSV, Landing Nipples), slowing down to
10m/min. When crossing completion equipment of the same ID of the Sliding Sleeve to
be operated, it could be necessary to lightly jar down so that the Selective Dogs of
the Shifting Tool will retract and be able to run through.
preceding depths.
10) Reach the depth of the valve slowly without practising jar down action and run below it.
11) Pull the wireline string, the Selective Dog will engage the lower part of the valve, with
light over pull ( 150lbs) the Shifting Keys will arm themselves.
12) Run in again slowly to valve depth, to a correct operation will correspond the
engagement of the Shifting Keys to the sleeve with loss of the weight.
14) With a vigorous jar down action shift the sleeve towards the bottom provoking the
progressive opening of the valve. reached the intermediate Equalising position, there
where it is possible to identify it, stop the jar down action, having under control tubing-
casing pressure.
15) Continue jar down action completing the opening of the sleeve.
16) Once opened, the sleeve will have done the full run, provoking the shifting tool to
release from the same. The releasing of the tool is possible only if the sleeve is fully
open.
17) In case of difficulty in the operate the valve it is possible extract in surface without
interfere with other valves in the completion string.
18) Pull the wireline string to surface to a compatible speed with the tension on the wire,
and the type of fluid, have particular attention crossing the completion
restrictions(Crossovers, SCSSV, Landing Nipples).
For a possible closing operation, refer to the procedure of Open Up SSD or to the
Selective Shifting procedure.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
9.9.3. Selective Shifting

For operations of opening and/or closing Upshift to Open type valves in Selective
completions it is not possible to operate with Type B Shifting Tool, because the Shifting
Keys Non Selective would engage the upper Sliding Sleeves and/or the profile of the
Landing Nipple series S pos. 1. The solutions of the problem could be represented by:
Shifting Tool Otis type B with Selective Keys(figure 9.jj) for Upshift operations
Shifting Tool Otis type X(figure 9.kk) for Upshift and/or Downshift operations
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Figure 9.JJ -B Selective Shifting Tool Figure 9.KK -X Selective Shifting Tool
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Shifting Tool Otis type BO (Selective Shifting Keys)
The peculiarity of this configuration is the particular design of the Shifting Keys that make
possible the crossing of all the valves and the profiles of Landing Nipples on risks, when
pulling out of hole, without engaging them. Gone below the depth of the said valve, pulling
out, the Selective Shifting Keys will engage the sleeve. The releasing of the tool will not be
automatic with the full motion of the sleeve, but will require the shearing of the Shear Pin.
1
and composed by:
No knot rope socket
Stem
Knuckle joint
3 ft Stroke mechanical jar
Shifting Tool type BO fit to the tubing diameter and to the valve to be opened.
having a diameter 01mm less to the Landing Nipples ID that will be crossed, and in
3) Redress a Shifting Tool type BO and make sure of the perfect functionality on
surface, verifying attentively: cutting area, diameter and integrity of the Selective Keys
profile. Pin the tool with a brass shear pin.
5) Screw the Shifting Tool to the wireline string, being sure that the Top Sub is turned
towards the bottom, otherwise (top sub screwed on the wireline string), the tool is in
closing position.
of the type of wire, type of fluid in the well and deviation. Have particular care the
crossing of the completion restrictions (Crossovers, SCSSV, Landing Nipples), slow
down to 10m/min.
preceding depths.
10) Reach the depth of the valve slowly without practising jar down action.
11) Verify the engaging depth of the sleeve with the Selective Shifting Keys, in positive
case their will be the indication of an over pull.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
opening of the valve privileging, if necessary, the action of the Upstroke/Hydraulic jar
present in the wireline string; reached the intermediate Equalising position, there
where it is possible to identify it, stop the jar up action, having under control tubing and
casing pressure. If the Upshift action is performed for closing of an Open Down
Sliding Sleeve, it is not necessary to individuate the equalising position.
2) Once opened the SSD, the Selective Shifting Keys will remain engaged to the sleeve;
continue the jar up action to shear the Shear Pin, releasing the tool.
sleeve, will beat on the shifting tool safety shear pin, shearable in jar up, getting loose
the tool.
7) The tool with this configuration does not give any indications to the opening of the
Sliding Sleeve. Only with other operations (flowing of the well, circulation tubing-
casing), the opening could be ascertained.
8) In case of Downshift operation, refer to the procedure of Open Down or to the
procedure Selective Shifting X type.
Selective Shifting Tool Otis Type X

For opening and/or closing Upshift to Open or Downshift to Open, it is possible to operate in
any situation with a Selective Shifting Tool Otis Type X.
A moving part of the Shifting Keys acts as locator, moving on a J-Slot, arming and
disarming the Tool alternatively; the operation of Locating/Unlocating of the tool is possible
thanks to the Drag between the tubing and the Locating part of the Shifting Keys. For
Upshift operations the tool will be run with a Suspension Tool(figure 9.ll) placed under the
Shifting, such to allow the suspension of the wireline string during the closing of the jar,
preventing that the wireline string goes under the valve, giving origin to a cycle of the tool,
not wanted. The Suspension Tool is designed to support the weight of a wireline string with 8
ft of stem, without jar down action. The presence of the Suspension Tool for Downshift
operations is optional. The tool is not provided with a safety Shear Pin, because the
releasing is always possible cycling the same in position of Unlocating in any moment.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Figure 9.LL - Suspension Tool
Upshift Operations
1
and composed by:
No knot rope socket
Stem
Knuckle joint
Shifting Tool type X fit to the diameter tubing and of the valve to be opened.
not more than 6ft.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
each case not less to the OD of the same Shifting tool, up to the depth for the opening
of the valve.
3) Redress a Shifting Tool type X and make sure of the perfect functionality on surface
of the Locating part on the J-Slot, diameter and integrity of the Shifting Keys profile.
Verify the efficiency of the Suspension Tool, in particular way the tenacity of the
Spring Keys.
5) Screw the Shifting Tool in Unlocating position, and the Suspension Tool, to the
wireline string, being sure that the Top Sub is turned towards the bottom, otherwise
(top sub screwed on the wireline string), the tool is in closing position.
the completion restrictions (Crossovers, SCSSV, Landing Nipples), slowing down to
10m/min.
10) Go below the valve depth slowly, without practising jar down action.
11) Cycle the tool in Locating position, lifting the wireline string and releasing the weight in
sequence.
12) Perform the verification of the engaging depth of the Shifting to the sleeve. if OK
there will be an over pull indication.
14) With a vigorous jar up action shift the sleeve towards the top, provoking the
progressive opening of the valve, privileging, if necessary, the action of the
Upstroke/Hydraulic jar present in the wireline string. Reached the intermediate
Equalising position, there where it is possible to identify it, stop the jar up action,
having under control tubing-casing pressure. Have particular attention during the
releasing of the wireline string weight after the jar up action, to not extrude the
Suspension Tool. If the Upshift action is performed for closing of an Open Down
Sliding Sleeve, it is not necessary to individuate the equalising position.
15) Go on with the jar up action completing the opening of the sleeve.
16) After the opening/closing operation, the sleeve will have done his full run, provoking
the self releasing of the Shifting from the same. The releasing will be possible only if
the sleeve has done all the run. It is good rule of thumb before pulling the wireline
string out of hole, cycle the tool N 2 times and repeat the release test.
17) In case of difficulty in operating the valve, or in case the tool engages sleeves or
nipples coming out of the hole, cycle the tool in Unlocating position releasing the
weight of the wireline string and lifting in sequence.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Operations in Downshift
The use of the Suspension Tool is considered optional.
1
and composed by:
No knot rope socket
Stem
Knuckle joint
Shifting Tool type X fit to the tubing diameter and to the valve to be opened
not more than 6ft.
having a diameter 0.1mm less to the Landing Nipples ID that will be crossed, and in
each case not less than the OD of the same Shifting tool, up to the depth for the
opening of the valve.
3) Redress a Shifting Tool type X and make sure of the perfect functionality on surface
of the Locating part on the J-Slot diameter and integrity of the Shifting Keys profile.
Verify the efficiency of the Suspension Tool in particular way the tenacity of the
Spring Keys
5) Screw the Shifting Tool in Unlocating position, and the Suspension Tool, to the
wireline string, being sure that the Top Sub is turned towards the top, otherwise
(bottom sub screwed on the wireline string), the tool is in Upshift position.
the completion restrictions (Crossovers, SCSSV, Landing Nipples), slowing down to
10m/min. It is possible to cross with this tool also a Landing Nipple Otis type S
position 1 with the same nominal diameter of the Sliding Sleeve to operate.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
1) Go below the depth of the valve slowly without practising jar down action (if the
Suspension Tool is on the wireline string, jar down action must be performed).
2) Cycle the tool in Locating position, lifting the wireline string and releasing the weight in
sequence.
3) Perform the verification of the engaging depth of the Shifting to the sleeve; if OK
there will be the loss of weight of the wireline string.
5) With a vigorous jar down action shift the sleeve towards the bottom provoking the
progressive opening of the valve; reached the intermediate Equalising position, there
where it is possible to identify it, stop the jar up action, having under control tubing-
casing pressure. Have particular attention during the pull on the wireline string after the
jar down action, to not extrude the Suspension Tool. If the Downshift action is
performed for closing of an Open Up Sliding Sleeve, it is not necessary to individuate
the equalising position.
6) Go on with the jar down action completing the opening of the sleeve
7) After the opening/closing operation, the sleeve will have done his full run, provoking
the self releasing of the Shifting from the same. The releasing will be possible only if
the sleeve has done all the run.
8) In case of difficulty in operating the valve, cycle the tool in Unlocating and lift wireline
string.
9.10. PACKER SETTING

Packer Setting Operation is defined the operation of setting one or more packers, hydraulic
or hydrostatic, performed on drilling or workover rigs, either onshore or offshore with use of
wireline equipment and Wireline Crew for HD (Heavy Duty) or LD (Light Duty) Job, in
function of the completion type and operation time.
The surface equipment is composed by: lubricator, stuffing box, BOP and flange adapter .
These elements must be suitable for the operation to be performed in function of the
following criteria:
The choice of the unit is taken according of completion type and maximum working depth .
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
foreseen without any interruptions in the activity. The use of Heavy Duty Crew or Light Duty
Crew depends on completion size, surface equipment working pressure, time and type of
operation. The Wireline Superintendent is responsible of Wireline Crew organisation.
Operating programme
It is also assignment of the Agip Supervisor to give instructions to the Rig Contractor for
wireline Unit positioning on the Rig site and for Wireline Crew assistance during the various
operation steps.
The components of the Wireline Crew must follow the general safety conditions given by the
Job Manager in function of the rig logistics and possible dangerous fluids present on the site.
The Drilling Contractor is responsible to the general safety conditions application by the
Wireline Crew .
The packer setting operation could be performed with one or two wireline runs in relationship
to the completion type and to the tool used, for which they are defined:
One Trip Check Valve Operation
Two Trip Check Valve Operation.
Where with Check Valve it is indicated a wireline Plug that hydraulically seals off pressure
from above once landed in the appropriate Landing Nipple.
The setting packer operation is performed contemporary using more service companies
under the direct responsibility of the Agip Supervisor.
The setting packer operation does not origin a specific report, but must be described
reporting the packer characteristics, the setting depth and all the tests performed, on the
SPER 41.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
9.10.1. One Trip Check Valve Operation

In this way is defined the operations of setting hydraulic or hydrostatic packers, on single
completions, selective individuals, multiple, selective multiples, performed with only one
wireline run.
e) Right type and size Check Valve.
1
composed by:
Rope socket
Stem
Knuckle joint
Upstroke or Hydraulic jar
Mechanical Jar ( 3ft Stroke )
Jar-Up Pulling Tool Otis type RB(figure 9.mm) or Camco JUC(figure 9.nn) of
proper size
Check Valve.
be no more than 6ft.
Only in case of a completion that foresees the presence of the 1.9 ID it is compulsory
1
the use of 1 /4 wireline string.
1) Perform a calibration with a gauge cutter with diameter at least equal to the ID of the
Landing Nipple where the Check Valve will be set, up to the depth of the same Landing
Nipple.
2) Choose the right Check Valve type and size to land in the scheduled Landing Nipple
below the packer. Check the dimensional characteristics of the Check Valve.
The most common Check Valves run in completions are : Baker mod. FB-2 Check Valve
(figure 9.oo) and the Otis Testing Tool Otis type S (figure 9.pp) and N (figure 9.qq
3) Redress the Check Valve replacing, in case, the elastomeric parts (Orings, V-
Packing, etc.)
4) Assemble the wireline string, make up the Up-Stroke Jar in sequence (or a Hydraulic
Jar), and a 3ft stroke Mechanical Jar .
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
1) Redress a Jar-Up Pulling Tool Otis type RB or Camco JUC of proper size to run the
Check Valve, giving particular care to the shearing areas .
2) Slide the Pulling Tool over the Check Valve
3) Screw Check Valve-Pulling Tool to the wireline string and pull it in the Lubricator.
procedures.
Figure 9.MM - Otis Type RB

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Figure 9.NN - Camco JUC
11) Set the Check Valve in its Landing nipple reaching the depth very slowly, without jar
down action.
12) Release the tension on the wire in the measure of 50% of the weight of the wire in well.
13) Perform the setting procedure for the packer, pressurising the string, checking the
tubing and casing pressure as per completion programme.
14) At the end of the procedure, before bleeding off the setting pressure, apply an over pull
on the wire in the measure of the 50% of the weight of the wire in the well.
15) Bleed off setting pressure slowly through the lubricator needle valve, checking the
tension on the cable.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Figure 9.OO - Baker FB-2'

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Figure 9.PP - Halliburton/Otis S Selective Test Tool
Figure 9.QQ - Halliburton/Otis N Test Tool

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
16) When the pressures are equalised above and below the Check Valve, some types of
check valve can at this point come out spontaneously from their landing nipple. Check
that this happens controlling the tension on the wire .
17) Maintaining the pressures equalised across the Check Valve, pull out the Check Valve
from its own profile with jar up action if necessary, being aware of differential pressure.
18) In case of difficulty in releasing the Check Valve, prefer jar up action with upstroke jar
or hydraulic jar made up on the wireline string.
Operator.
25) If no other operations are programmed, rig down wireline surface equipment.
9.10.2. Two Trip Check Valve Operation

In this way is defined the operations of setting hydraulic or hydrostatic packers, on single
completions, selective individuals, multiple, selective multiples, performed with two wireline
runs:
Setting
Pulling.

e) Right type and size Check Valve.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Setting
1
composed by:
Rope socket
Stem
Knuckle joint
Mechanical Jar 3ft Stroke
Jar-Down Pulling Tool type Otis SB (figure 9.rr) or Camco JDC (figure 9.ss) of
proper size
Check Valve.
For particularly deviated wells and/ or in presence of dog legs, the maximum rigidity
will be 6 or less.
Only in case of a completion that foresees the presence of the 1.9 ID it is compulsory
1
the use of 1 /4 wireline string.
2) Perform a calibration with a gauge cutter of diameter at least equal to the ID of the
Landing Nipple where the Check Valve will be set, up to the depth of the same Landing
Nipple.
3) Choose the right type and size Check Valve to land in the scheduled Landing Nipple
below the packer. Check the dimensional characteristics of the Check Valve. The most
common Check Valves run in completions are : Baker mod. HRT-2 Check Valve
(figure 9.tt).
4) Redress the Check Valve replacing in case, the elastomeric parts (Orings, V Packing
etc.)
Jar), and a 3ft stroke Mechanical Jar.
6) Redress a Running Tool of proper size suitable to run the Check Valve, giving
particular care to the shearing areas .In this case it is correct to use a jar down pulling
tool in substitute of a running tool.
7) Pin the Running Tool on the Check Valve.
8) Screw Check Valve and running Tool to the wireline string and pull it in the Lubricator.
procedures.
12) Set the Check Valve in its Landing nipple reaching the depth very slowly, verify the
exact depth.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
1) Perform the procedure of setting the Check Valve as per Technical Manual of the
Supplier, leaving the check valve in its profile.
Operator.
8) Perform the procedure to set the packer, pressurising the string, controlling pressure
changes in the tubing and in the casing as per completion programme.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Figure 9.RR - Otis SB

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Figure 9.SS - Camco JDC

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Figure 9.TT - Typical Two Trip Check Valve

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Pulling
1
The wireline string will be made up according to the well size, preferably 1 /2" and
composed by:
Rope socket
Stem
Knuckle joint
Upstroke or Hydraulic jar,
Mechanical Jar ( 3ft Stroke )
Jar-Up Pulling Tool Otis type RB or Camco JUC of proper size.
For particularly deviated wells and/ or presence of dog legs, the maximum rigidity will
Jar), and a 3ft stroke Mechanical Jar .
3) Redress a jar up pulling tool type Otis RB or Camco JUC of proper size suitable to
pull the Check Valve, giving particular care to the shearing areas. Use a brass shear
pin.
4) Make up pulling tool to wireline string and pull in lubricator.
5) Bleed off slowly the packer setting pressure, till the pressure is equalised .
procedures.
9) Reach the landing nipple very slowly. With jar down action engage the fishing neck of
the Check Valve to the Pulling Tool.
10) Pull the Check Valve from landing nipple with jar up action if necessary, doing attention
to the equalising position, in case of differential pressure.
11) In case of difficulty in pulling the Check Valve privilege the upstroke or Hydraulic jar up
action.
12) In case Pulling Tool releases due to shearing the pin, a possible wireline string design
variation, or shear pin material variation, or Pulling Tool type variation,, is responsibility
of the Agip Supervisor, that will give immediately communication to the Chief Operator.
Operator.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
4) If no other operations are programmed, rig down wireline surface equipment
9.11. SCRATCHING
Scratching operation is defined as the cleaning of the tubing from paraffins or asphaltene,
performed with well in spontaneous flowing or during fluids or solvents injection. Due to the
particular commitment required, this operation is classified as HD (Heavy Duty) Job,
independently from the completion type.
following criteria:
It is suggested the use of an Injection Nipple in the part of the Lubricator immediately under
the Stuffing box. The use of a Safety Check Union could be decided in relationship to
operation type and to well conditions.
The choice of the wireline unit type is effected in function of the completion type and
maximum planned operating depth. The choice of size and metallurgy of the wireline is taken
according to the completion characteristics, fluids in well and reservoir temperatures.
foreseen without any to interruption in the activity. It is scheduled the use of Heavy Duty
Crew. Wireline Superintendent is responsible on wireline Crew organisation.
Actual well flow rate
Scheduled flow rate at the end of operation
Copy of the last operation report and possible previous accidents.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Well depth
Type bottom sample
The wireline Unit must be equipped with:
1) Components of the wireline string enough for two strings.
2) Paraffin cutters of various diameters, the biggest of which must be equal to the tubing
drift.
3) Wireline fit to the fluids present in well and mechanical stress as well.
4) Fishing equipment fit to the type of completion (e.g. Wireline Grabs, Wire Cutters go
devil, Impression Blocks etc.), and to the type of wireline string used (Pulling Tools,
Fishing Socket etc.).
5) Scratchers with maximum OD equal to the tubing drift.
Well Flowing Procedures

1
composed by:
Rope socket
Stem
1
Sample bailer 1 /2".
The paraffins and asphaltene deposition, is located preferably in the part of tubing
nearest to surface. In order to this consideration is suggested do not insert any
Knuckle Joint or Upstroke jar in the wireline string.
3) The weight of the wireline string must be heavier than the weight calculated by
knowing flow rate, pressure and ID of tubing, because the ID of the restriction due to
paraffin deposit, and fluid velocity at that point are unknown.
4) Make up the sample bailer to the wireline string and pull it in the Lubricator.
procedures.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
1) Run in the well. Go through well head valves and the tubing hanger to a very limited
speed (not more than 5m/ min) .Running ahead to a maximum speed of 10m/ min.
2) A diminution of running speed and tension on wire indicates that the wireline string is
going through an ID similar to the Sample Bailer OD. Decrease the flowing rate acting
on the adjustable choke on the well head, pull out of hole with care, therefore run in
again at a lower speed than the previous.
3) Run in hole to a depth where paraffin deposition is over, or, if this datum unknown,
proceed for 100-200m without noticing variations on the run in hole parameters.
4) Pull out the Sample Bailer in surface to a compatible speed with wire tension and type
Operator.
10) Maintaining unchanged the wireline string, replace the Sample Bailer with a Paraffin
1
Scratcher having the finger diameter bigger than 1 /2" but smaller than the tubing drift.
(figure 9.uu)
Figure 9.UU - Typical Tubing Scratcher
16) Repeat the procedure like to the points 5 and 6

17) Run in hole the Paraffin Scratcher through the length of tubing interested by the
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
paraffin deposit, applying up & down action on the Wire by hand . Pay much care on
the wire tension behaviour: blocks of paraffin that fall from the tubing ID could, with
piston action, push the wireline string upward, breaking the Wire. In this circumstance
the Operator must act on the adjustable choke on the well head to avoid that the well
plugs because of paraffin blocks.
18) Go ahead with the action of scratching to a depth where loss of speed due to paraffin
restriction is not noticed.
19) Repeat the procedure like points 9 to 14.
20) Maintaining unchanged the wireline string, replace the Paraffin Scratcher with a
Paraffin Cutter having the same external diameter of the Scratcher fingers used
previously.
21) Run in hole the Paraffin Cutter through the length of tubing interested by the paraffin
scratcher action, applying up & down action on the wire by hand . Pay much care on
the wire tension behaviour: blocks of paraffin that fall from the tubing ID could, with
piston action, push the wireline string upward, breaking the Wire . In this circumstance
the Operator must act on the adjustable choke of the well head to avoid that the well
plugs because of paraffin blocks.
22) Go ahead with the action of Paraffin Cutting to a depth where loss of speed due to
paraffin restriction is not noticed.
23) Repeat the procedure like to the points 9 to 14
24) Repeat all operation sequence, running in hole alternately a Paraffin Scratcher and the
relative Paraffin Cutter, with diameters always greater, until the Paraffin Cutter with
diameter equal to the tubing drift, freely passes through the length of tubing previously
interested from the paraffinic deposit.
25) Pull out the Paraffin Cutter with tubing drift OD in surface to a compatible speed with
wire tension and type of fluid in well, having particular care to cross the completion
restrictions (Crossovers, SCSSV, Landing Nipples).
Operator.
31) Perform the rig down procedure.
In case that scratching operation must be performed on wells that do not flow
spontaneously, the wireline Scratching operation must be run alternatively to the solvent
injection operation.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
9.12. IMPRESSION TAKING

It is defined in this way the operation of Impression Taking at the top of a wireline tool in a
well, on drilling, workover rigs or production wells, either onshore or offshore with use of
equipment and Wireline Crew for LD (Light Duty) or HD (Heavy Duty) job.
The operation is usually performed during the well production, and precedes a lock mandrel
pulling operations or a fishing job. The tool used, Impression Block (figure 9.vv) is made out
of a steel housing with the bottom part in tender material, lead or leagues of lead, connected
in a sure way to the housing. The material of the Impression Block bottom sub, capable of
being deformed, is able to give an impression, in negative, of the wireline tool in the well.
The Impression Block diameter must be such to not allow lead part deformations during the
running-in, rubbing on the tubing wall, or crossing the completion equipment, but at same
time must be big enough to get a better reading of the impression.
The wireline Crew must have all the individual, fireproof and protective equipment, as per the
normative issued by Job Manager.
e) Impression Block fit to the completion type.
The operation must be performed with the well shut in.

The choice of the surface equipment, type of unit and the Wireline Crew members, will be
considered as per Specific Wireline Operation that will follow the calibration.
Copy of last operation report and possible previous accidents.
Depth of the tool on which the impression must be taken.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0

Well depth
Figure 9.VV - Impression Block
1
composed by:
Rope socket
Stem
Knuckle joint
3ft stroke Mechanical Jar.
Proper impression block size.
be no more than 6'.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
The presence in string of an Up-stroke jar o Hydraulic jar will be agreed with Wireline
Superintendent.
3) Connect the Impression Block to the wireline string and pull it in the Lubricator.
procedures.
than 5 m/min). Running ahead at maximum possible speed, depending on the type of
7) Reach the locating depth very slowly, without performing jar down action.
8) Open the mechanical jar and perform only one heavy jar down action.
9) Pull out the Impression Block in surface to a compatible speed with wire tension and
Operator.
15) Carry on with the operations.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
9.13. HYDRATE REMOVAL

In this way are defined the hydrates removal operations along the tubing string and/or at the
top of a lock mandrel, performed on drilling, workover and production wells, either onshore
or offshore, using equipment and Wireline Crews for HD (Heavy Duty) or LD (Light Duty)
Job, in relationship to completion type and operation time. The operations will foresee a
mechanical/chemical combination, of a Star Bit and methanol. For this purpose, it is
suggested to verify in advance the presence of fluid in the well.
following criteria:
b) WP same or higher than that one of Xmas tree
Choice of unit type must be taken in relationship to completion type and maximum operating
depth. The choice of size and metallurgy of the Wireline is taken according to the completion
foreseen without any to interruption in the activity. The use of Heavy Duty Crew or Light
Duty Crew depends on completion size, surface equipment working pressure, job time and
operation type. Wireline Superintendent is responsible on wire line crew organisation.
The Wireline Crew must have all the individual, fireproof and protective equipment, as
per the normative issued by Job Manager.
The Agip Supervisor is responsible for dispositions and the necessary documentation to
the carrying out of the operation, and particularly:
Operating program.
Design of the completion with depths and size of the completion equipment
Copy of the last operation report and possible previous accidents
a) Components of the wireline string enough for two strings.
c) Wire line fit to the fluids present in well and mechanical stress as well.
d) Fishing equipment fit to the type of completion (e.g.: Wireline Grabs, Wire
Cutters, Go Devil, Impression Blocks etc.), and to the type of wireline string used
(Pulling Tools, Fishing Socket etc.).
e) Star Bit fit to the tubing size.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
The Agip Supervisor is responsible for the ARPO-11 compilation containing the operations
Well depth
Type bottom sample
Indications of possible overpull
It is suggested to perform well head greasing before and after the use of the methanol.
Provide to pumping, or to trap injection of methanol (in absence of fluid), to facilitate the
mechanical action of star bit. Make sure that the pressures are equalised across the
hydrates plug, in other case provide to pressurising the tubing. It is suggested to equalise
pressure in the lubricator, before opening the swab valve.
the Agip Supervisor that will give immediate communication to the Chief Operator.
If methanol is not available and fluids are presents in well, it is suggested the use of glycol,
and eventually of a Drive Down Bailer.
1
2) The wireline string will be made up according to the well size, preferably 1 /2 and
composed by:
no knot rope socket
stem
knuckle joint
3 ft stroke mechanical jar
star bit of size, dimension and design suitable for the purpose
3) Make up the star bit to the wireline string and pull it in the lubricator.
4) Perform the methanol injection in quantity depending on tubing size and hydrates plug
depth
procedures.
than 5 m/min). Running ahead at maximum possible speed, depending on the type of
restrictions(Crossovers, SCSSV, Landing Nipples), slow down to 10 m/min.
7) Perform a weight indication pull at least 50 m before reaching the setting depth. If the
8) Reach the planned depth very slowly, without performing jar down action.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
1) Perform, pulling out, the exact measure of bottom hole, repeating the operation at least
two times.
2) Start the tubing pressures control with care.
3) Begin a strong jar down action, verifying the possible advancement, checking the wire
line string weight pulling out, bringing it above the initial depth. Check continuously the
behaviour of the STHP.
4) Go ahead till the complete hydrates removal or till the Star Bit action is over.
6) With the Wire Line String at 100 m, slow down to 10 m/min until zero m.
Operator.
Figure 9.WW - Star Bit
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
1) If the first run is not enough to complete the operation, change type and size of Star Bit
and repeat the procedure from steps 3 to 18.
2) For an evaluation of the action effectiveness, compare size and design of the star bit,
time at the bottom, penetration rate; in relationship of the results obtained, set the
system for the operations carrying on until the depth desired is reached.
3) If necessary verify the tubing inside diameter with a gauge cutter and/or reaching the
top of the Lock Mandrel with an Impression Block.
4) At the end of the operations, perform the rig down procedure.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
10. SPECIFIC FLOW CONTROL PROCEDURES
This section contains the procedures for preparation, installation and retrieval of the most
common flow controls used in Eni-Agips wireline activities.
Note: As the manufacturers make alterations to equipment designs and the

tools used for running and pulling flow control devices, it is essential that
the latest manufacturers data sheets are used otherwise serious
problems may arise.
10.1. OTIS W LOCK MANDREL

The Otis W slip lock is normally used in wells completed without modern day landing
nipples. It is set in the well by gripping the tubing wall and has a relatively low pressure
differential rating, i.e. maximum 1,500psi from below only.
It is used in conjunction with a variety of flow control devices attached to the bottom of the
lock mandrel but is mainly used with a plug as a plugging assembly or with a SSCSV as a
sub-surface controlled safety valve system.
Although there is a selection of devices which can be attached to a W lock with various
equalising subs, the running and pulling procedures are the same for both plugs and SSCSV
assemblies.
10.1.1. Equipment Required

The following equipment is required for running and pulling a W lock:
a) W lock mandrel
b) Equalising device
c) Specific flow control
d) W running tool
e) RB pulling tool
f) Equalising prong.
The following table 10.a shows the most common sizes of locks and the corresponding
running and pulling tools.
Part No: Tubing Slips Slips Min ID Fish Neck Running Pulling P/T
OD Expanded Retracted Tool Tool Thread
3
10WO18 2.375 2.062 1.859 0.687 1.375 41WO13 40RB17 1 /16 x 14
9
10WO22 2.875 2.530 2.296 0.875 1.750 41WO14 40RB18 1 /16 x 12
10WO23 3.500 3.080 2.834 1.375 2.318 41WO22 40RB19 2 x 12
1
10WO34 4.000 3.500 3.281 1.750 2.750 41WO30 40RB30 1 /4 x 12
All dimensions are in inches.
Table 10.A - Otis W Lock Mandrel Equipment
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
10.1.2. Redressing/Preparation
Refer to figure 10.a.
1) Disassemble both the lock and running tool, inspect and refurbish in accordance with
the manufacturers technical instructions.
2) Clean all components and lubricate the thread connections.
3) Re-assemble the lock mandrel and running tool.
4) Attach the appropriate equalising sub.
5) Attach the assembly to the flow control.
6) Check the running tool collet is free to move. Ensure the old shear pins are removed.
7) Install the collet into the locks internal fish neck.
8) Move the core down behind the collet and install two shear pins.
9) Rotate the shear pin cover to prevent the broken shear pins falling onto the lock
mandrel after setting.
10.1.3. Running Procedure

Refer to figure 10.a.
Note: The slips slide down the wall of the tubing as the lock is run in the hole.
1) When the anchoring depth is reached, pull back upwards to engage the slips to the
tubing wall and then jar upwards to fully make the taper bite the slips into the tubing.
2) Continue upward jarring to shear the pins between the mandrel body and the taper
allowing the body to move upwards expanding the packing element.
3) Continue jarring upwards shearing the pins in the running tool, releasing it from the
lock.
4) Pull out of the well.
Caution: Do not allow the toolstring to sit back down on the lock otherwise it may
accidentally release the lock.
10.1.4. Pulling Procedure

1) Attach the appropriate equalising prong to the pulling tool. The prong size depends
upon the type of flow control attached to the W lock being pulled.
2) Run in the hole until just above the lock then run in gently to engage the pulling tool
into the lock which will open the equalising valve.
3) Wait until the equalisation has been completed then jar downwards to move the taper
from behind the slips and the cone from behind the sealing element. During this the
pulling tool will engage the external pulling fishing neck.
4) Pull up gently to ensure the lock is free and then pull out of the hole.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Note: Never use a RS pulling tool as the reach will allow contact of the skirt on
the fishing neck further tightening the slips on the tubing.
Note: As the mandrel must be able to move downwards to release the taper
from behind the slips, never set a collar or any other device below a W
lock.
Figure 10.A - W Lock Mandrel

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
10.2. OTIS D COLLAR LOCK MANDREL

The D collar lock has been designed to lock into collar recesses in, either, API external
upset or non-upset tubing. It is not able to be set inside any tubing which does not have a
recess such as premium tubing.
The collar lock has the following features:
Can set in any collar recess.
Will hold 5,000psi from above or below.
Contains a pressure set and pressure balanced element.
The element expansion can be adjusted to seal in varying tubing weights.
(achieved by varying the number of spacers beneath the expander element).
It is Eni-Agips policy to pre-install a collar lock or tubing stop onr joint below the setting
depth for the D lock mandrel in order to prevent accidental dropping of the mandrel.
The pressure set and balanced design includes O rings on each side of the packing
element which are forced by pressure from above or below against split rings which in turn
energise the element. These rings must be inserted on the element side of the O ring. This
enables the O rings to act as one way seals allowing pressure to reach the centre of the
element but be contained by the downstream O ring. On release of pressure it is able to
release and, therefore balance the pressure through the same manner.
Similar to the W lock, many different flow controls can be attached to the bottom of the lock
which also require the use of an equalising valve. Using the manufacturers technical
literature, the appropriate running/pulling tools and prongs can be selected.
10.2.1. Equipment Required

The following equipment is required for running or pulling a D lock mandrel assembly:
a) Collar or tubing stop.
b) Collar or tubing stop running tool.
c) Collar or tubing stop pulling tool.
d) D lock mandrel
e) Equalising sub
f) Flow control
g) DO running tool
h) GRL pulling tool
i) Equalising prong.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
The following table 10.b gives the mot common sizes of locks and the corresponding running
and pulling tools.
Lock Dog Element Tubing OD Dogs Inside Bottom Running Pulling P/T Thread
Part No. Part No. OD Retracted Fish Neck Adapter Tool Tool
3
310DO37 310DO47 2.375 1.843 310DO83 310DO144 41DO10 40GR1 1 /16 x 14 pin
9
310DO30 310DO49 2.875 2.281 310DO75 310DO145 41DO11 40GR4 1 /16 x 12 pin
310DO58 310DO57 3.500 2.844 310DO129 310DO126 41DO09 40GR14 2 x 12 pin
1
310DO67 310DO68 4.500 3.800 310DO163 None 41DO15 40GR26 3 /16 x 12SLB
Box
Table 10.B - Otis D Lock Mandrel Equipment
10.2.2. Redressing/Preparation
Refer to figure 10.b.
1) Disassemble both the lock and running tool, inspect and refurbish in accordance with
the manufacturers technical instructions.
2) Clean all components and lubricate the thread connections.
3) Re-assemble the lock mandrel and running tool.
4) Attach the appropriate equalising sub.
5) Attach the assembly to the flow control.
6) Check the running tool collet is free to move. Ensure the old shear pins are removed.
7) Install the collet into the running recess below the locking sleeve in the lock.
8) Move the core down behind the collet and install the shear pin.
9) Rotate the shear pin cover to prevent the broken shear pin pieces falling onto the lock
mandrel after setting.

Refer to figure 10.b.
1) Pre-install a tubing or collar stop one joint depth below the planned setting depth of the
D lock mandrel (refer to the general wireline procedures in section 9.5).
2) Pull the collar or tubing stop running tool.
3) Pick up and make up the D lock mandrel assembly to the toolstring.
4) Run the assembly in the hole and stop approximately one joint above the desired
setting depth.
5) Pull the assembly back up slowly until a collar recess is located. Do not pull more than
75 to 100lbs at this stage.
6) Record the depth at this point and then again at the target collar. This ensures that
the target collar depth is never be exceeded.
7) Tap gently with the jars to move the lock back downwards to approximately three
meters below the desired setting depth then pull back up to locate the setting collar
and pull 200 to 300lbs to cause a friction bite in the lock.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
1) Close the jars slowly without jarring.

2) Jar upwards now to fully lock the collet into the recess and expand the element.
3) Before shearing off the running tool, jar down slightly to ensure the lock is properly set.
If not properly set, repeat the steps above.
4) Jar upward to shear the running tool shear pin and release from the lock. Do not tag
the lock again as there is still a risk of releasing the lock.

1) Select the appropriate equalising prong to suit the flow control attached to the lock and
attach it to the pulling tool.
2) Run in the hole to just above the lock and then gently lower into the lock causing the
equalising valve to open.
3) Wait until the pressure is equalised then jar downwards so the core extension on the
GLR knocks the locking sleeve downwards releasing the element and collet.
4) Pull out of the hole.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Figure 10.B - D Lock Mandrel

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
10.3. OTIS TYPE S & T LOCK MANDREL

The Otis type S and T lock mandrels are installed in respective S and T Landing Nipples
installed in the tubing string.
The system is limited to a maximum of seven landing nipples of the same diameter seal bore
within one tubing string. The difference in each being the location profile of the individual
nipple.
Any combination of position numbers may be used provided they are installed in numerical
sequence, with the lowest position number being placed deepest in the well (Refer to figure
10.c).
The S & T lock mandrels consists of two basic sub-assemblies, the lock assembly and the
locator assembly.
The lock assembly consists of the locking dogs which are mounted around the tapered
mandrel and which are suspended from the dog carrier. The dogs and dog carrier are
retained on the mandrel by the carrier mandrel.
The lower end of the mandrel provides a place for the packing assembly to be installed, and
internal thread which is used to attach the locator assembly to the lock assembly.
The locator assembly consists of two locator keys mounted around a locator mandrel. Each
key is outwardly spring loaded from the mandrel by an individual spring mounted between
the key and the mandrel. The upper and lower key retainers keep the keys linked together
as a unit on the mandrel, the lower ring is used to retain the unit on the mandrel.
The S & T lock mandrels are run on either a type T or type SP running tool. If the
device being run requires a running prong to provide fluid bypass then the type T running
tool must be used as the type SP running tool does not have a threaded receptacle for the
running prong.
Note: If running a PS plug (an integral S lock mandrel with a prong type
equalising device), the SP running tool must be used.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Figure 10.C - Mandrel Positions
10.3.1. Disassembly Procedure

1) Move the dog carrier to its uppermost position and grasp the lock mandrel horizontally
in the round jaws of the vice. Be careful to avoid vice damage to the packing or the
dogs.
2) Unscrew and remove the ring this allows the lower key retainer to slide off the lower
end of the mandrel and allows the keys and key springs to fall of the mandrel.
3) Place a wrench on the key mandrel and remove it from the lock mandrel. The upper
key retainer will slide off the upper end of the key mandrel.
4) The packing assembly can now be removed from the locking mandrel.
Note: Disassembly of the locking section should not be done at field locations.
The thread joint between the carrier mandrel and lock mandrel is made up
tight with Loctite compound.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
10.3.2. Assembly/Preparation
1) Thoroughly clean and inspect all parts for wear or damage.
2) Move the dog carrier to its uppermost position and grip the lock mandrel horizontally in
the round jaws of the vice. Be careful to avoid vice damage to the packing or the dogs.
3) Install the packing stack.
4) Pick up the locator mandrel and slide the upper key retainer slotted end first, onto the
upper end of the locator mandrel. Note that the upper key retainer is shorter that the
lower key retainer. The upper key retainer will not fit onto the lower end of the locator
mandrel.
5) With the upper key retainer on the locator mandrel, screw the locator mandrel onto the
lock mandrel and tighten.
6) Note that both the upper and lower key retainers each have two deep slots and two
shallow slots facing the keys. each key has one wide lug and two narrow lugs.
7) When assembling the locator assembly, the single wide lug must always be installed in
the deepest slot in each key retainer.
8) Position a key spring in each key, be sure that the both free ends of each spring are in
the holes provided in the key. With the springs in place in the keys place the keys onto
the locator mandrel and slide the upper ends of the keys into the slots of the upper key
o
retainer. Make sure that the 90 locating shoulder on each key is facing the lower end
of the mandrel assembly.
9) While holding the keys in the collapsed position against the springs, slide the lower key
retainer over the lower end of the locator mandrel and onto the lower end of the keys.
10) Screw the retainer ring onto the locator mandrel and tighten lightly, do not over-tighten.

Refer to figure 10.d.
1) Make up the appropriate equalising assembly and flow control device onto the lock
mandrel.
2) Attach the type T or SP running tool to the lock mandrel.
3) Lower the lock mandrel into the well until it reaches the nipple with the locator recess
that matches the profile of the keys.
4) At this point, the spring loaded keys will move outwardly and select the recesses in the
lower portion of the nipple, causing the assembly to stop.
5) Jar downward to shear the top pin in the running tool. After the top pin is sheared, the
sleeve on the running tool moves down and allows the collet to open and release from
the fishing neck on the lock mandrel.
6) The dog carrier and dogs on the lock mandrel drop down to a position adjacent to the
locking grove in the nipple.
7) Pull a 250lb overpull above toolstring weight. If the lock mandrel remains in place, the
upward pull moves the tapered portion of the lock mandrel will push the locking dogs
out into the locking grove in the nipple to lock the assembly in place.
8) Jar upwards to shear the lower pins in the running tool to release it from the running
neck of the lock mandrel.
9) Pull out of hole.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0

Refer to figure 10.d.
1) Prior to pulling the flow control device, ensure the correct equalising assembly is made
up for the flow control device.
2) Attach the type RS pulling tool to the regular wireline tool string and lower it into the
well until the mandrel assembly is contacted opening the equalising path.
3) Allow time for equalisation.
4) Jar down lightly to unlock the assembly and to engage the pulling tool onto the fishing
neck.
5) Jar upwardly to remove the lock assembly from the landing nipple.
Note: The fishing neck cannot be engaged by the pulling tool until the mandrel
assembly is forced down to the unlocked position.
Figure 10.D - S and T Lock Mandrel

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
10.4. OTIS TYPE X & XN LOCK MANDRELS

The X lock mandrel is a selective type lock mandrel designed to locate and lock in a
compatible Otis X nipple. This lock mandrel can be run in selective or non-selective modes,
determined prior to running by the position of the running tool. This lock mandrel is run with
the type X running tool and normally pulled with the type GR pulling tool.
When combined with an equalising assembly and valve cap, this lock mandrel can be used
as a tubing plug capable of holding a pressure differential from either direction. The X lock
mandrel can also be used as a locking medium for various flow control devices such as
chokes, check valves, pack-offs, instrument hangers etc. When the X lock is used with a
wireline retrievable sub-surface safety valve, the lock mandrel can be modified to allow a
small shear pin to be installed between the expander mandrel and the main body of the lock.
This shear pin is held in place with a leaf spring and an Allen cap screw. This modification
prevents flow vibrations from vibrating the expander mandrel upwards and thus unlocking
the mandrel.
By simply changing the keys in the X lock mandrel, it can be converted into a type XN (No-
Go) lock mandrel (Refer to section 10.4.5). The Eni-Apip policy for pulling XN lock mandrels
is to use the type GS pulling tool.
10.4.1. X and XN Disassembly Procedure

1) Place the upper portion of the key retainer sleeve in a vice.
2) Remove the packing mandrel and place a pipe wrench on the shear pin section of the
packing mandrel and remove it.
3) Place the fishing neck and expander sleeve in an unlocked position by pulling them
away from the key retainer sleeve.
4) Remove the locking keys by slipping them from the ends of the springs and working
them through the bore of the key retainer sleeve.
5) Place the fishing neck in a vice and remove the expander sleeve.
6) Push the expander sleeve out of the lower end of the key retainer sleeve and the
springs will fall out.
7) Clean and inspect all parts.
10.4.2. X and XN Assembly Procedure

1) Place the expander sleeve inside the key retainer sleeve, lining up the spring slots.
1
Leave approximately /2 of spring slots on the expander exposed. Insert springs in the
slots with hook ends out and towards the top of the expander sleeve. Engage the
hooks on the springs in the holes provided in the key retainer sleeve.
2) After all springs are in place, push the expander sleeve into the key retainer sleeve
and move it to its uppermost position.
3) Screw the fishing neck onto the expander sleeve. Place the fishing neck in a vice and
tighten the connection.
4) Slide each key through the bore in the key retainer sleeve and onto a spring. Make
certain the spring is properly installed in the locking key. The springs should pass
through a slot inside the keys, with the lower end over a shoulder near the slot bottom.
5) Replace the packing mandrel by screwing it into the bottom of the key retainer sleeve.
6) Install the packing mandrel.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
10.4.3. X Running Procedure

If there is one or more type X nipples in the string and the flow control device is to be
installed in the lowermost X nipple, the running tool must be placed in the selective position.
1) Make up the type X lock mandrel, X equalising valve, desired flow controls and X
running tool on a standard wireline tool string.
2) Lower the tool string into the tubing until the required X nipple is located.
3) Let the tool string pass through the X nipple and stop. Raise the tools slowly until the
weight indicator shows that the tool string has stopped.
4) This indicates that the locating dogs on the running tool are in position against the
lower end of the nipple. An upward pull is required to trip the locating dogs, placing the
running tool in a control position.
0
5) Lower the tool string until the 90 profile on the keys locate the profile of the X nipple.
6) With the tool string resting on the nipple profile, downward jar action will shear the
upper pin in the running tool and allow the expander sleeve to be driven behind the
keys, locking the mandrel in the nipple.
7) Test the lock mandrel by applying an upward strain on the wireline. If the mandrel is
properly locked in the nipple, upward jarring will shear the lower pin in the running tool
and allow the tool string to be returned to the surface.
8) If the mandrel is not properly locked in the nipple, it will jar loose before the lower pin is
sheared. If this happens, lower the mandrel back into the nipple and repeat steps 6
and 7.
10.4.4. X Pulling Procedure

The type GR pulling tool is used to pull the X lock mandrel.
Note: The proper equalising prong must be used with the pulling tool and
adequate time for equalisation allowed before jarring upwards on the lock
mandrel.
1) Make up the proper size prong into the bottom of the GR pulling tool and attach the
pulling tool to a standard wireline tool string.
2) Lower the tool string into the bore of the tubing until the lock mandrel is located and
latched.
3) As the pulling tool enters the lock mandrel the prong will shift the equalising valve open
(slight downward jar action may be necessary to shift the valve).
4) The weight of the tool string should be allowed to rest on the lock mandrel while
pressure across the control device is being equalised.
5) After equalisation has been confirmed, an upward strain on the wireline will indicate
whether or not the pulling tool is latched into the fishing neck of the lock mandrel.
6) Jar downward at least one firm stroke on the lock mandrel to loosen the lock mandrel
in the nipple.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
1) Place an upward strain on the wireline. In some cases this is all that is required to
move the expander sleeve up, allow the keys to retract and release the lock assembly.
2) In most cases upward jar action may be necessary to cause the unlocking and release.
3) Retrieve tool string, pulling tool and released lock assembly with equalising valve and
flow control devices to surface.
Figure 10.E - Otis XN and X Lock Mandrel

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
10.4.5. XN Lock Mandrel

The XN lock mandrel is a non-selective lock mandrel designed to land and lock sub-surface
flow control devices in a type XN nipple profile. It is a bottom No-Go type lock with No-Go
shoulder machined into the equalising valve, below the packing section. The locking
shoulders on the keys are chamfered to prevent them locating in the type X landing nipple.
This lock mandrel is run with the type X running tool and pulled with the type GS pulling
tool.
The type XN lock mandrel can be used in the same manner as the type X lock mandrel,
the only difference being the key profile.
Generally a XN plug assembly has a higher pressure rating from above than a X plug the
same size because it incorporates a No-Go shoulder. Since the No-Go shoulder provides
positive location, this lock is easy to locate and lock into its nipple. By changing the keys the
XN lock mandrel can be converted into a type X lock mandrel.
10.4.6. XN Disassembly Procedure

1) Place the assembly in the vice, gripping on the fishing neck and loosen the packing
mandrel.
2) Insert a steel rod through the shear pin holes in the packing mandrel.
3) Using the rod as handles, pull the packing mandrel away from the vice. This will move
the key retainer sleeve away from the fishing neck and expose the expander sleeve.
4) Place a pipe wrench on the expander sleeve and remove it from the fishing neck.
5) Place the key retainer sleeve in the vice.
6) Remove the packing mandrel from the key retainer sleeve.
7) With the expander sleeve in the up or unlocked position, the keys may be removed
from the slots.
8) Pull the expander sleeve out of the bottom of the key retainer sleeve. This will allow the
springs to fall free.
9) Clean and inspect all parts thoroughly, looking closely at springs and packing.
10.4.7. XN Assembly Procedure

1) Place the key retainer sleeve in a vice, taking care not to damage the slots.
2) Insert the springs into their proper holes and slots, align the grooves in the expander
sleeve with the springs and insert as far as possible into the retainer sleeve.
3) Put the keys in their proper slots making sure to engage the springs and push the
expander sleeve back far enough to hold them in place.
4) Make up the fishing neck on the expander sleeve.
5) Insert the packing mandrel into the expander sleeve and make it up on the retainer
sleeve.
6) Install the packing, adapters and back-up rings in proper order.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
10.4.8. XN Running Procedure

If there is one or more X nipples above the XN nipple, the running tool may be placed in
the non-selective position for the deepest X nipple.
1) Make up the type XN lock mandrel, X equalising valve, desired flow controls and X
2) Lower the tool string into the tubing until the deepest X nipple is located.
3) Let the tool string pass through the X nipple and stop. Raise the tools slowly until the
5) Lower the tool string back through the X nipple (the keys on the lock mandrel are
chamfered which allows them to pass through the X nipple in the non-selective control
position). Continue lowering the tool string until the No-Go shoulder on the equalising
valve contacts the No-Go shoulder in the XN landing nipple.
6) With the tool string resting on the No-Go shoulder, downward jar action will shear the
sheared. If this should happen, lower the mandrel back into the nipple and repeat
Steps 6 and 7.
If there is no compatible X nipple in the tubing string, the running tool must be placed in the
non-selective position by hand prior to running.
1) Make up XN lock mandrel with X equalising valve, desired flow control and X
running tool to a standard wireline toolstring.
2) Place the X running tool and lock mandrel in the non-selective position by hand. To
do this, pull the outer sleeve of the running tool downward until the upper dogs fall into
the recess on the inner mandrel, and the keys of the lock mandrel will move from a
retracted to an expanded position.
3) The lock mandrel may be run directly to the landing nipple and set, in the same
manner as described in steps 6 and 7 of the above procedure.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
10.4.9. XN Pulling Procedure

The type GS pulling tool is used to pull the XN lock mandrel.
adequate time for equalisation allowed before jarring upward on the lock
mandrel.
1) Make up the proper size prong into the bottom of the GS pulling tool and attach the
latched.
(slight downward jar action may be necessary to shift the valve.)
in the nipple
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
10.5. OTIS TYPE R & RN LOCK MANDRELS

The Otis R and RN are the equivalent of the X and XN system but used with R and RN
nipples in heavy weight tubing sizes and, therefore, have higher pressure ratings.
The R lock mandrel is a selective type lock mandrel designed to locate and lock in a
compatible Otis R nipple. This lock mandrel can be run in the selective or non-selective
mode, determined prior to running by the position of the running tool. This lock mandrel is
run with the type R, RX or RXN running tool and pulled with the type GR pulling tool.
When combined with an equalising assembly and valve cap this lock mandrel can be used
as a tubing plug capable of holding a pressure differential from either direction. The R lock
mandrel can also be used as a locking medium for various flow control devices such as
chokes, check valves, pack-offs, instrument hangers etc. When the R lock is used with a
wireline retrievable sub-surface safety valve, the lock mandrel can be modified to allow a
small shear pin to be installed between the expander mandrel and the main body of the lock.
This shear pin is held in place with a leaf spring and an Allen cap screw. This modification
prevents flow vibrations from vibrating the expander mandrel upwards and thus unlocking
the mandrel.
Simply by changing the keys the R lock mandrel can be converted into a type RN lock
mandrel. The RN lock mandrel is pulled by the type GS pulling tool.
10.5.1. R Disassembly Procedure

1) Place the upper portion of the key retainer sleeve in vice.
2) Remove the packing mandrel and place a pipe wrench on the shear pin section of the
packing mandrel and remove it.
3) Place the fishing neck and expander sleeve in an unlocked position by pulling them
away from the key retainer sleeve.
4) Remove the locking keys by slipping them from the ends of the springs and working
them through the bore of the key retainer sleeve.
5) Place fishing neck in a vice and remove the expander sleeve.
6) Push the expander sleeve out of the lower end of the key retainer sleeve and the
springs will fall out.
7) Clean and inspect all parts.
10.5.2. R Assembly Procedure

1) Place the expander sleeve inside the key retainer sleeve, lining up the spring slots.
1
Leave approximately /2 of spring slots on the expander exposed. Insert springs in the
slots with hook ends out and towards the top of the expander sleeve. Engage the
hooks on the springs in the holes provided in the key retainer sleeve.
2) After all springs are in place, push the expander sleeve into the key retainer sleeve
and move it to its uppermost position.
3) Screw the fishing neck onto the expander sleeve. Place the fishing neck in a vice and
tighten the connection.
4) Slide each key through the bore in the key retainer sleeve and onto a spring. Make
certain the spring is properly installed in the locking key. The springs should pass
through a slot inside the keys, with the lower end over a shoulder near the slot bottom.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
1) Replace packing mandrel by screwing it into the bottom of the key retainer sleeve.
2) Install packing mandrel.
10.5.3. R Running Procedure

If there is more than one R nipple in the string and the flow control device is to be installed
in the lowermost R nipple, the running tool may must be placed in the selective position.
1) Make up the type R lock mandrel, equalising valve, desired flow controls and R
2) Lower the tool string into the tubing until the required R nipple is located.
3) Let the tool string pass through the R nipple and stop. Raise the tools slowly until the
0
5) Lower the tool string until the 90 profiles on the keys locate the profile of the R nipple.
6) With the tool string resting on the nipple profile, downward jar action will shear the
steps 6 and 7.
10.5.4. R Pulling Procedure

The type GR pulling tool is used to pull the R lock mandrel.
mandrel.
1) Make up the proper size prong into the bottom of the GR pulling tool and attach the
latched.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
in the nipple
Figure 10.F- Otis R and RN Lock Mandrel

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
10.5.5. RN Lock Mandrel

The RN lock mandrel is a non-selective lock mandrel designed to land and lock sub-surface
flow control devices in a type RN nipple profile. It is a bottom No-Go type lock with No-Go
shoulder machined into the equalising valve, below the packing section. The locking
shoulders on the keys are chamfered to prevent them locating in the type R landing nipple.
This lock mandrel is run with the type R RX or RXN running tool and pulled with the type
GS pulling tool.
The type RN lock mandrel can be used in the same manner as the type R lock mandrel,
the only difference being the key profile.
In general an RN plug assembly has a higher pressure rating from above than an R plug
the same size because it incorporates a No-Go shoulder. Since the No-Go shoulder provides
positive location, this lock is easy to locate and lock into its nipple. By changing the keys the
RN lock mandrel can be converted into a type R lock mandrel.
10.5.6. RN Disassembly Procedure

1) Place the assembly in the vice, gripping on the fishing neck and slacken the packing
mandrel.
2) Insert a steel rod through the shear pin holes in the packing mandrel.
3) Using the rod as handles, pull the packing mandrel away from the vice. This will move
the key retainer sleeve away from the fishing neck and expose the expander sleeve.
4) Place a pipe wrench on the expander sleeve and remove it from the fishing neck.
5) Place the key retainer sleeve in the vice.
6) Remove the packing mandrel from the key retainer sleeve.
7) With the expander sleeve in the up or unlocked position, the keys may be removed
from the slots.
8) Pull the expander sleeve out of the bottom of the key retainer sleeve. This will allow the
springs to fall free.
9) Clean and inspect all parts thoroughly, looking closely at springs and packing.
10.5.7. RN Assembly Procedure

1) Place the key retainer sleeve in a vice, taking care not to damage the slots.
2) Insert the springs into their proper holes and slots, align the grooves in the expander
sleeve with the springs and insert as far as possible into the retainer sleeve.
3) Put the keys in their proper slots making sure to engage the springs and push the
expander sleeve back far enough to hold them in place.
4) Make up the fishing neck on the expander sleeve.
5) Insert the packing mandrel into the expander sleeve and make it up on the retainer
sleeve.
6) Install the packing, adapters and back-up rings in proper order.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
10.5.8. RN Running Procedure

If there is one or more type R nipples above the RN nipple, the running tool may be placed
in the non-selective position in the deepest R nipple.
1) Make up the type RN lock mandrel, equalising valve, desired flow controls and R
2) Lower the tool string into the tubing until the deepest R nipple is located.
3) Let the tool string pass through the R nipple and stop. Raise the tools slowly until the
5) Lower the tool string back through the R nipple (the keys on the lock mandrel are
chamfered which allows them to pass through the R nipple in the non-selective control
position). Continue lowering the tool string until the No-Go shoulder on the equalising
valve contacts the No-Go shoulder in the RN landing nipple.
6) With the tool string resting on the No-Go shoulder, downward jar action will shear the
steps 6 and 7.
If there is no compatible R nipple in the tubing string, the running tool must be placed in the
non-selective position by hand prior to running.
1) Make up RN lock mandrel with equalising valve, desired flow control and R running
tool to a standard wireline toolstring.
2) Place the R running tool and lock mandrel in the non-selective position by hand. To
do this, pull the outer sleeve of the running tool downward until the upper dogs fall into
the recess on the inner mandrel, and the keys of the lock mandrel will move from a
retracted to an expanded position.
3) The lock mandrel may be run directly to the landing nipple and set, in the same
manner as described in steps 6 and 7 of the above procedure.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
10.5.9. RN Pulling Procedure

The type GS pulling tool is used to pull the RN lock mandrel.
mandrel.
1) Make up the proper size prong into the bottom of the GS pulling tool and attach the
latched.
in the nipple
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
10.6. OTIS X AND R PLUG CHOKES

The Otis X and R plug chokes consists of two main components, an equalising assembly
and a valve cap (Refer to figure 10.g). The X and the R plug chokes are similar in design
and differ only in pressure rating. The X plug choke is used with the X or XN lock
mandrels, the R plug choke is used with the R or RN lock mandrel.
The X and R equalising assemblies provide a means of equalising pressure differential
across wireline set plug assemblies. The X and R allow the plug assemblies to be run and
set in one operation and equalised and pulled in one operation. The valve cap is simply a
blanking plug, attached to the equalising sub, to prevent flow through the plug choke until
the equalising melon has been moved off seat. It is sometimes replaced by an extended
version to act as a sump for scale etc. or to catch gas lift valves.
The equalising-sub consists of a multi-ported outer housing and an inner melon
incorporating two Orings. When the melon is in the running/setting position, the two O-
Rings are below the equalising ports allowing fluid by-pass through the plug choke
assembly. Once the plug choke assembly is locked and set the action of shearing and
pulling the running tool out of the choke assembly moves the melon upwards. This places
the O-rings across the equalising ports packing them off.
Caution: It is important not to attempt to pull the choke assembly until equalisation
has been achieved or the toolstring will be blown up the hole. The
equalising subs must be checked and redressed every time they are used
as the Orings on the melon can be exposed to flow cutting.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Figure 10.G- Otis X and R Plug Chokes

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
10.6.1. PX and PR Plug Chokes

The Otis PX and PR plug chokes consist of three main components: a prong, equalising
sub and valve cap (Refer to figure 10.h). The PX and the PR plug chokes are similar in
design and differ only in pressure rating. The PX plug choke is used with the X or XN lock
mandrels, the PR plug choke is used with the R or RN lock mandrel.
The PX and PR equalising assemblies provide a means of equalising pressure differential
across wireline set plug assemblies. The PX and PR plug assemblies require two wireline
runs to set and two wireline runs to pull. The first run would be to set the plug body and the
second to set the prong in the plug body. Retrieval of the plug is the reverse of the previous.
The valve cap is simply a blanking plug, attached to the equalising sub, to prevent flow
through the plug choke until the equalising prong has been moved off seat.
The equalising-sub consists of a multi-ported outer housing. These ports are packed off with
a prong which has two sets of V packing, one sitting above the ports and one sitting below.
The P or PR type plug choke used where there is a likelihood of sand or scale being
present in the tubing string. This plug choke incorporates a long equalising prong which
extends out above the top of the lock mandrel and has an external fishing neck. Depending
on the length of the equalising prong, a fair amount of sand or scale can fall on the top of the
plug choke assembly without covering the prong fishing neck. The prong is run on a shear
down type running tool i.e. SB or JDC and is pulled on a shear up or down pulling tool, i.e.
RB, JUC, SB or JDC.
The seals on the prong assembly should be inspected and replaced if necessary after each
run. The choke body may be disassembled by removing the valve housing and cap; this will
allow the packing section of the lock mandrel to be replaced as required. Inspect lock
mandrel springs and packing after each run.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Figure 10.H - Otis PX and PR Plug Chokes

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
10.7. BAKER W & Z LOCK MANDRELS

The Baker models W2 and Z2 locks (Refer to figure 10.i) are generally used in FWG and
RZG bypass blanking plugs with removable mandrels but can be used with other devices
such as bottom-hole pressure gauges, etc., (Refer to section 10.7.3).
The FWG and RZG are positive blank-off devices designed to seal of pressure from above
and below. The FWG blanking plug is for top No-Go landing in Model F non-ported seating
nipples. The model RZG blanking plug is for bottom No-Go landing in Model R non-ported
seating nipples. The plugs are compatible with normal wireline equipment and procedures.
While running in the hole, the removable mandrel is in the down position (bypass port open)
to allow fluid bypass during setting procedure.
When the plug is set in the nipple, locked in the locking grove, and the lower shear pins are
sheared, the mandrel is pulled up via the upper shear pin in the running tool, closing the port
and sealing off pressures from above and below. Upward motion positions the grove in the
mandrel under the lock ring segments and prevents the mandrel from being moved down.
The W2 and Z2 locks are run on the baker C-1 Running tool, and retrieved with, either,
the JDC/SB pulling tools in combination with the B probe.
Note When running the W and Z lock mandrels particular attention must be
paid to the well conditions (sand, scale, etc.) as any debris collecting
behind the keys will result in the keys failing to retract completely and
removal from the well impossible.
10.7.1. Running Procedures

1) Make up the appropriate plug to a standard wireline toolstring.
2) Run in the well until the required landing nipple is reached.
3) Locate the nipple by setting down weight to ensure locking on.
4) Pick up until the upstrain indicates that the upward facing locks are engaged.
5) Jar-up shearing the lower shear pin in the running tool, closing the bypass port,
shearing the upper shear pin in the running tool and leaning the plug in place.
10.7.2. Pulling Procedures

1) Make up the proper size pulling tool to a standard wireline tool string.
2) Lower the tool string into the bore of the tubing until the pulling tool latches the
equalising mandrel.
3) Jar up to shear the lower pins in the removable mandrel, and pull the removable
mandrel.
4) When the removable mandrel is removed from the plug the equalising ports are open
thus allowing pressures to equalise above and below plug body prior to retrieving.
5) Pull removable mandrel from well.
6) After equalisation has been confirmed, make up the B probe onto standard pulling
tool (JDC/SB).
7) Lower the tool string into the bore of the tubing until the pulling tool locates the plug
body.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
1) As the B probe enters the lock it collapses the dogs allowing the plug to be pulled free
from the nipple.
2) In most cases upward jar action may be necessary to pull the packing from the seal
bore.
3) Retrieve tool string, pulling tool and released lock assembly to surface.
Figure 10.I - W2 and Z2 Lock Mandrels

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
10.7.3. Baker Bomb Hanger

The RZB and FWB Instrument hangers are manufactured Baker and are designed for
hanging bottomhole pressure and temperature instruments in the Baker R and F landing
nipples respectively.
The RZB and FWB Instrument Hangers are set by standard wireline methods. No jar
action is required to set or release the Hangers from the landing nipples.
The RZB and FWB Instrument hangers are designed to be run with the Baker Soft
Release Running Tool. The instrument hangers must be run with the dogs trailing.
10.7.4. Bomb Hanger Running Procedure

1) Prepare the Baker soft release running tool and the RZB or FWB instrument hanger
by latching the running tool onto the fishing neck of the lock mandrel.
2) Make up the running tool and bomb hanger complete with pressure temperature
gauges onto a standard wireline toolstring.
3) Run in the well with the assembly until the desired landing nipple is reached.
4) Lower the instrument hanger assembly into the landing nipple. The spring loaded keys
will locate the profile of the landing nipple.
5) Apply an upward strain on the wire to release the soft set running tool. Retrieve the
toolstring and running tool to surface.
10.7.5. Bomb Hanger Pulling Procedure

1) Prepare a shear down pulling tool (JDC/SB) suitable for the fish neck on the bomb
hanger, make up a B probe onto pulling tool.
2) Run in the well with pulling assembly until the required depth is reached.
3) Lower the pulling tool slowly and latch the fishing neck of the instrument hanger, during
this process the B probe will retract the keys.
4) Apply an upward strain on the wire to confirm that the pulling tool has latched the
instrument hanger.
5) Increase the strain on the wire to pull the instrument hanger from the nipple and pull to
surface.
Tool Type Nominal Size Length (Ins) No-Go OD (Ins) Fishing Neck
ODD
(Ins)
1
FWB 2 /2 14.21 2.365 1.375
FWB 3 14.62 2.802 1.750
FWB 4 16.90 3.864 2.312
1
RZB 2 /2 12.51 2.302 1.375
RZB 3 12.40 2.740 1.750
RZB 4 14.78 3.802 2.312
Table 10.C - Baker FWB, ZB Instrument Hanger Data
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
10.8. CAMCO LOCK MANDRELS

10.8.1. DB-6 Lock Mandrel
The DB-6 lock mandrel is a non-selective type lock designed to locate and lock in the type
DB-6 series landing nipple and Camco DB-6 hydraulic safety valve landing nipple (Refer to
figure 10.j). The DB-6 is a No-Go type lock with the No-Go shoulder located between the
locking dogs and the packing section.
The DB-6 lock mandrel is run on the Z-6 running tool with the expander tube located in the
upper position and the dogs free to retract. On location of the No-Go shoulder, the running
tool core is released from the lock by downward jarring to break some shear pins and drives
the expander tube down behind the locking dogs into the nipple recess. The expander is
held down by a collet type latch and shear pins which locate a groove in the upper end of the
expander. The shear pins locate the groove and are held in by a retainer spring. At the same
time a tattle tale spring locates the upper groove in the lower core of the running tool.
Upward jarring then breaks the releasing shear pins allowing the running tool to be retrieved.
On retrieval at surface location of the tattle-tale spring in the lower groove would indicate
that full travel of the expander had not been achieved and that the lock should be pulled and
re-run.
The DB-6 lock is pulled with the PRS series pulling tool. After locating the mandrel and
pressure equalisation, upward jarring through the pulling tool's dogs, shears the releasing
pins in the lock and drives the expander up from behind the dogs, releasing the lock from the
nipple. Further pulling, pulls the lock from the nipple.
The DB-6 lock mandrel can be used to locate and lock various flow control devices in the
tubing string e.g. surface controlled sub surface safety valves direct controlled safety valves,
plugs, chokes, check valves, and instrument hangers.
The DB-6 is a No-Go type lock, making nipple location and lock setting simple. When this
lock is pinned to the Z-6 running tool its locking dogs are fully retracted reducing the chance
of the assembly hanging up while running in the hole.
10.8.2. Z-6 Running Tool

The Camco 'Z-6' running tool is a wireline tool used to install the 'DB-6' lock mandrel into the
'DB-6', 'B-6' or 'BA-6' landing nipples. The 'Z-6' running tool comprises a fishing neck,
plunger, garter spring and a lock pin retainer. Two sets of shear pins attach the running tool
to the lock. The lower set of shear pins holds the plunger in the running position. The upper
set of shear pins, when sheared, releases the running tool from the lock. The running tool is
threaded internally to receive a running prong for special operations. The 'Z-6' running tool
has a 'tell tale' device which gives positive indication that the lock has been set. The running
tool shear pin hole design allows it to be pinned to suit the operation to be performed e.g.
two shear pins to set a shallow plug, four pins to set a deep plug. The 'Z-6' running tool is
non-selective.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Figure 10.J - Camco Type DB-6 Lock Mandrel

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
10.8.3. DB-6 Running Procedure

1) Install the 'Z-6' running tool in a large vice. Clamp the vice on the fishing neck of the
running tool.
2) Remove the ring retainer from the position indicator housing of the 'DB' lock.
3) Place the ring retainer over the lower end of the running tool and move it up over the
shear pin holes in the plunger of the running tool.
4) Align the lower two shear pin holes of the ring retainer with the two pin holes of the
running tool plunger.
5) Insert two steel shear pins through the aligned holes of both the ring retainer.
6) Move the plunger ring of the running tool down to meet the lock retainer ring.
7) Align the upper shear pin holes of the plunger ring with the upper shear pin holes of
the retainer ring. Install two brass shear pins and tap them down firmly.
Note: When the 'DB' Lock is attached to a subsurface control device which
entails a flapper, use the designated running prong in conjunction with
Install the small garter spring on the end of the running tool plunger.
There is a shallow groove for this purpose provided between the two
deeper grooves at the end of the plunger.
8) Remove the running tool from the vice.

9) Make up and tighten the running tool and ring retainer onto the position indicator
housing the 'DB' Lock.
Note: Exercise care so that the garter spring is not rolled back during this step.
10) Attach the running tool to the wireline tool-string.

11) Run the wireline tool-string into the well. When the lock reaches the 'DB' landing
nipple, the no-go shoulder of the valve/lock assembly will locate the no-go ring of the
landing nipple.
12) Jar downward on the running tool to shear the pins holding the running tool plunger in
the running position. Continue jarring downward until a solid blow is encountered
indicating that the lock has seated in the landing nipple.
13) Jar upward to break the shear pins attaching the plunger ring to the lock retainer ring.
14) Retrieve the running tool from the well. Examine the garter spring for proper
positioning to indicate positive setting of the lock.
Note: The garter spring serves as a 'tell tale' to verify proper setting of the lock.
When the running tool is returned to the surface, after running the lock,
the garter spring will have shifted position. If the garter spring is in the
deeper groove below the shallow groove, the lock will not have been set
properly in the looking recess.
15) When the garter spring is located in the deeper groove above the shallow groove,
proper setting of the lock is assured.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
1) The 'tell tale' garter spring indicates the length of travel of the collet within the lock
housing. The collet must move down fully in order for the fingers to engage in the lock
housing collet recess and assure positive locking.
2) Prior to resuming normal well operation, conduct tests to confirm that the lock is
securely seated in the landing nipple.
10.8.4. 'PRS' Pulling Procedure

1) Ensure that the 'PRS' series pulling tool is fully assembled and in proper working order.
Make up the pulling tool onto the wireline tool-string.
2) Run the tool-string into the well until the collet fingers of the pulling tool lock into the
locking recess of the internal fishing neck of the retrievable subsurface device.
3) Jar upward on the wireline.
Note: If the sub-surface device does not dislodge from the well, the 'PRS'
pulling tool can be disengaged from the device and recovered to the
surface with downward jarring. The 'PRS-2' through 'PRS-6' pulling tool
can be released from the device with upward or downward jarring,
depending on the position of the compression core spring in the spring
housing.
4) Retrieve the wireline tool-string with the subsurface device and close the master valve.
5) Bleed the lubricator pressure off and remove the tools from the well.
Release from Subsurface Devices

1) Place a pin punch or rod of the appropriate size in the hole of the collet.
2) Retract the collet against the collet spring.
3) Rotate the punch or rod in the circumferential slot in the collet housing.
4) Separate the pulling tool from the device.
Aborting the Pulling Operation

1 1
The 4 /2", 5 /2" or 6" 'PRS' Pulling Tool can be released from the subsurface device without
pulling the device by downward jarring. Downward jarring brings the collet housing of the
pulling tool in contact with the top of the subsurface device, causing the shear pin holding
the spring housing and the inner mandrel together to shear. Continued downward jarring
moves the inner mandrel downward, engaging the buttress threads on the inner mandrel
with the buttress threads in the ratchet sleeve. The ratchet sleeve holds the inner mandrel in
a downward position. As the inner mandrel travels downward, the collet core moves out from
under the collet fingers. The collet fingers move inward into the reduced diameter of the
collet core, at which time the pulling tool can be separated from the device. Redress the
pulling tool each time a pulling operation is aborted.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
10.9. BAKER TYPE B AND B1 LOCK MANDREL

The B lock Mandrel is a top No-Go type lock mandrel designed specifically to land and lock
SCSSVs in a type B landing nipple profile. The B lock is run and pulled on a type GS
running/pulling tool fitted with a BT probe.
The top No-Go shoulder on the B lock ensures
positive landing in the SSSV landing nipple. the
spring loaded plunger inside the lock ensures that
the running tool will not release until the lock
assembly is fully secured in the nipple. The
plunger also presents a large smooth bore for
well fluid. This combined with the internal fishing
neck makes the B lock mandrel ideal for high
volume applications.
The B-1 lock mandrel is a derivative of the B.
The B-1 has an additional debris barrier on the
top of the fishing neck for use in wells where
debris or sediment are present which may collect
around the outside of the lock and cause
problems in retrieval.
Refer to. figure 10.k
Figure 10.K - Baker B and B1 Lock

Mandrel
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
10.10. SURFACE CONTROLLED SUBSURFACE SAFETY VALVES
Note: As the manufacturers make alterations to equipment designs and the

tools used for running and pulling flow control devices, it is essential that
the latest manufacturers data sheets are used otherwise serious
problems may arise. This is more important with regard to the installation
and retrieval of SCSSVs.
10.10.1. SCSSV Running Procedure

The running of wireline installed SCSSVs is covered previously in section 9 of this manual.
The list below shows the common valves used by Eni-Agip and same procedures should be
followed for the running of these valves.
BA-6 Camco
DK Otis
BAAFVE Baker
BAARVE Baker
BAARVHE Baker
BAAFVHE Baker
WRP Camco
FXE Otis.
The different types of lock mandrels for running these valves are covered previously in this
section. The variations in procedures is in the type of prongs or probes run with each valve
to keep the valve open during installation.
10.10.2. SCSSV Pulling Procedure

The pulling of SCSSVs is covered previously in section 9 of this manual.
The same procedure should also be followed for the pulling of the following types of valves.
BA-6 Camco
DK Otis
BAAFVE Baker
BAARVE Baker
BAARVHE Baker
BAAFVHE Baker
WRP Camco
FXE Otis.
The different types of pulling tool and equalising prongs for the pulling of these valves are
already covered in the previous part of this section.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
11. WIRELINE PROBLEMS
11.1. WIRE BREAKS

11.1.1. Wire Breaks At Surface
Wire Remains Visible
When the wire breaks at the surface it occasionally gets trapped in the hay pulley or the
stuffing box. If it jams at the hay pulley the normal procedure is to put the wireline clamp on
the wire, pull out the slack, if any and connect the two broken ends together by either looping
the ends round each other and wrapping them and/or using a double male crossover,
attaching a rope socket on each end of wire and connecting them together, you can also use
a nut or chain link to join wire together. Pull the wire out of the hole, remove the tool string
and the broke wireline. Spool on a new line if the remaining line is too short to carry out
further operations. If the wire is broken at the stuffing box and the tool string is free the
procedure would be:
1) Close the BOP rams to grip the wire. Bleed off all pressure in the lubricator. Remove
one section of lubricator, back-thread the wireline through the remaining lubricator and
stuffing box and reconnect wire as above.
2) Take up all wire slack with the wireline unit. Equalise and open the BOP rams. If there
is enough lubricator remaining to accommodate the tool string, then pull out of the
hole. If not, then enough wireline should be pulled out to allow the section of lubricator
to be re-installed in the rig-up.
Note: The hay pulley may have to be repositioned to allow knot to pass. The
wire can also be removed from counter head to pass on to drum.
Note: The BOPs should be re-closed and pressure bled off.
Note: Always attempt, if possible, to make the connection so that it is wound

onto the reel a number of times before picking up heavy weights or
jarring.
3) Cut the wire at the wireline unit and rig-down lubricator. Pull the wireline out of the
stuffing box and lubricator. Add the lubricator section and back-feed through the
stuffing box. Re-rig the lubricator and re-connect the wireline as before. Take up all
wire slack with the wireline unit. Equalise and open the BOP. Pull out of the hole with
the tool string.
4) The wire is reconnected, using a nut, link from chain, or disc or rope sockets and
spooled back onto drum (Refer to figure 11.a and figure 11.b). The hay pulley may
have to be repositioned to permit knot to pass. Wire can be removed from counter
head to allow the knot to go onto drum.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Figure 11.A- Chain Link Type Knot
Figure 11.B- Double Adapter Rope Socket Type

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
11.1.2. Wire Break In The Well

When the wire breaks downhole, or breaks at surface then falls back down the hole, the first
objective is to calculate the depth at which the top of the wire will be from the surface. To
calculate this a number of factors must be known:
The length of wire in the hole, whether tools are stuck or free and, if tools are
free, what depth would they fall to i.e. bottom of the hole (HUD), PBTD, a nipple,
crossover, etc. If stuck, at what depth.
The operator will know this from the actions he was taking at the time the wire
broke and from the wireline units depth counter reading.
Having calculated the length of the wire in the hole and determined where the
tool string is held up it is easy to calculate where the top of the wire would be if it
was standing straight up.
Depth of tool string - length of wire in hole = Depth to top of wire.
However, the wire does not sit straight up but coils round the tubing walls and
therefore falls to a lower depth. This is referred to as wire fall and is dependent
upon the size and type of wire, the length in the hole and the tubing diameter.
Having determined the approximate depth of the top of the wire, it is now necessary to find
and confirm the depth before attempting to retrieve it. The tools used to find the top of the
wire are referred to as wire finders. If the line breaks at the surface due to extensive jarring,
the jars on the tool string still work and if the line parted at the counterhead, with the broke
end extended through the stuffing box, it is possible to splice the line and continue jarring to
free and recover the toolstring
Amount of wire fallback per 1,000ft

1
In our scenario, we have used 0.108 wire in 5 /2 ins tubing. By using the table we find that
the wire will fall back 40ft per 1,000ft and that the wire will be found as follows.
10,000 + 28 + 21 + 12 (Toolstring) = 10,061
10,061
Fall back = 40 x = 402.44
1,000
Top of wire = minus 61ft of surface wire = 341.44
To assume that the top of the wire would be found or pushed 'x' thousand feet down the hole
is totally wrong. The wire will be found in a long spiral, hard against the tubing wall, and does
not emulate a coil spring. (The only way that the line would move further down the tubing, is
if the top of the wire was picked up by a fishing tool, and pulled down the hole inside itself as
the tool moves downhole inside the wire spiral. On trying to retrieve the fishing tool, it would
invariably get stuck due to wire above the toolstring being dragged into a ball.)
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Tubing Size (ins.) Wireline OD. (ins.) Wire Fall ft/1,000ft.

7
2 /8 0.092 12
1
3 /2 0.092 16
1
3 /2 0.108 15
1 3
3 /2 /16 20
1
4 /2 0.108 27
1 3
4 /2 /16 35
1
5 /2 0.108 40
1 3
5 /2 /16 50
1
7 /2 0.108 90
1 3
7 /2 /16 100
Table 11.A - Wire Fall Estimations
11.1.3. Wire Stuck In The Stuffing Box

Stuffing boxes for use with 0.108 wire incorporate a 16ins sheave wheel which highlights that
manufacturers have recognised that sheave wheels, pulleys etc., should be compatible with
wire size.
Note: It is essential to change all stuffing box packings on a regular basis since,
during wireline operations, it is quite common for metal splinters to be
shaved from the line by the cutting action of the sharp profiles on the
edges of the metal wireline guides. These filings are carried into the
packings and increase lateral pressure on the line. In cases where only
the top two or three packings have been replaced, metal build up has
contributed to isolated instances of a phenomena called Hydro-Dynamic
deformation, which is evidenced by a reduction in the diameter of the line,
(over approx. 2-3ft of its length), caused by the generation of hydrostatic
pressures during rapid acceleration/deceleration during the wireline
process.
Similar conditions, and line failures, can be created by excessive tightening down of the
stuffing box packing. Although this is not a common problem, it has been experienced in
Europe and the USA, particularly when using stainless steel lines.
Note: It is recommended to use brass packing gland and lower gland as the
metal type can create wear to the wire resulting in wire failure
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
11.2. WIRELINE TOOLSTRING STICKING

For the following scenarios the methods of freeing the toolstring are similar as far as jarring
with mechanical or power jars, to free the string. Depending on the severity of the toolstring
being stuck it may require the wireline to be cut. This will require approval from the wireline
supervisor.
11.2.1. During Gauging Operations

Cause:
Build up of wax on tubing wall.
Wrongly sized gauge cutters for operation
Poorly maintained gauge cutters (worn, cutting edge worn)
Build up of scale on tubing wall.
Prevention:
Use correctly sized gauge cutters for operation.
Use properly maintained gauge cutters.
Use correct toolstring for operation (power jars)
11.2.2. During Pressure and Temperature Surveys

Cause:
Pressure and temperatures gauges hanging up in a Side Pocket Mandrel.
Toolstring being blown up well.
Toolstring hanging up in deviated section of well.
Prevention:
Gauges and toolstring should be correctly centralised.
Use the correct amount of weight bar for operation being carried out.
Use a toolstring designed for deviated/dogleg section.(roller stem, knuckle
joints).
11.2.3. During Perforating Operations

Cause:
Wireline toolstring being blown up well.
Wireline toolstring oversized after perforation.
Prevention:
Correctly balance pressures prior to perforating.
Use sufficient weight bar to minimise toolstring movement.
Use correct loading and sizing procedures for charges.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
11.2.4. During Lock Setting/Retrieving

Cause:
Lock incorrectly pinned
Build up sand sediment around the lock mandrel
Improper pressure equalisation prior to lock mandrel being released.
Prevention:
Ensure the correct equalisation procedure is followed prior to releasing lock
mandrel.
Ensure the correct type of plug is used with regards to well conditions.( i.e. prong
type on wells with sand or sediment production).
Ensure the correct pinning procedure is followed.
11.2.5. During Packer Setting

Cause:
Casing or tubing was not drifted prior to run.
The lock was incorrectly pinned.
Movement of tubulars when the packer is setting.
Prevention:
Ensure a drift run has been carried out before running packer.
Ensure the correct pinning procedure is followed.
Use the correct procedure when applying pressure to the tubing string.
11.2.6. During Scratching Operations

Cause:
Scratcher becomes stuck in wax plug.
Scratcher being deformed after passing through restriction in well.
Prevention:
Use correct size scratcher for the well profile.
When scratching wax add extra stem below jars to ensure the jars are free from
any wax plug that is encountered by the scratcher.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
11.2.7. During Hydrate Removal

Cause:
Insufficient methanol mix injected during wireline runs.
In-correct glycol mix used while pressure testing.
Prevention:
Ensure there is a continuous injection of methanol during wireline runs.
Ensure the correct mixture of glycol/water is used when pressure testing.
11.3. TOOLSTRING PROBLEMS

The folowing are the problems which can be encountered with toolsring condition or
improper procedures used.
11.3.1. Toolstring Breakage

Cause:
Worn connections.
Damaged or worn tools.
Wrong manipulation of toolstring on delicate tools.
Prevention:
Regularly inspect threads.
Correctly maintain tools.
Ensure the correct procedure is followed for the toolstring being run.
11.3.2. Toolstring Disconnection

Cause:
Worn connections.
Tools not tightened up properly on surface prior to running in.
Prevention:
Regularly inspect threads.
Use of quick-lock type connectors.
Ensure the correct procedure is followed for making up the toolstring to be run.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
11.4. FISHING
11.4.1. Standard Well Site Inventory Of Fishing Tools
The following is a list of tools that would be expected in a standard fishing toolbox:
a) Wireline Clamp
b) Wireline Grab
c) Wireline Finder
d) LIBs to suit tubing sizes
e) Blind Boxes to suit tubing sizes.
f) Heavy duty pulling tool
g) Wireline cutters
h) GO-Devils
i) Overshots
j) Bell Guides to suit tubing sizes
k) Power jars
l) Tubular jars.
11.4.2. General
Fishing is the name given to the operation to retrieve items from the well which may be
damaged, stuck or have been dropped, and is an efficient way of rectifying this kind of
problem. The most common reason for fishing is when a wireline has broken, either, at the
surface and remains visible, or downhole and is not visible. In the laters case, several
conditioning and preparatory trips may be necessary before the fish can be located
successfully and retrieved. As each fishing job is different, these operations cannot be
covered by specific procedures, but it is in this area the operators experience and skill can
play a significant part.
Wireline fishing is not a planned operation, the variety of possible fishing jobs make it
impossible to detail definitive procedures, however, it should be remembered that standard
wireline procedures and practices must still be followed wherever possible even when the rig
up will almost certainly be different from normal.
Wireline fishing becomes necessary due to a number of reasons, ranging from operator
error, often due to poor communication, bad practices, in experiences etc. through to
problems experienced in todays deep wells, such as asphaltenes, scale, chemical
composition, and high temperatures which attack wirelines, equipment and seals and serve
to compound problems.
Over the years there have been vast improvements in downhole technology, such as
completion design, plugging systems, subsurface safety valves etc. There have also been
improvements in wire quality and strength, however, the areas that have seen few changes
are the wirelining technique itself, and the surface equipment in direct contact with the wire.
Before tackling the various methods of fishing, it is necessary to determine what checks and
procedures can be carried out to avoid a fishing job in the first place.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
11.4.3. Fishing Prevention Measures

Fishing techniques are extremely varied and depend largely on the circumstances and well
conditions for each individual situation.
The aim of wireline is to complete the set programme as quickly and safely as possible
without getting the tools stuck or breaking the wire.
It is the aim of the wireline operator to carry out operations in a safe and timely manner
without becoming stuck, breaking the wire, being blown up the hole or losing tools etc. To
prevent these occurrences the following good wireline practices should be observed:
Check and maintain equipment regularly. Function test all equipment to be run
including hydraulic and spang jars.
Check that running/pulling tools move to the sheared position by removing the
shear pins and testing them on an appropriate fish neck.
Always ensure that a tool with an OD. larger than the rest of the toolstring is run
below the jars and check that all thread connections are tight.
Observe that the load limitations of the wire being used are never exceeded.
Maintain the wireline and lubricate with oil when running into the well to reduce
friction and wear to the stuffing box. Take precautions to avoid kinking the wire
and check that the counter is correctly zeroed at the appropriate datum point.
Keep the hydraulic pressure relief valve correctly adjusted.
Use correct equalising procedures with the proper prong, wait until equalisation
is complete.
Concentrate on what you are doing. Try to visualise what is happening downhole
as the wire is manipulated at the surface. If unsure, ask for assistance.
Maintain a careful record of toolstring dimensions i.e. fish neck sizes, ODs and
lengths. Think ahead, be prepared for problems.
Check the programme and/or well files for current well status and previous
problems en-countered. Follow the programme and do not deviate unless prior
approval has been obtained..
Note: However careful an operator is, fishing jobs will still occur due to
equipment failures, well conditions and unexpected problems.
Note: Discuss a fishing programme with all the relevant personnel and consider
all possible results of each time the well bore is entered and plan for the
various possibilities.
1) Make sure that wire is not in contact with rig floor, beams etc. as this will cause
damage from abrasion.
2) If taking control of a well, i.e. hydraulic pumps for SCSSV and HMV, make sure the
hold open pressures are not exceeded and closely monitored for any pressure drop
(possible leaks).
3) Make sure that signs and barriers are placed to prevent anyone closing swab valve,
etc. especially when adjacent operations are ongoing.
4) Make sure that all hydraulic pumps used have a back up air supply in case of an
emergency.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
11.4.4. Fishing Assembly

Having established where the top of the wire should be, the first tool we would run is a wire
finder (Refer to figure 11.c).
A typical toolstring would include:
Rope socket.
Lightest amount of stem required to get down the hole (see below).
Tubular jars.
Jar-Up pulling tool.
Rope socket.
Stem (for spacer)
Wire finder.
The reason that the lightest amount of stem is required, is due to the fact that it is necessary
to find the top of the wire with the wire finder. It would be ideal, therefore, if the wire finder
should cease downward movement, or show some sign of running through a restriction (i.e.
weight loss or jerky downward movement), within + 20ft mark, where the wire would be
expected to be found.
To find the lightest amount of stem, the following formula would be used.
Force per square inch or amount of weight it will take for a toolstring to fall, neglecting
friction = area in square inch x pressure: (A x P = f)
= Area x lubricator press = Force trying to blow the wire out of
x wire OD 2 the stuffing box
4
If the weight per ft of the stem is not known, the following formula may be used:
OD 2 x 8
Weight per ft of round bar stock or stem = = wt per ft
3
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Figure 11.C - Initial Fishing String

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
The normal spang jar is not used for wire fishing as jar action can easily be lost if the wire
becomes snagged between the linkage, therefore tubular jars may be used.
The tubular jar is commonly used for fishing because its moving components are, for the
most part, enclosed within the outside housing, protecting them from entanglement with the
wireline to be fished and other well debris.
Tubular jars have screwed components which are susceptible to backing off during
prolonged jarring. Also, the efficiency of jarring down may be decreased due to the viscosity
effects of the fluid displaced from inside the housing. (Refer to figure 11.d).
Figure 11.D - Jars

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
11.5. SLICKLINE FISHING PROCEDURES

11.5.1. Wireline Finder/Retriever
The two traditional types of wire finder are the bell shaped finder (Refer to previous figure
11.c) and the Bowen finder/retriever (Refer to figure 11.e).
Bell Shaped Finder

This type of finder is a solid, thin walled device which is belled out to conform with the tubing
drift diameter. When correctly used it will seldom miss the top of the wire, however, the
disadvantages are:
Difficult to get through the Xmas tree.
Cannot pass through nipples.
Cannot retrieve the wire.
Bowen Finder/Retriever
The Bowen wireline retriever consists of a top sub, mandrel, main sub, spear point, slip and
skirt. The retriever may be dressed with various skirt sizes to conform to tubing drift.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Figure 11.E - Wire Finder/Retriever

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
11.5.2. Running A Wire Finder

The wire finder is a circular device with fingers which pick up the tail end of the wire from the
tubing wall and bend it into the middle of the tubing (Refer to previous figure 11.c), preparing
it to be retrieved by another device (wireline grab/spear).
1) Select the appropriate size of wire finder for the tubing and restrictions. Adjust the
diameter of the wire finder fingers according to the particular tubing weight or
restriction size. The fingers should be adjusted to bear on the tubing walls so that the
wire cannot pass.
2) If necessary, attach a rope socket to the pin end of the wire finder.
3) Make up a suitable toolstring using tubular jars instead of spang jars.
4) Attach wire finder to releasing tool. (Normally a jar up to release tool is preferred.)
5) Attach wire finder assembly to the toolstring and zero on the tubing hanger flange.
6) Pick up tools into the lubricator and make it up to the BOP.
7) Pressure test the lubricator and open the swab valve, counting the number of turns.
8) Run in the hole slowly and continuously observe weight indicator.
9) Once close to the wire pull up the hole every 100ft. to ensure that the wire has not
been bypassed.
10) The wire tail (top of loose wire) depth will be indicated by weight loss. Sit wire finder
down on top of wire tail. (Care must be taken to ensure that the wire finder does not
run past the wire tail.)
11) Open jars and tap down on wire several times. This action will bundle the wire end into
the middle of the tubing forming a birds nest.
12) Continue to tap down on the wire until approximately 3ft. of wire has been bird-nested.
Pull out of the hole with the wire finder, ensuring that it has not attached itself to the
wireline.
13) Once the tool is confirmed to be inside the lubricator, close the swab valve and bleed
down the lubricator.
14) Back off the quick union and raise the lubricator.
Bowen Wire Finder/Retriever

In operation, the Bowen retriever is run into the well, the well fluid and friction cause the skirt
to ride up on the mandrel, exposing the spear point and the opening between the spear point
and the skirt.
When the tool contacts the broken line, the line will pass through the space between the
spear and the skirt. A loss of running in weight will show when contact has been made.
Stopping the decent causes the skirt to move down the mandrel, wedging the caught line
between the matching tapers of the skirt and the spear. Pulling up on the wireline securely
wedges the line, the entire wireline can then be pulled from the well.
The main disadvantages of this device are:
Can be difficult to get through the tree.
Difficult to pass through nipples and remain effective.
If used roughly, the fingers which make up the skirt can distort or break off causing further
problems.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Wire Finder Operating Technique

Having chosen the equipment to use, run in the hole to locate the wire. It is possible that the
scratcher wire finder will be a little tight in the tubing and that some gentle jarring will be
required before the finder will run freely in the tubing. When the finder runs freely, proceed
down the tubing monitoring the weight indicator and looking for any kind of running pattern
i.e. finder binding on tubing joints, etc.
In our example, upon reaching 300ft, the running speed should be extremely slow. Ideally,
when the scratcher reaches the broken end of the wire, downward movement should cease,
however, the most difficult part of fishing is pulling the broken end of the wire away from the
tubing wall and it is quite likely that the scratcher will run down inside the wire spiral. When
this happens, the operator should run in no further than 400ft. It is quite likely that the
running pattern will change when the finder is inside the wire spiral. If 400ft is reached, pull
back up to 300ft and try again, watching for the pattern change and try to pin-point the depth
at which it changes, it may take some 5 or 6 attempts running slowly up and down the
tubing. When the depth has been established, start to increase the speed at which the finder
is run, past the position the top of the wire is believed to be at (run no more than 30ft past
the end of the wire at this stage).
The objective now is to pull the end of the wire away from the tubing wall and try and kink it
enough for a grab to get hold of it. Regardless of the type of wire finder, it is not good
practice to ball the wire, as a wire grab with a tight ball on it could lead to problems and
could cause damage to the safety valve landing nipple.
As soon as the wire finder has sat down on top of the wire, jar down lightly 2-3 times and if
the finder remains at the same depth, pull out of the hole. Its quite likely that the wire will
have become entangled with the wire finder and will be retrieved, however, let us assume
that the wire is still left in the hole.
It must be taken into account that, if the first few runs with the wire finder are unsuccessful,
the finder must be pulled out of the hole, re-adjusted and re-run. It is essential that patience
and strict discipline are maintained.
The majority of fishing jobs which go sour are due to prematurely running wireline grabs
hundreds of feet below the end of the wire, causing the wire above the toolstring to ball and
tangle, thus leaving a second toolstring in the hole.
11.5.3. Wireline Grabs

These come in various designs such as two, three and four prong. The most important point
when choosing a grab is to choose one which is not too big for the job.
The largest inflexible OD on the grab must be measured. Assume that two wraps of wire,
one on top of the other are around that particular OD. Make sure that the total OD is smaller
than the smallest ID that the grab must pass through.
Preparing The Grab

1
Bend open the prongs of the grab until approx. /2 inch larger than the tubing ID. Compress
the prongs (without bending them) to less than the safety valve ID and bind two wraps of
packing tape around the tips of the prongs (Refer to figure 11.f). (This will be worn off when
running up and down the tubing directly below the safety valve nipple).
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
It must be considered that although the main priority is to retrieve the fish, it must not be
achieved at the expense of scoring the bore of the SVLN. Therefore, all precautions must be
taken to avoid this happening.
Running The Grab

The grab would be run on the same toolstring as the scratcher, except that now an RB
pulling tool will be attached to the jars and latched onto a rope socket which is in turn,
attached to the top of the wireline grab.
If the wire finder has found where the top of the wire is, but has not removed the broken end
from the tubing wall, it may be preferable to either run the grab below the wire finder, or else
'bait the grab' by looping wire around the top of the grab prongs (only if sufficient clearance
exists between grab OD and SVLN ID). Both methods have been known to be successful.
Figure 11.F - Preparing the Wireline Grab

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Running A Wireline Grab/Spear

A wireline grab/spear is a device used for retrieving loose wire in the well. It is usually run
after a wire finder has bundled the wireline.
1) Select the appropriate size of wireline grab/spear for the tubing and restrictions. The
fingers should be adjusted to as close to the tubing internal diameter as possible.
2) If necessary, attach rope socket to the pin end of the wireline grab/spear.
3) Make up a suitable toolstring using tubular jars instead of spang jars. Depending on
the operation spring jars may also be used.
4) Attach wire grab/spear to releasing tool. (Normally a jar up to release tool is preferred.)
5) Attach wire grab/spear assembly to the toolstring and zero on the tubing hanger
flange.
6) Pick up tools into the lubricator and make it up to the BOP.
8) Run in the hole slowly and continuously observe weight indicator.
9) Stop at approximately 100ft. above bent wire and note pick up weight accurately.
10) Open jars and tap down on wire several times. This action should engage the wireline
grab/spear in the bent kinked wire.
11) Pick up and note the toolstring weight while pulling out. A steady overpull when
compared to the pick up weight in step 9 indicates successful retrieval of the wire.
12) If the retrieved wire becomes stuck, the releasing tool can be sheared leaving the
wireline grab/spear downhole. The wire size or toolstring configuration can then be
changed and another attempt made to retrieve the wire.
13) Pull out of the hole carefully, monitoring the weight indicator continuously. A sudden
loss of weight indicates that the retrieved wire has disengaged from the wire
grab/spear. It this should happen, repeat steps 8-12.
14) Recover the wire to surface by following the procedure for stripping wire.
11.5.4. Alligator Grab

The Alligator Grab, (Refer to figure 11.g) is a wireline fishing tool utilised to catch and
retrieve loose objects (e.g. broken equipment) from the tubing. The grab is designed to allow
the operator to pre-determine the amount of jaw pressure required to effectively grip the fish
by adjusting the spring tension in the tool prior to running in the tubing.
Note: An external thread is available on the lower end of the top sub to allow
the attachment of a centraliser, if necessary.
The principle of operation is as follows.

When the grab is set down on a fish, downward jar action will shear the shear pin and the
force of the spring will move the inner mandrel upwards. This upward movement will also
move the shot pin upwards and, due to the slots in the upper ends of the jaws, rotate the
jaws about the pivot to grip the fish.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Note: Prior to running the alligator grab, it must be established that loose
objects exist in the tubing. This alligator grab is not designed to
withstand heavy jarring operations on a fish stuck in the tubing.
The PCE alligator grab is available in various sizes as listed in table 11.b below.
Size ins. (mm) Fish Neck Size ins. Thread Connection ins. Maximum OD ins.(mm)
(mm) (mm)
1 15
1 /4 (31.75) 1.187 (30.15) /16 (23.81) - 10 tpi 1.25 (31.75)
1 15
1 /2 (38.10) 1.187 (30.15) /16 (23.81) - 10 tpi 1.50 (38.10)
1
2 (50.80) 1.375 (34.93) 1 /16 (26.99) - 10 tpi 1.75 (44.45)
5
3 (76.20) 1.750 (44.45) 1 /16 (33.34) - 10 tpi 2.25 (57.15)
Table 11.B- Specifications for the PCE Alligator
Figure 11.G - PCE Alligator Grab

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
11.5.5. Go Devil
1 7
The go-devil is similar in appearance to a section of stem. It is available in 1 /2ins and 1 /8ins
sizes and in lengths from 18ins to 60ins (5ft). It has a slot milled along its length and a filler
plate which is held in position with roll pins, leaving a hole in the centre to run smoothly down
the wire (Refer to figure 11.h).
There are two major types of go-devil:
Bevelled
Flat-bottomed.
Figure 11.H- Go-Devil

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Bevelled Go-Devil
A bevelled go-devil is used to slide down wire and cut at the socket by a slicing action.
Length is determined by the contents of the tubing:
Long in heavy oil.
Short in light fluid.
This tool is not recommended for use in gas, as speed of impact could cause considerable
tubing/casing damage.
Ensure diameter is sufficient to prevent devil wedging alongside toolstring.
Flat-Bottomed Go-Devil
A flat bottom Go Devil is used to:
Trip Flopetrol cutter and Kinley.
Provide cutting base on sand/wire.
Add weight to toolstring to jar down.
Assist toolstring back into tubing (past a muleshoe).
Note: When assembling a Go-devil above a BOP or tree connection, pack the
quick union with rags to prevent pieces being dropped inside.
11.5.6. Cutter Bar

Kinley Snepper (Refer to figure 11.i)
7
The Kinley Snepper will cut any line up to and including 0.125ins and /32ins electric (braided)
1 1 1
line. It is 2 /2ft long and can be run in a 1 /4ins minimum ID or larger. It will cut the line 2 /2ins
above the rope socket (this is important when fishing for the rope socket as a pulling tool
with an S core would be required to grip the neck of the rope socket).
It is designed to be dropped into the hole and operates by the impact of its own weight when
it hits the target.
As the snepper cuts, it also crimps the line and clamps onto it. This action makes it possible
to pull the snepper back up with the cut line, (though only use the crimper if the snepper has
sufficient weight to overcome the force of well pressure on the cross-sectional area of the
wire).
The cutter can be used in three ways:
1) Dropped onto the rope socket.
2) Dropped and followed by a flat bottomed Go-Devil for cutting large OD. wire, in
deviated wells or wells with high viscosity fluid.
3) Dropped upside down when a rope socket is covered with sand; this gives a firm base
for a flat-bottomed Go-Devil to be dropped on to.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
To recap, the wireline would have been picked up in the lubricator using the gauge cutter
until the wire is pulled tight against the toolstring downhole. It may also be possible to see
the toolstring jars open and close downhole by observing the weight indicator. The objective
now is to prepare the broken wire for the application of the wireline cutter so that the wire
may eventually be cut at the rope socket. To do this, the jars on the downhole toolstring
must be closed, (so that the cutter will strike solidly), and enough slack wire must be played
out to avoid fouling the cutter against the tubing wall.
Satisfactory results can be achieved by allowing approx. 3ins of slack per 1,000ft in a
straight hole and approx. 6ins per 1,000ft in a deviated hole. Sufficient time must also be
allowed for the cutter to reach the toolstring. By assuming a speed of 250ft per min in an oil
well. and 350ft per min in a gas well, 45mins should be adequate waiting time for this
scenario.
It is important that the operator does not prematurely manipulate the broken wire, as this
could cause the cutter to cut the wire before reaching the toolstring, thus complicating the
fishing job.
The next and most important point, is to consider the OD of the cutter bar, and the OD of the
toolstring versus the ID of the tubing. The Kinley Snepper for example, has an OD of 1.5ins.
The toolstring in our case has an OD of 1.875ins. Side by side that equals 3.375ins OD. The
1
ID of 5 /2ins lbs per ft tubing is 4.892ins.
As previously discussed, the snepper is designed to stay attached to the wireline once it has
cut it, however, if the snepper fell off the end of the wire, it would fall down beside the
toolstring, possibly wedging itself between the jars, (which are slanted in the tubing), and the
tubing wall, creating what could be an -impossible fishing job. Therefore, the snepper must
have centralisers fitted in order to avoid this problem. These centralisers should be designed
for each size of tubing, and kept in a fishing box ready for fitting should the occasion arise.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Figure 11.I- Kinley Snepper

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Flopetrol Cable Cutter (Refer to figure 11.j)

The Flopetrol cable cutter can be used to cut wire in a well providing it is still accessible at
the surface. If the wire has broken downhole then a different type of cutter must be used.
The cable cutter is attached to the wireline and dropped into the well. It strikes the rope
socket or go-devil (used when there is sand etc. covering the rope-socket), and cuts the wire
simultaneously gripping the cut end. The cable cutter can then be retrieved with the fishing
1
wire. By changing the components it can cut all sizes of slickline and braided line up to /4ins.
diameter, leaving 1ins. of wire remaining above the rope socket.
The cutter can be used in two ways, with the tool in 'standard' mode and the hammer an
integral part of the tool or in the 'interface' mode. If there is a restriction or a fluid level in the
well, it is possible, due to the operation of the 'standard' tool, that it will cut the wire at these
points, For this reason the Flopetrol cable cutter can be deployed in the 'interface' mode.
This involves removing the hammer section from the cutting section. The tapered wedge in
the cutter is pinned with a brass shear pin to avoid premature shearing. The cutting section
is then attached to the wireline.
Before starting this operation, the BOP must be closed and the pressure bled off from the
lubricator.
The lubricator can now be made up to the BOP, the pressure equalised across it and the
BOP opened. The cable cutter will now be free to drop down the hole. The time it takes for
the cutter to reach the rope-socket will vary depending on the depth, deviation and the type
of fluid in the hole.
Once it is considered that the cutter has reached the rope-socket, an overpull should be
exerted on the wireline to ascertain whether the cutter bar above has cut the wireline. If not,
the wireline should be slacked off, the BOP closed and the lubricator bled off and removed.
The hammer/weight bar can now be installed and dropped in the same manner as the cutter
section. When the hammer section hits the cutting section, the impact is transmitted through
the cutting assembly, cutting and gripping the wireline.
The 'interface' tool can be retrieved on the wire in the same manner as the 'standard' cutter.
The cutter and go-devil are recovered with the wire and give a clean cut, close to the rope
socket. They can be used in oil or gas by varying the length of the go-devil.
Caution: The OD of the toolstring to be dropped on and the ID of tubing should be

known and, if necessary, centralisers should be added to the cutter to
prevent it going down the side of the toolstring.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Figure 11.J - Flopetrol Wireline Cutter

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Cutter Bar Procedure

1) Note the normal cable weight and slack off the wire.
2) Close the BOP rams on the wire and vent down the lubricator via the manifold.
Observe the lubricator pressure gauge for any pressure build-up.
3) Ensure there is zero pressure build-up in the lubricator and back off the quick-union.
Raise the lubricator high enough to allow insertion of the cutter bar.
4) Install the cutter bar as specified in the manufacturer's manual.
Important: Check that the cutter bar slides up and down the wire freely.
5) Gently sit the cutter down on top of the BOP rams.

6) Stab the lubricator back on top of the BOPs. Take particular care to keep the cutter bar
aligned with lubricator to avoid premature cutting of the wire. Avoid excessive slack on
the wire. Make up quick-union and close lubricator manifold valve.
7) Open equalising valve on BOP to allow well pressure to equalise across it.
8) Crack open BOP rams, enough to free the wire, but without allowing the bar to drop.
9) Pick up the wire to the normal wire weight noted prior to slacking off, or until the
beginning of overpull is observed.
10) Fully open BOP rams to allow cutter bar to drop.
11) Allow sufficient time for bar to drop.
Note: This will vary depending on well depth, well deviation, well fluid and
bypass.
Note: In some cases the bar hitting the rope socket can be observed as a small
kick on the weight indicator, or felt manually on the line. Deviation,
restrictions, scale and doglegs can cause the bar to hang up. Working the
wire up and down can assist the cutter.
Interface Bar Procedure

1) The procedure to insert the interface bar into the lubricator and release it is the same
as for the cutter bar.
2) When the wire has been cut, pull back to surface. This should normally retrieve the
cutter bar and interface bar on the end of the wireline.
3) Once the tool is confirmed to be inside the lubricator, close the Xmas tree and bleed
down lubricator.
4) Back off the quick-union and raise the lubricator.
5) Remove the cutter bar and interface bar.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Centraliser Design
Ensure that the OD of the centraliser touches the tubing wall on one side with the other side
slightly overlapping the toolstring OD.
Ensure that the centraliser OD with two wraps of wire around it will pass through the smallest
ID (calculated safety factor).
Having dropped the snepper, the current state of the operation is as follows:
The lubricator is in position with the wireline valve rams partially open and the
wire attached to the gauge cutter in the lubricator.
Attempt to pull the gauge cutter as high as possible into the lubricator, (this should be
possible if the wire is cut from the toolstring, if not some manipulation may be necessary or
else a flat bottomed go devil dropped on top of the snepper).
Having established that the wire is cut, close the wireline valve and bleed off the lubricator.
Knowing at this stage that there is only a 2.5ft long snepper to pull back, the lubricator can
be rigged down to one section or even crossover and stuffing box to sit onto the wireline
valve. This makes backfeeding the wire much easier and less dangerous to fingers etc.
Once the line has been backfeed through the stuffing box, it should then be spliced (using
3
pipe splices as discussed with gauge cutter), onto the 0.108 drum, /16" drum, or direct to
the spooling device, whichever is most convenient, and having opened the wireline valve the
wire can be retrieved from the hole.
Caution: When retrieving the wire, a stage will be reached where pressure acting
on the cross section area of the wire creates a force greater than the
weight of the wire in the hole, at this stage the wire may blow out of the
stuffing box and out with control. Ensure that non essential personnel are
aware of this, so that they may stand well clear
11.5.7. Blind Box

Assuming that this well is vertical, it is possible to run a blind box on the end of a toolstring
(using tubular jars) down through the broken wireline to the rope socket and to box off the
wire from the rope socket, (2-4 downward jar actions usually being sufficient), and retrieve
the toolstring without becoming tangled up with the broken wire (Refer to figure 11.k). I
t is essential that the blind box is of the exact size for the job, as a blind box with too small
an OD will not cut the wire, and a blind box that is too big will probably tangle up in the
broken line and prematurely cut the wire up the hole.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Figure 11.K - Blind Box

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Formula
Always assume that the rope socket is sitting against the tubing wall.
The blind box must be of an exact size to touch the opposite side of the tubing wall, and
overlap the centre of the rope socket in order to cut the wire.
Check that the blind box OD is small enough to go through the smallest tubing ID allowing
two wraps of wire around it.
Example:
5 inch, 15# Tubing
Tubing ID = 4.408
Toolstring OD = 1.875
Blind Box OD = 3.52

4 x 0.108 wire = 0.43
Blind Box + Wire = 3.95

R Nipple ID = 4.125
Total Clearance
above Safety Factor = 0.18
This formula has proven very successful on a number of occasions, but it is stressed that
only the correct size of blind box will provide any chance of success.
11.5.8. Special Tools

The Petroline Heavy Duty Pulling Tool, see figure 11.l, is designed to minimise the problem
of wear and/or damage to fishing necks during operations where heavy jarring is intended.
This tool has been designed so that the latching dogs act on the full circumference of a
fishing neck. The Petroline heavy duty pulling tool can withstand extensive heavy jarring. It is
a shear down to release tool.
The pulling tool is run on the end of a wireline string that includes a jar accelerator, 8-10ft of
weight bar, tension jars, link jars and the heavy duty pulling tool. The wireline toolstring is run
down to the fish and latched on to the fishing neck. Latching requires the core adapter and
finger core to move upwards in the latch housing; the fingers will move into the recess.
Latching is complete when the coiled spring in the upper housing returns the finger core to
its original position. Upward jarring should be continued until the object becomes loose or it
is necessary to cut off some wire or re-tie a new rope socket.
If safety disconnect is necessary several downward jars will shear the pin. The finger core
will be in the raised and release position and the wireline string may then be pulled to the
surface.
Note: Prolonged jarring on non-heavy duty tools can result in tool failure and
the possibility of parts being left downhole.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Figure 11.L- Petroline Heavy Duty Pulling Tool

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
11.5.9. Centre Spears

Wireline Bulldog Spears are fishing tools specifically designed to catch stuck tubular
assemblies by spearing into their internal profiles. There are three types of Bulldog Spears:
Conventional type
Collet type
Releasable Collet type.
In all cases, the upward movement of a tapered rod will expand a set of slips outward onto
the internal profile of a fish. When upward jarring is employed to free the fish, the slips will
bite tighter into the internal profile of the stuck assembly due to the tapered arrangement
between the slips and the tapered rod on the spear.
Conventional Spear
figure 11.l shows a conventional wireline bulldog spear. This type of spear is primarily
designed to catch stuck tubular profiles with internal diameters ranging from 0.5 to 6.00ins.
The bulldog spear consists of a top sub/fish neck, tapered rod and hardened and tempered
slips which are dovetailed into grooves in the tapered rod. The through bore in the tapered
rod and the hole drilled in the top sub facilitates fluid bypass when running the spear in the
tubing.
Depending on the ID. of the fish, the number of slips used will vary.
Note: The conventional bulldog spear cannot be released once it catches on the
internal profile of a downhole assembly. It must be run with a
jar-down-to-release pulling tool to ensure that release is possible from
the spear when necessary.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Figure 11.M - Conventional Bulldog Spear

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Releasable Collet Type Bulldog Spear

The Releasable Collet Type Bulldog Spear, (Refer to figure 11.n), is used to catch stuck
assemblies with internal diameters ranging from 0.875 to 3.5ins. The releasable collet spear
consists of a spear, centre mandrel with attached fishing neck, collet slips, spring and outer
mandrel with an internal fishing neck. This spear has no fluid bypass features.
The principle of operation is as follows. A shear-up-to-release running/pulling tool (e.g.
Camco JU or Otis RB) is used to run the spear into the fish. When the fishing tool spears
the downhole assembly, the collet will positively stop on top of the fish and the spear will
move into the bore of the fish. This action will compress the spring and simultaneously allow
the collet slips to retract as the OD. of the taper on the centre mandrel reduces.
When the collet slips are retracted sufficiently, they will force the collet slips down the taper
and grip. An upward pull on the wireline will move the centre mandrel up and expand the
collet slips to bite into the fish. Upward jarring is then applied to free the fish or shear the
shear pin in the running/pulling tool.
To release the spear from the fish, a shear-up-to-release pulling tool is used (e.g. Otis GR)
to drive down the centre mandrel and latch into internal fishing neck on the outer mandrel.
As the centre mandrel is driven down, the collet slips retract on the taper until the pulling tool
latches. With the collet slips retracted, upward jarring will free the spear from the fish.
Note: Due to the function of the spring, the downward movement of the centre
mandrel and the latching of the pulling tool is essential for the release of
the spear.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Figure 11.N - Collet Type Spears
11.6. LOST TOOL FISHING PROCEDURE

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
11.6.1. Impression Block

The Lead Impression Block (LIB), see figure 11.o (the running procedure for which is already
described in section 9.12), is an important and useful tool to have available during fishing
operations. A selection of LIBs should be kept in the wireline toolbox in a range of ODs to
suit the various tubing and completion equipment sizes. Tapered LIBs can be used to check
damage inside internal fishing necks.
The lead core is normally pinned through the body and should be checked prior to running
the tool to ensure that it is firmly secure. Other pre-running checks are to measure the OD.
accurately and ensure that the lead base is clean and smooth and has no markings on it that
would confuse the operator when interpreting an impression.
When running in the tubing, the LIB should be lowered slowly through the Xmas tree,
landing nipples, side pocket mandrels (SPMs), and sliding side doors (SSDs); the operator
should have the depths of these completion tools prior to running the tubing.
Running the LIB without a knuckle joint can avoid excessive movement of the tool while
running in. This will reduce the marking of the lead and will tend to centre the LIB for a more
representative impression.
Note: If the toolstring hangs up, it should be tapped through the restriction very
slowly without jarring.
When the toolstring is 4-6ft. above the fish the LIB is lowered very gently onto the fish. The
tools are then picked up to open the jars about half way and the toolstring jarred down once
only. The toolstring is pulled back to surface.
Note: Heavy downward jarring will cause the lead to extrude (spread outwards)
and may interfere with the retrieval of the LIB through any restrictions in
the tubing, i.e. landing nipples etc.
The LIB should be handled with care on recovery to avoid making any other marks on the
lead that would make the impression taken downhole difficult to interpret. The LIB can be
used with excellent results and will assist the operator in selecting the correct fishing tool to
clear the tubing and return the well to normal operations.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Figure 11.O - Lead Impression Block (LIB)
11.6.2. LIB Running Procedure

1) Select a suitable size of LIB. It should be at least 0.25ins. below the smallest tubing
restriction to be encountered.
2) Prepare the base of the LIB. Remove all marks and dents using a file and polish the
face. The LIB should then be properly protected and handled with care to prevent
damage to the prepared face.
3) Make up the LIB onto the toolstring taking care not to mark the polished face.
4) Pick up the toolstring into the lubricator and make it up to the BOP.
Note: Make sure that the toolstring is pulled up well inside the lubricator to
avoid the LIB making contact with the BOPs as the lubricator is lowered.
Remember that, as the upper hay pulley is attached to the top of the
lubricator, the cable will move down at double the rate of the lubricator.
6) Run in the hole slowly with the LIB. Stop approximately 100ft. above the object of
which an impression is required.
7) Take an accurate pick up weight.
8) Run the hole slowly and sit down gently on top of the object.
9) Pick up and partly open the jars. Jar down once only.
Note: Jarring down more than once may confuse the impression and loosen the
lead.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
10) Slowly pull out of the hole with the lead impression block.
11) When certain that the tool is inside the lubricator, close in well and bleed down
lubricator.
12) Back off the quick union and pick up lubricator.
13) Pull lubricator to one side of the Xmas tree to ensure that the LIB cannot make contact
with the top of the Xmas tree or any object as it is being lowered out of the lubricator.
14) Remove LIB for inspection, taking care not to damage the polished face.
11.6.3. Fishing Magnet

The Magnet fishing tool is designed to remove small pieces of ferrous metals from the top of
tools in the wells (Refer to figure 11.p). This tool does not have a hole through it for fluid
bypass as do other tools. The magnet is fitted with a sleeve on the outside and a spring
which compresses the sleeve to keep it below the end the magnet. Upon reaching the depth
of the fish the operator sets the tool string down gently on top of the fish. The weight of the
tool string the forces the magnet down the sleeve to pick up small pieces of wire or ferrous
metals that might be lying on top or around the fish. This should be retrieved from the well
slowly so as not to lose the particles that have been picked up.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Figure 11.P - Magnet

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
11.6.4. Type BB Pulling tool

Assuming that the necessary re-spooling, re-rigging up of lubricator etc., has been
completed, the snepper (if it had fallen off the wire) and toolstring must be recovered. This
should be a relatively simple matter of using a centralised or skirted SB or UO pulling tool
for the snepper and a skirted UO, SS or RS (a UO' pulling tool with the bottom threaded
to accept various sizes of skirt, will avoid the expense of threading both S and R bodies)
depending on the need to jar up or down to shear the toolstring, etc., off from the downhole
device. The use of an S core for the rope socket (i.e. RS or SS) is recommended due to
1
the fact that 2 /2 inch of wire will be left above the rope socket fishing neck, (a B core would
not have sufficient reach).
If there should be anything from 6ins - 2ins of wire attached to the rope socket, stopping an
SS or RS from reaching the rope socket, do not box it off with a blind box. A small piece of
wire is difficult to fish, and could hinder the retrieval of the toolstring or downhole device. A
BB or BE which have a split skirt should be used, alternatively, the skirt and body of the
UO or RS, SS can be modified to grip the rope socket leaving the wire attached.
(Refer to figure 11.q).
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Figure 11.Q - BB, BE and SS Pulling Tools

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
11.6.5. Overshot
Overshots are used to grip downhole tools when:
The fishing neck is worn or broken
There is no fishing neck (i.e. the tool has parted by unscrewing)
When a larger upward force is required than could be pulled on a standard
pulling tool.
The principle of operation of all overshots is the same. A hardened set of steel slips with
sharp upward facing teeth grip the fish. A spring assists these slips to engage initially.
However, an upward pull and upward jarring sets the slips tighter because of the tapered ID.
in the skirt.
Upward movement of the matching taper on the skirt will increase the gripping force.
OBannon Overshot
The ability of the O Bannon Overshot, (Refer to figure 11.r), to catch various items is made
possible by an upper and lower set of segmented slips which sit in tapered bowls (Dual
1
Catch Overshot). These slips are available in a /8ins. incremental range of sizes giving this
tool a broad catching range. (It is usual to select the slip size required and check the grip by
latching the same sized object at surface prior to running.)
The principle of operation of the O Bannon overshot is as follows. The overshot is run in the
tubing with the ID of the slips slightly smaller than the OD of the fish. When the slips contact
the fish the slip segments move upwards in the tapered bowls increasing the ID of the slip
arrangement. The fish will move through the slips if the ID of the slips is big enough.
On picking up the toolstring the teeth on the slips bite into the sides of the fish stopping any
movement of the slip segments. Further upward pull moves the tapered bowls up and a
wedging action makes the teeth bite tighter into the fish.
Note: O Bannon overshots have no release mechanism so they are always run
with a rope socket and latched into a shear up or shear down pulling tool.
On retrieval at surface the O Bannon overshot requires to be disassembled.

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Figure 11.R - O Bannon Overshot

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Flopetrol Releasing Overshot

The Flopetrol Releasing Overshot, see figure 11.s, performs the same function as the O
Bannon Overshot, i.e. it will catch tool assemblies or parts of assemblies which have parted
by breaking or unscrewing. However, the Flopetrol Overshot has a releasing mechanism
built into its upper assembly, that is, when the tool is subjected to downward jarring the slips
will retract and release the fish (release may be necessary if the wire needs to be changed
to a larger diameter line or a rope socket requires re-making).
The Flopetrol Overshot has a wide range of slips from 1/2ins. to 27/8ins. to fit the tool's two
different sizes of overshots.
Prior to running the overshot it is necessary to check that the correct core extension (long or
short), correct slip size, and correct shear pin (steel or brass) have been installed.
The principle of operation is as follows. On contact the slips stop at the top of the fish and
the remainder of the tool moves downwards. The spring then pushes the slips down and the
taper causes the initial grip.
An upward pull sets the slips tighter. Any upward jarring force to retrieve the fish is
transmitted through the skirt and the slips. The shear pin cannot be sheared by upward
jarring action.
Safety release is affected by downward jarring action; considerable jarring may sometimes
be required. The core remains resting on the fish - the remainder of the tool moves
downwards. Once the pin is sheared the two pawls hold the core in an upward position which
keeps the slips retracted from the taper.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Figure 11.S - Flopetrol Releasing Overshot

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
11.7. WIRE RECOVERY

Prior to commencing fishing operations under pressure, the following important points must
be noted:
When pulling wire with toolstring and /or fish, sufficient lubricator length is
required to accommodate both toolstrings above the swab valve (with both jars
open)
When the wire is open-ended, it may be forcibly ejected from the stuffing box by
the well pressure when the wire end is close to the surface. Ensure that all non-
essential personnel are excluded from the immediate area.
11.7.1. Wire Recovery Procedure

1) Pull up until the wireline grab/spear is as far up into the lubricator as possible to leave
the maximum length of wire beneath it to work with.
2) Close the BOP rams and note the travel of the manual stems. This will indicate if the
rams have successfully closed or not. If closed completely, this usually indicates the
wire bundle/birds nest is completely contained in the lubricator and the BOP rams are
closed on the fished wire.
3) Bleed down the lubricator. Close in the bleed valve and monitor lubricator pressure.
4) Before backing off the quick union, the pressure gauge should be checked and should
be reading zero pressure. The bleed off valve must be re-opened.
5) Back off the quick union and pick up the lubricator slowly, making sure that the wire
bundle/birds nest inside does not snag.
Note: The wireline operator must slack off as the lubricator is being lifted.
6) Place and secure a wireline bar clamp to the wire immediately above the BOPs.
7) Lower the fishing string out of the lubricator and remove the wireline grab/spear and
wire bundle/birds nest.
8) Rig down the lubricator (or stand it to one side).
9) If necessary, strip through enough wire to feed back through the lubricator and stuffing
box. This is done by attaching a tugger line to the bar clamp and picking up. The line is
then secured at BOP level using a second bar clamp.
Note: The wireline can also be attached to a gauge cutter and the wireline winch
used to strip the wire through the BOP.
10) Thread the tail end through the lubricator assembly and the stuffing box. Make up the
stuffing box to the lubricator and position this assembly above the clamp on top of the
BOPs.
11) Remove the wire from the unit depth counter wheel assembly (to allow the knot to be
pulled onto the drum).
12) Join the ends of the wire using a nut and a standard wireline knot.
13) Pick up tension on the line using the wireline winch. Examine the knot closely. Make
sure that it does not begin to unwind under tension.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
1) Remove the bar clamp from above the BOPs and stab on the lubricator, making up the
quick union (as the lubricator is lowered, the tension in the wireline will drop off).
2) Take up the tension in the wireline using the winch and open the equalising valve on
the BOPs.
3) Allow the pressure to equalise across the BOP and open same.
4) Pull out of the hole with the wireline until the wireline knot and several wraps are on the
drum. Place a wireline clamp on the line and slack off the tension.
5) Replace the wire in the unit depth counter wheel and take up the tension on the
wireline.
6) Remove the wireline clamp and continue to pull out of the hole.
7) Pull out of the hole carefully, observing the weight indicator closely. Any sudden
increase in weight may indicate that there is a knot or kink in the wire.
Note: When a knot is encountered, steps 1-19 must be repeated.
21) When the end of the retrieved wireline is approaching surface, ensure that all
personnel are well clear of the immediate area in case the tail end is ejected from the
well or the wire breaks unexpectedly.
22) Post a responsible person at the BOP control to be ready to close the BOPs when the
tail end reaches the surface
If there is any possibility of losing any of the strands back through the wireline valve, then
use a fishing clamp, (consisting of two pieces of angle iron back to back, bolted together so
that the wire is clamped between the plates). The clamp must be long enough to straddle the
wireline valve; (Refer to figure 11.t).
Once the wire has been clamped, it would be removed from the grab, and the grab and
pulling tool replaced by a gauge cutter. The objective now being to pull the wire as far up the
lubricator as possible. (Additional lubricator sections would be an advantage at this stage.)
The broken ends of the wire would be looped over the skirt of the gauge cutter and secured
by tying a wrap around wire knot (as per type B rope socket), or by using a 2ins length of
tube, which would make a tidier and more secure method of anchoring the wire.
The ideal sizes of tube would be:
1
0.092 wire = /4in control line.
3
0.108 wire = /8in control line or copper pipe.
3 1
/16 inch braided line = /2in copper pipe.
Caution: It is tempting at this stage to attach the gauge cutter directly onto the
rope socket. This can be dangerous, as a certain amount of weight is
required to overcome the effect of the well pressure acting on the cross-
sectional area of the wire. Failure to allow for this could cause the rope
socket and gauge cutter to be blown up to the top of the lubricator.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Figure 11.T - Fishing Clamp
11.8. TOOL RECOVERY

This procedure refers to the recovery of a stuck toolstring with a clean rope socket. Previous
to this, boxing off and LIB runs will normally have been made to prepare and check the rope
socket.
Prior to commencing any fishing operation, attempt to determine the cause of the stuck tool
from the well history. If the causes are connected with settling of debris etc., check to see if
these conditions can be removed by circulation, change of well fluid etc.
11.8.1. Tool Recovery Procedure

1) Ensure that there is enough length of lubricator above the swab valve to accommodate
the combined fishing and fished tools (with both jars open).
2) Select a suitable fishing tool and shear pin type (jar-up or jar-down release
mechanism) depending on the tool to be fished.
3) If appropriate, select the correct size of guide skirt and fit a centraliser above the
pulling tool instead of a guide skirt.
4) Make up the complete fishing string with sufficient weight (when selecting the fishing
string, consideration must be given to the combined weight of the fishing string and the
toolstring to be fished). Ensure that a spring/hydraulic jar is included in the fishing
string.
5) Pick up fishing string into lubricator after taking the zero on the tubing hanger flange.
6) Make up the lubricator quick union to the BOP.
Pressure test the lubricator and open the swab valve, counting the number of turns.
7) Run in the hole slowly, observing the weight indicator closely. Run in the hole to
approximately 100ft. above the top of the stuck tool.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
1) Take an accurate pick-up weight and run in the hole slowly. Sit down on top of the
stuck tool.
2) Pick up on the wireline and observe the weight indicator. Overpull will indicate that the
stuck tool is successfully latched. If not latched, repeat previous steps as required.
3) Once the stuck tool has been properly latched, attempt to free it using the
spring/hydraulic jars.
4) If stuck tool is freed, pull out slowly and retrieve as normal.
5) If jarring produces no result, shear off fishing tool by jarring in the appropriate
direction. Pull out and revert to fishing operations using heavier equipment.
11.9. FISHING FOR KNOWN/UNIDENTIFIED OBJECTS

Every time wireline operations take place there is always the possibility of coming across
some sort of obstruction whether it be in the Xmas tree, tubing, above an SCSSV or plug. If
this is the case then we have to find out what the obstruction may be.
In an ideal situation the down hole cameras on the market could be used but as they are
expensive and are still being experimented with basic fishing for unidentified objects would
take place. To identify and clear or free obstruction/obstructions from the well
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
12. TOOLSTRING WEIGHT FOR FLOWING WELLS
For accurate calculation of wireline toolstring weight to operate in flowing wells, it is

necessary to consider the component forces, that try to force the toolstring upwards if the
well is flowing, or downwards if an injector well.
Force due to the piston effect:
Is the differential pressure that is generated along all the length of the wireline
toolstring, produces a force that tries to push the toolstring in the direction of the
flow. This force is proportional to fluid velocity, area between tubing ID and
toolstring OD, fluid viscosity and toolstring length.
Thrust on the bottom of the toolstring:
Is the produced force which acts on the bottom surface of the toolstring that tries
to push in the direction of the flow. This is proportional to fluid velocity, the
toolstring diameter and fluid density.
Thrust due to the friction on the wireline toolstring surface:
Is the friction drag force on the toolstring surface. This is proportional to fluid
velocity, the toolstring surface finish, fluid density and friction coefficient that
depends from Reynolds number and fluid composition.
12.1. PISTON EFFECT
Variables
F2 Force due to the piston effect for each length unit of the wire line tool string
V Fluid speed at the well pressure and temperature conditions
D1 External diameter of the wire line toolstring
D2 Inside diameter of the tubing or casing
Fluid viscosity at the well pressure and temperature conditions
Table 12.A - Piston Effect Variables
The formula that represents the piston effect is as follows:

V L D12 Eq. 12.A
F2 = C F 2
D 2 D12
D 22 + D12 2
D
1n 2
D1
where:
F2 = kg (lbs)
V = m/sec (ft/sec)
L = m (ft)
D1 = mm (ins)
D2 = mm (ins)
= cp
-3 -4
CF2 = 2.6558 x 10 (5.44 x 10 )
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Tubing ID 23/8 4.7# And Wireline Toolstring Diameter Of 1.5"

Force Per Foot Length
V Viscosity [cp]
[ft/sec] 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.25 1.5 1.75 2
0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
10 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.07 0.09 0.11 0.13 0.15
20 0.04 0.07 0.11 0.15 0.19 0.22 0.26 0.30
30 0.06 0.11 0.17 0.22 0.28 0.34 0.39 0.45
40 0.07 0.15 0.22 0.30 0.37 0.45 0.52 0.60
50 0.09 0.19 0.28 0.37 0.47 0.56 0.65 0.75
60 0.11 0.22 0.34 0.45 0.56 0.67 0.79 0.90
70 0.13 0.26 0.39 0.52 0.65 0.79 0.92 1.05
80 0.15 0.30 0.45 0.60 0.75 0.90 1.05 1.20
90 0.17 0.34 0.51 0.67 0.84 1.01 1.18 1.35
100 0.19 0.37 0.56 0.75 0.94 1.12 1.31 1.50
110 0.21 0.41 0.62 0.82 1.03 1.23 1.44 1.65
120 0.22 0.45 0.67 0.90 1.12 1.35 1.57 1.80
130 0.24 0.49 0.73 0.97 1.22 1.46 1.70 1.95
140 0.26 0.52 0.79 1.05 1.31 1.57 1.83 2.10
150 0.28 0.56 0.84 1.12 1.40 1.68 1.96 2.24
160 0.30 0.60 0.90 1.20 1.50 1.80 2.10 2.39
170 0.32 0.64 0.95 1.27 1.59 1.91 2.23 2.54
180 0.34 0.67 1.01 1.35 1.68 2.02 2.36 2.69
190 0.36 0.71 1.07 1.42 1.78 2.13 2.49 2.84
200 0.37 0.75 1.12 1.50 1.87 2.24 2.62 2.99
Table 12.B - Piston Force 1.5 Toolstring And 23/8 Tubing
3.5
3 =2.00
2.5 =1.75
=1.50
2
F [lb] =1.25
1.5 =1.00
1 =0.75
=0.50
0.5
=0.25
0
0 50 100 150 200 250
V [ft/sec]
Figure 12.A - Piston Force 1.5 Toolstring And 23/8 4.7# Tubing
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0

V Viscosity [cp]
[ft/sec] 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.25 1.5 1.75 2
0 0,000 0,000 0,000 0,000 0,000 0,000 0,000 0,000
10 0,005 0,010 0,015 0,021 0,026 0,031 0,036 0,041
20 0,010 0,021 0,031 0,041 0,052 0,062 0,072 0,083
30 0,015 0,031 0,046 0,062 0,077 0,093 0,108 0,124
40 0,021 0,041 0,062 0,083 0,103 0,124 0,145 0,165
50 0,026 0,052 0,077 0,103 0,129 0,155 0,181 0,207
60 0,031 0,062 0,093 0,124 0,155 0,186 0,217 0,248
70 0,036 0,072 0,108 0,145 0,181 0,217 0,253 0,289
80 0,041 0,083 0,124 0,165 0,207 0,248 0,289 0,330
90 0,046 0,093 0,139 0,186 0,232 0,279 0,325 0,372
100 0,052 0,103 0,155 0,207 0,258 0,310 0,361 0,413
110 0,057 0,114 0,170 0,227 0,284 0,341 0,398 0,454
120 0,062 0,124 0,186 0,248 0,310 0,372 0,434 0,496
130 0,067 0,134 0,201 0,268 0,336 0,403 0,470 0,537
140 0,072 0,145 0,217 0,289 0,361 0,434 0,506 0,578
150 0,077 0,155 0,232 0,310 0,387 0,465 0,542 0,620
160 0,083 0,165 0,248 0,330 0,413 0,496 0,578 0,661
170 0,088 0,176 0,263 0,351 0,439 0,527 0,614 0,702
180 0,093 0,186 0,279 0,372 0,465 0,558 0,651 0,744
190 0,098 0,196 0,294 0,392 0,491 0,589 0,687 0,785
200 0,103 0,207 0,310 0,413 0,516 0,620 0,723 0,826
Table 12.C - Piston Force 1.5 Toolstring And 27/8 6.5# Tubing
0.9
0.8 =2.00
0.7 =1.75
0.6 =1.50
0.5 =1.25
F [lb]
0.4 =1.00
0.3 =0.75
0.2 =0.50
0.1 =0.25
0
0 50 100 150 200 250
V [ft/sec]
Figure 12.B - Piston Force 1.5 Toolstring And 27/8 5.6# Tubing
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0

V Viscosity[cp]
[ft/sec] 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.25 1.5 1.75 2
0 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
10 0.0020 0.0041 0.0061 0.0082 0.0102 0.0123 0.0143 0.0164
20 0.0041 0.0082 0.0123 0.0164 0.0205 0.0246 0.0286 0.0327
30 0.0061 0.0123 0.0184 0.0246 0.0307 0.0368 0.0430 0.0491
40 0.0082 0.0164 0.0246 0.0327 0.0409 0.0491 0.0573 0.0655
50 0.0102 0.0205 0.0307 0.0409 0.0511 0.0614 0.0716 0.0818
60 0.0123 0.0246 0.0368 0.0491 0.0614 0.0737 0.0859 0.0982
70 0.0143 0.0286 0.0430 0.0573 0.0716 0.0859 0.1003 0.1146
80 0.0164 0.0327 0.0491 0.0655 0.0818 0.0982 0.1146 0.1309
90 0.0184 0.0368 0.0552 0.0737 0.0921 0.1105 0.1289 0.1473
100 0.0205 0.0409 0.0614 0.0818 0.1023 0.1228 0.1432 0.1637
110 0.0225 0.0450 0.0675 0.0900 0.1125 0.1350 0.1575 0.1800
120 0.0246 0.0491 0.0737 0.0982 0.1228 0.1473 0.1719 0.1964
130 0.0266 0.0532 0.0798 0.1064 0.1330 0.1596 0.1862 0.2128
140 0.0286 0.0573 0.0859 0.1146 0.1432 0.1719 0.2005 0.2291
150 0.0307 0.0614 0.0921 0.1228 0.1534 0.1841 0.2148 0.2455
160 0.0327 0.0655 0.0982 0.1309 0.1637 0.1964 0.2291 0.2619
170 0.0348 0.0696 0.1043 0.1391 0.1739 0.2087 0.2435 0.2782
180 0.0368 0.0737 0.1105 0.1473 0.1841 0.2210 0.2578 0.2946
190 0.0389 0.0777 0.1166 0.1555 0.1944 0.2332 0.2721 0.3110
200 0.0409 0.0818 0.1228 0.1637 0.2046 0.2455 0.2864 0.3274
Table 12.D - Piston Force 1.5 Toolstring And 31/2 9.3# Tubing
0.35
=2.00
0.3
=1.75
0.25 =1.50
0.2 =1.25
F [lb]
0.15 =1.00
=0.75
0.1
=0.50
0.05 =0.25
0
0 50 100 150 200 250
V [ft/sec]
Figure 12.C - Piston Force 1.5 Toolstring And 31/2 9.3# Tubing
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Tubing ID 5 13.0# And Wireline Toolstring Diameter Of 1.5"

V Viscosity [cp]
[ft/sec] 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.25 1.5 1.75 2
0 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
10 0.0005 0.0010 0.0015 0.0020 0.0025 0.0030 0.0035 0.0040
20 0.0010 0.0020 0.0030 0.0040 0.0050 0.0060 0.0070 0.0080
30 0.0015 0.0030 0.0045 0.0060 0.0075 0.0090 0.0106 0.0121
40 0.0020 0.0040 0.0060 0.0080 0.0100 0.0121 0.0141 0.0161
50 0.0025 0.0050 0.0075 0.0100 0.0126 0.0151 0.0176 0.0201
60 0.0030 0.0060 0.0090 0.0121 0.0151 0.0181 0.0211 0.0241
70 0.0035 0.0070 0.0106 0.0141 0.0176 0.0211 0.0246 0.0281
80 0.0040 0.0080 0.0121 0.0161 0.0201 0.0241 0.0281 0.0322
90 0.0045 0.0090 0.0136 0.0181 0.0226 0.0271 0.0317 0.0362
100 0.0050 0.0100 0.0151 0.0201 0.0251 0.0301 0.0352 0.0402
110 0.0055 0.0111 0.0166 0.0221 0.0276 0.0332 0.0387 0.0442
120 0.0060 0.0121 0.0181 0.0241 0.0301 0.0362 0.0422 0.0482
130 0.0065 0.0131 0.0196 0.0261 0.0327 0.0392 0.0457 0.0522
140 0.0070 0.0141 0.0211 0.0281 0.0352 0.0422 0.0492 0.0563
150 0.0075 0.0151 0.0226 0.0301 0.0377 0.0452 0.0528 0.0603
160 0.0080 0.0161 0.0241 0.0322 0.0402 0.0482 0.0563 0.0643
170 0.0085 0.0171 0.0256 0.0342 0.0427 0.0512 0.0598 0.0683
180 0.0090 0.0181 0.0271 0.0362 0.0452 0.0543 0.0633 0.0723
190 0.0095 0.0191 0.0286 0.0382 0.0477 0.0573 0.0668 0.0764
200 0.0100 0.0201 0.0301 0.0402 0.0502 0.0603 0.0703 0.0804
Table 12.E - Piston Force 1.5 Toolstring And 5 13.0# Tubing
0.09
0.08 =2.00
0.07 =1.75
0.06 =1.50
0.05 =1.25
0.04 =1.00
0.03 =0.75
0.02 =0.50
0.01 =0.25
0
0 50 100 150 200 250
Figure 12.D - Piston Force 1.5 Toolstring And 5 13.0# Tubing

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
12.2. FORCE ON TOOLSTRING SECTION
Variables
Qhyd Fluid rate at the well pressure and temperature conditions
D1 External diameter of the wire line tool
Fluid rate at the well pressure and temperature conditions
Table 12.F - Force On Toolstring Section
The fluid speed is expressed by the following formula:

Q hyd 1000000 4 Eq. 12.B
V =
86400 D 22
where:
V = m/sec (ft/sec)
3 3
Qhyd = m /g (ft /sec)
2 2
D 22 = mm (ins )
-3
Cv = 14.737 (2.122 x 10 )
The thrust of the fluid on the toolstring section is expressed from the following formula:
F1 = C F1 D12 V 2 Eq. 12.C
where:
2 2
D12 = mm (ins )
V = m/sec (ft/sec)
3 3
= kg/dm (lb/ins )
-5
CF1 = 4.169 x 10 (0.0055)
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
The results of the following chart and graph are expressed in pounds.
Wireline Toolstring Diameter 1.5 [inch]

V [gr/cm]
[
[ft/sec] 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
10 0.25 0.50 0.74 0.99 1.24
20 0.99 1.98 2.97 3.96 4.95
30 2.23 4.46 6.68 8.91 11.14
40 3.96 7.92 11.88 15.84 19.80
50 6.19 12.38 18.56 24.75 30.94
60 8.91 17.82 26.73 35.64 44.55
70 12.13 24.26 36.38 48.51 60.64
80 15.84 31.68 47.52 63.36 79.20
90 20.05 40.10 60.14 80.19 100.24
100 24.75 49.50 74.25 99.00 123.75
110 29.95 59.90 89.84 119.79 149.74
120 35.64 71.28 106.92 142.56 178.20
130 41.83 83.66 125.48 167.31 209.14
140 48.51 97.02 145.53 194.04 242.55
150 55.69 111.38 167.06 222.75 278.44
160 63.36 126.72 190.08 253.44 316.80
170 71.53 143.06 214.58 286.11 357.64
180 80.19 160.38 240.57 320.76 400.95
190 89.35 178.70 268.04 357.39 446.74
200 99.00 198.00 297.00 396.00 495.00
Table 12.G - Force on 1.5 Toolstring Diameter
600
500 =1.0
400 =0.8
F [lb] 300 =0.6
200 =0.4
100 =0.2
0
0 50 100 150 200 250
V [ft/sec]
Figure 12.E - Force on 1.5 Toolstring Diameter

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
12.3. FORCE DUE TO FRICTION OF THE TOOLSTRING AT SURFACE
Variables
Qhyd Fluid rate at the well pressure and temperature conditions
D1 External diameter of the wire line tool
Fluid density at the well pressure and temperature conditions
CF Friction Factor
s Length area of the wire line tool string (Metric unit: length = 1dm- English unit length =
1 inch)
Table 12.H - Force Due To Friction Effect
The fluid speed is expressed in the following relationship:

Q hyd 1000000 4
V=
86400 D 22
Q hyd
=C V
D 22
where:
V = m/sec (ft/sec)
3 3
Qhyd = m /g (ft /sec)
2 2
D 22 = mm (ins )
-3
Cv = 14.737 (2.122 x 10 )
The thrust due to the friction on the toolstring surface is expressed in the following
relationship:
0.10797
CF = Valid if (D2 - D) <4.277 ins
(D 2 D1)2.582
0.10797
CF = Valid if (D2 - D) >4.277 ins
(D 2 D1)2.582
where:
D1 = ins
D2 = ins
therefore:
V2
F3 =K F 0.1 C F s
2
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
where:
F3 = kg (lbs)
2 2
s = dm (ins )
3 3
= kg/dm (kg/dm )
V = m/sec (ft/sec)
CF = Dimensionless
KF = 508.2552 (1.6576)
The results of the following chart and graph are expressed in pounds.
Density kg / dm3
V[ft/sec] 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
5 0.66 1.32 2.65 3.97 5.29 6.62
10 2.65 5.29 10.59 15.88 21.17 26.47
15 5.95 11.91 23.82 35.73 47.64 59.55
20 10.59 21.17 42.35 63.52 84.69 105.86
25 16.54 33.08 66.16 99.25 132.33 165.41
30 23.82 47.64 95.28 142.92 190.55 238.19
35 32.42 64.84 129.68 194.52 259.36 324.21
40 42.35 84.69 169.38 254.07 338.76 423.45
45 53.59 107.19 214.37 321.56 428.75 535.93
50 66.16 132.33 264.66 396.99 529.32 661.65
Table 12.I - Friction Force 1.5 Toolstring And 23/8 4.6# Tubing
700
=1.0
600
=0.8
500
400 =0.6
F3[lb]
300
=0.4
200
=0.2
100
=0.1
0
0 20 40 60
V[ft/sec]
Figure 12.F - Friction Force 1.5 Toolstring And 23/8 4.6# Tubing
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0

Density kg / dm3
V[ft/sec] 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
5 0.12 0.25 0.49 0.74 0.99 1.24
10 0.49 0.99 1.98 2.97 3.95 4.94
15 1.11 2.22 4.45 6.67 8.90 11.12
20 1.98 3.95 7.91 11.86 15.82 19.77
25 3.09 6.18 12.36 18.54 24.71 30.89
30 4.45 8.90 17.79 26.69 35.59 44.49
35 6.05 12.11 24.22 36.33 48.44 60.55
40 7.91 15.82 31.63 47.45 63.27 79.09
45 10.01 20.02 40.04 60.06 80.07 100.09
50 12.36 24.71 49.43 74.14 98.86 123.57
Table 12.J - Friction Force 1.5 Toolstring And 27/8 6.5# Tubing
140
=1.0
120
100 =0.8
80
=0.6
F3[lb]
60
=0.4
40
=0.2
20
=0.1
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
V[ft/sec]
Figure 12.G - Friction Force 1.5 Toolstring And 27/8 6.5# Tubing
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0

Density kg / dm3
V[ft/sec] 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
5 0.04 0.07 0.15 0.22 0.30 0.37
10 0.15 0.30 0.59 0.89 1.19 1.48
15 0.33 0.67 1.33 2.00 2.67 3.34
20 0.59 1.19 2.37 3.56 4.75 5.93
25 0.93 1.85 3.71 5.56 7.41 9.27
30 1.33 2.67 5.34 8.01 10.68 13.35
35 1.82 3.63 7.27 10.90 14.53 18.17
40 2.37 4.75 9.49 14.24 18.98 23.73
45 3.00 6.01 12.01 18.02 24.02 30.03
50 3.71 7.41 14.83 22.24 29.66 37.07
Table 12.K - Friction Force 1.5 Toolstring And 31/2 9.3# Tubing
40
=1.0
35
30 =0.8
25
=0.6
F3[lb] 20
15 =0.4
10
=0.2
5
=0.1
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
V[ft/sec]
Figure 12.H - Friction Force 1.5 Toolstring And 31/2 9.3# Tubing
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Tubing ID 5 13.0# And Wireline Toolstring Diameter Of 1.5"

Density kg / dm3
V[ft/sec] 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
5 0.01 0.01 0.02 0.04 0.05 0.06
10 0.02 0.05 0.10 0.14 0.19 0.24
15 0.05 0.11 0.22 0.32 0.43 0.54
20 0.10 0.19 0.38 0.58 0.77 0.96
25 0.15 0.30 0.60 0.90 1.20 1.50
30 0.22 0.43 0.87 1.30 1.73 2.16
35 0.29 0.59 1.18 1.77 2.36 2.95
40 0.38 0.77 1.54 2.31 3.08 3.85
45 0.49 0.97 1.95 2.92 3.90 4.87
50 0.60 1.20 2.40 3.61 4.81 6.01
Table 12.L - Friction Force 1.5 Toolstring And 5 13.0# Tubing
6 =1.0
5
=0.8
F3[lb] =0.6
=0.4
2
=0.2
1
=0.1
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
V[ft/sec]
Figure 12.I - Friction Force 1.5 Toolstring And 5 13.0# Tubing

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
13. WIRELINE TESTING
There are two methods of testing slickline, the torsion test and the Eddy current test. Both of
these are detailed in this section.
13.1. TORSION TEST

The portable torsion tester has been designed to be able to test the condition of wireline
materials in the field in compliance with API 9A.
13.1.1. Test Objective

To measure the number of twists an 8ins long sample piece of wireline can withstand before
breakage occurs. Recording these results in a log, enables a performance curve to be drawn
showing the life span of a wireline in relationship to it's usage. This highlights the current
embrittlement condition of a wireline prior to carrying out any further wireline operations.
13.1.2. Procedure
1) Pull approx. 50ft of wire from the drum, cut a small length and prepare a specimen
(Refer to figure 13.a).
2) Place the specimen through the jaws of the tester. Set the jaws at the appropriate
marks which provide the wire gauge length of 8ins. between the jaws.
3) Tighten down the Allen holding screws sufficiently to hold the wire in place during the
test.
4) Close the torsion tester lid and secure the latch.
5) Rotate the handle at a constant rate of approx. 60 turns/min (60rpm) until the wire
breaks. Count and record the number of turns taken to break the wire, if the total of
rotations is not a whole number, round them up if the part rotation is equal to or greater
than a half turn.
6) Unlatch and open the lid, remove the wire ends from the jaws and inspect the break to
observe if it is a clean shear or not (Refer to fracture analysis section 0). Enter the
number of turns or rotations into the log book and any relevant information from the
analysis.
7) A torsion test should be carried out at the start of all wireline rig up operations and
after every time a new rope socket connection is made. If the number of rotations is
less than the API or manufacturers guidelines, refer to the wireline test analysis section
13.1.3.
8) The wireline job history should also be entered into the log book along which helps
identify operations that cause fast deterioration rates.
API 9A Torsion Limits

0.072 29
0.082 26
0.092 23
0.108 20
Table 13.A - API A9 Acceptable Torsion Limits
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Figure 13.A - Typical Wireline Specimen Preparation
13.1.3. Wireline Test Analysis

Acceptance
If the number of turns is within satisfactory limits, the test piece is deemed to have passed
the test, irrespective of the position of the failure. If the number of turns does not satisfy the
1
requirements of the specification and if failure is within /8 ins of the grips, the test shall be
considered as invalid and shall be repeated.
If, when making any individual test, the first specimen fails then two additional specimens
shall be tested as confirmation. The average from any two tests will then be taken as
representation of the wire. If these are also failures, 500ft of wire will be pulled from the drum
and the test repeated. On further failure of the tests, a maximum of two more 500ft lengths
shall be removed and tests conducted again. If after this, the wireline still fails the tests, the
WirelineL Supervisor should be informed so as to make a decision on the disposition of the
line.
Torsion Fracture Analysis

The significance of the torsion test is not fully appreciated by some personnel as a definitive
wire quality arbiter for carbon steel wirelines. It is not only the number of twists to failure that
is important, but more specifically, whether the material exhibits a ductile or a brittle
primary fracture. In general, three types of primary wire fracture may be encountered at the
conclusion of a torsion test, these are categorised by API as follows.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Fracture Classification
Grade 1 Fracture without Secondary Breaks
After testing, the sample should contain a
single fracture which is square ended
(sometimes referred to as a Ball and
Socket break). There should be no
evidence of spiral splitting on the sample
and no secondary fractures.
This type of fracture is characteristic in
wire a in suitable condition for continued
use. It is usually related to high numbers
of turns before failure.
F
i
gure 13.B - Single-Square Ended Primary
Fracture
Grade 1 Fracture with Secondary Breaks

Sometimes a grade 1 fracture may be
accompanied by a secondary helical-
shaped fracture. This secondary fracture
is a result of the instantaneous release of
stored energy when the primary fracture
occurs. It is termed a recoil fracture.
Although a recoil fracture indicates a
slight reduction in torsional strength and
ductility, it can be discounted. The main
concern is the primary fracture and this is
a true reflection of the wire condition.
F
igure 13.C - Single-Square Ended Primary
Fracture with Secondary Breaks
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Grade 2 Fractures
Although containing a square-ended
break, a grade 2 sample primary fracture
may be slightly stepped.
Secondary helical fractures may be
present and slight spiral splitting may
also be in evidence.
This type of primary fracture is usually
associated with a lower number of turns
before failure.
F
igure 13.D- Slightly Stepped Primary Fracture
Grade 3 Fractures
This primary fracture will show a severely
stepped or helical type break, usually
associated with secondary fractures.
Spiral splitting will almost certainly be
present along with localised twisting.
A secondary break is not usually present
as the primary break is associated with a
low number of turns to failure.
This sample would be unacceptable for
further use. Re-testing would be required
after spooling off approximately 500ft of
wire.
Figure 13.E- Single -Helical Spear Type

Fracture
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
13.1.4. General Guidance Notes

It should be noted that any torsion test performed relates only to the test piece and does not
guarantee the quality of the remaining length of wireline.
In the event of obtaining a Grade 2 or Grade 3 type fracture characteristics, two repeat tests
shall be performed. If the quality of a wireline is variable, it is permissible to cut off a length
(say 200ft) and re-test. Two re-tests should both give Grade 1 type fractures. This procedure
may, if necessary, be repeated since it is well known that the ductility of a wireline
deteriorates more rapidly at bottom hole temperatures.
13.2. EDDY CURRENT NDT

The Non Destructive Test (NDT) on slickline is carried out, and recorded, using an industry
accepted method termed the Eddy Current Inspection Technique to locate cracks, pittings,
scratches and variation of diameter. It must be performed according to the specification.
The first test must be recorded on all the wire length, at the time that it is first wound onto the
wireline winch drum. This test is used as a correlation log to help analyse future wire
examinations.
The test frequency is decided by the Wireline Superintendent and may be influenced by the
quantity and type of operations carried out and well environment. It is recommended that this
test is performed after operations where the pull on the wireline has exceeded 50% of the
breaking strength and always after heavy jar action.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
14. WIRELINE ANGLE AND STRETCH CORRECTION FACTORS
14.1. LINE STRETCH CALCULATION

The load registered on the weight indicator of the wireline unit does not indicate the total
load exerted on the line.
o
If the angle between the wireline approaching and leaving the hay pulley is 90 then the
reading on the weight indicator will be correct except for any malfunctioning of the weight
indicator itself (Refer to figure 14.a).
o
If the angle between the wireline entering and exiting the hay pulley is less than 90 then the
reading on the weight indicator will be higher than the actual load on the line. Refer to
example #1.
o
If the angle between the line entering and exiting the hay pulley is more than 90 then the
reading on the weight indicator will be lower than the actual load on the line. Refer to
example #2.
Using the table and formulae provided, the actual (resultant) load on the line can be
calculated prior to wireline operations (Refer to examples #1 and #2).
Figure 14.A - Wireline Angle Correction

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Correction
Included Angle Correction Factor Included Angle
Factor
40 1.87938 92 1.38932
42 1.86716 94 1.36400
44 1.85436 96 1.33826
46 1.84100 98 1.31212
48 1.82708 100 1.20362
50 1.81262 102 1.7556
52 1.79758 104 1.4716
54 1.78202 106 1.11838
56 1.76590 108 1.08928
58 1.74924 110 1.05984
60 1.73206 112 1.03008
62 1.71434 114 1.0000
64 1.69610 116 0.96962
66 1.67734 118 0.93894
68 1.65808 120 0.90798
70 1.63830 122 0.87674
72 1.61804 124 0.84524
74 1.59726 126 0.81348
76 1.57602 128 0.78146
78 1.55430 130 0.84542
80 1.53208 132 0.81348
82 1.50942 134 0.78146
84 1.48626 136 0.74922
86 1.46270 138 0.71674
88 1.43868 140 0.68404
90 1.4.1422 142 0.65114
Table 14.A- Wireline Angle Correction Factors
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
a) Example #1
o
Angles below 90 means the weight indicator dial reads higher than actual resultant force.
e.g. Angle between entry and exit line =
o
70
Pull on line 1,000lbs.
o
= 1,000 x 1.63830 (factor for 70 from
table 14.a) 1.41422 (factor for
o
90 from table 14.a)
1.63830
= 1,000 x
1.41422
= 1,000 x 1.158
= 1,158lbs WT indicator reads 1,158
o
when resultant is 1,000lbs at 70
o
Angle above 90 then weight indicator
dial reads lower than actual resultant.
b) Example 2
e.g. Angle between entry and exit line =
o
110
Pull on line 1,000lbs.
o
= 1,000 x 1.14716 (factor for 110
from table 14.a) 1.41422 (factor
o
for 90 table 14.a)
1.14716
= 1,000 x 1.41422
= 811lbs.
WT indicator reads 811lbs when
o
resultant is 1,000lbs at 110
Figure 14.B- Examples 1 and 2
To interpolate odd number angles not given in the following chart, calculate according to
above formulae the resultant of the angle for one degree less and one degree more than the
angle desired by splitting the difference. (Figures provided by Martin Decker)
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
14.2. CALCULATION OF LINE STRETCH

The stretch in the wireline is the length of line in the well multiplied by the average of the
stretch in the first and last foot length. Although during regular wireline operations the line
stretch is seldom considered, it may become necessary, e.g. during slick line logging, to
know this to calculate the actual tool-depth.
The stretch factor for 0.108ins wireline, shown below, has been calculated using the typical
modular values from the manufacturer.
Size Modular value Weight/1,000ft

-5
API 9A 0.092 6.9 x 10 22.65lbs
-5
0.108 4.9 x 10 31.11lbs
-5
0.125 3.7 x 10 41.80lbs
-5
SUPA 75 0.092 7.8 x 10 23.40lbs
-5
0.108 5.7 x 10 32.10lbs
-5
0.125 4.3 x 10 43.20lbs
Table 14.B - 0.108ins Wireline Stretch Factors
The total line stretch can be worked out by using the following formula:
[F(Wt) + F(Wt + Wl)] x L
Total stretch = 2
Where total stretch is in inches:
-5
F = Stretch factor, inches/foot/lbs (0.108ins = 4.9 x 10 )
Wt = Weight of toolstring (lbs)
WI = Weight of wireline in well (lbs)
L = Length of line in well (ft)
Example: 0.108 inch API-9A wire, length 10,000ft
31.11 lbs
Nominal weight =
1,000 ft
so:
WI = 311.1lbs
-5
F = 4.9 x 10
Say tool weight Wt = 200lbs
Total stretch:
[(4.9 x 10 - 5 x 200) + 4.9 x 10 - 5 (200 + 311.1)] x 10,000
=
2
[(0.0098 + 0.025)] x 1,000
=
2
= 174 ins
Note: It is assumed that there is no temperature variation.

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
15. WIRELINE EQUIPMENT NDT PROCEDURES
The wireline system is defined as the package required to conduct wireline operations on a
well and includes the winch, power pack, pressure control equipment and all other relevant
auxiliary equipment.
All surface equipment and the wireline cable must have a series of periodical non-destructive
tests (NDT) carried out upon it according to the procedures described in the following
sections and in accordance with the schedules provided.
A visual inspection must be conducted periodically on all the equipment before each
pressure test. The visual inspections are described in section 15.2.
Hydraulic pressure tests must be carried out periodically on all the equipment with water in a
proper approved test facility. All tests must be carried out twice and recorded on a chart
recorder.
Radiographic, magnetic (Magnaflux) and ultrasonic examinations must be carried out only
by specialised contractors listed on the Companys vendor list.
A copy of the current certificate (i.e. the record of the last hydraulic test and the last non-
destructive examination) must be attached to the all surface equipment.
All the surface equipment must be marked with a unique identification code on a
alphanumeric nameplate, from which it must be possible to identify the equipment number,
working pressure, type of material and type of service.
The Wireline Supervisor (if applicable) and the Contractors Quality Assurance Manager, or
his appointed delegate, are responsible for the registration of the tests and for the correct
procedures to be followed.
All the tests performed on every single item of the surface equipment must be recorded in
the Test Register.
The register must record the procedure and the time/date of the tests on the following report
forms:
NDT Visual Inspection Report (figure 15.a)
NDT Test Pressure BOP Report ()
NDT Test Pressure Lubricator Equipment Report ()
NDT Magnetic/ Ultrasonic Examination Report ()
NDT Radiographic Examination Report ()
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
15.1. SURFACE EQUIPMENT TEST SCHEDULES

The test frequency schedules given in the following sub-sections is for all equipment from
5,000 through 20,000psi WP.
15.1.1. Stuffing Box

A visual inspection must be carried out every 12 months as per section 15.2.1.
A pressure test must be recorded every 12 months as per section 15.2.2.
A body inspection should be performed with magnetic or ultrasonic technique
every 24 months as per section 15.2.4.
A thread inspection should be performed, by the magnetic technique with liquid
dye penetration, every 24 months as per section 15.2.4.
A weld inspection should be performed, by an ultrasonic or radiographic
technique, every 24 months as per section 15.2.5.
15.1.2. Safety Check Union

15.1.3. Injection Nipple

15.1.4. Lubricator (5,000 through 20,000psi WP)

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
15.1.5. BOPs
15.1.6. Adapter Flange

15.2. EQUIPMENT NDT PROCEDURES

15.2.1. Visual Inspection Procedure
The following inspection procedure must be performed before any pressure testing:
1) Visually inspect the internals of all assemblies to detect for grooving caused by wire
cutting, the presence of cuttings and measure the ID to detect for any thickness
reduction.
2) Visually inspect each quick union to check for damage of the thread, in particular on
the sealing surfaces and grooves.
3) Visually inspect the BOP with special attention taken to sealing surfaces, elastomer
condition and hydraulic connections.
4) Visually inspect the adapter flange the ring joint seats taking particular attention.
5) For each examined element, an NDT Visual Inspection Report must be filled in and
carefully registered by the Eni-Agip Wireline Superintendent (if applicable) or the
Contractors QA Manager.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
15.2.2. Lubricator Component Pressure Test Procedure

The pressure test procedure described herein is for the pressure containing lubricator
assembly equipment (adapter flange, lubricator sections/risers, stuffing box, safety check
union and injection nipple).
1) Pressurise the assembly using water up to the rated working pressure and hold
pressure for 15min.
2) Check for leaks and then bleed off the pressure.
3) Repeat the previous steps again.
4) After bleeding off the pressure, check the condition of the sealing elements.
5) All tests will be recorded on paper chart and/or on magnetic support and attached to
the Test Report.
6) For each examined component, the NDT Report: Test Pressure Lubricator
Equipment must be filled in and carefully registered by the Eni-Agip Wireline
Superintendent (if applicable) or by the Contractor QA Manager.
15.2.3. BOP Pressure Test Procedure

1) Pressurise the assembly with water up to the rated working pressure with the rams
open. Hold the pressure for 15min.
2) Check for leaks and then bleed off the pressure.
3) Repeat the previous steps again.
4) After bleeding off the pressure, check the condition of the sealing elements.
5) All tests will be recorded on paper chart and/or on magnetic support and attached to
the Test Report.
6) For each examined component, the NDT Report: Test Pressure BOP must be filled
in and carefully registered by the Eni-Agip Wireline Superintendent (if applicable) or by
the Contractor QA Manager.
15.2.4. Magnetic/Ultrasonic Examination Procedure

This procedure is for Magnetic Particle Examination, Ultrasonic Examination and Liquid Dye
Penetrant Examination
1) These examinations will only be carried out by Eni-Agip vendor listed companies.
2) The examination will be carried out as per the following Eni-Agip specifications:
TECN-708444-S-0400
TECN-708444-S-0401
TECN-708444-S-0402.
3) For each component examined a NDT Report: Magnetic/Ultrasonic Examination

must be filled in and the NDT Contractor report must be attached. These documents
must be registered by the Eni-Agip Wireline Superintendent (if applicable) or by the
Contractor QA Manager.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
15.2.5. Radiographic Examination (X-Ray) Procedure

1) These examinations will only be carried out by Eni-Agip vendor listed companies.
2) The examination will be carried out as per the ASME Section 5-2, and ASME 8 div. 1
appendix 6-UW 51 specifications.
3) For each component examined a NDT Report: Radiographic Examination must be
filled in and the NDT Contractors report attached. These documents must be
registered by the Eni-Agip Wireline Superintendent (if applicable) or by the Contractor
QA Manager.
15.2.6. Hardness Test Procedure

1) Hardness tests of the material must be included as part of the documentation for each
item.
2) The surface equipment for standard service manufactured from 80,000psi minimum
yield strength material must have at least a hardness value of 200 Brinnell. The
surface equipment for standard service manufactured from 110,000psi minimum yield
strength material must have a hardness value between 290 Brinnell (30 Rockwell C)
and 341 Brinnell (36 Rockwell C).
3) The surface equipment for H2S rated service must have a hardness value not higher
than 22 Rockwell C.
15.3. NDT REPORT FORMS

The report forms overleaf should be used for the procedures detailed in the previous
sections.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
15.3.1. Visual Inspection Report
NDT REPORT TOOL CODE
VISUAL INSPECTION
DATE : TOOL DESCRIPTION :
PIPING
1) Internal Wire-Line caused indentions Yes No
2) Cuttings Yes No
3) Thickness decrease Yes No
Quantity in mm :
QUICK UNION
1) Female thread damage Yes No
2) Male thread damage Yes No
3) Female seal surface damage Yes No
4) Seal - Unit damage Yes No
5) Internal Wire-Line caused indentations Yes No
6) Cuttings Yes No
ADAPTER
1) Thread damage Yes No
2) Seal surface damage Yes No
3) Internal Wire-Line caused indentations Yes No
4) Cuttings Yes No
5) Ring - Joint seat damage Yes No
BOP
1) Internal Wire-Line caused indenations Yes No
2) Cuttings Yes No
3) Hydraulic connections damage Yes No
4) Rams Seal - Unit Acceptable Non Accept.
5) Pistons Seal - Unit Acceptable Non Accept.
Rapairing Job Performed :
TOOL ACCEPTED Yes No
Signature Signature
Figure 15.A - NDT Visual Inspection Report

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
15.3.2. Pressure Test Report
PRESSURE TEST
Lubricator Equipment
PRESSURE TEST PRESSURE TEST

( 1st Cycle ) ( 2nd Cycle )
Pressure Pressure
TIME Elapsed Time 2 TIME Elapsed Time 2
Kg/cm Kg/cm
Leaks Detected :
Seals condition at test end :
1)
2)
3)
Repairing Job Performed Reference Files
Signature Signature
Figure 15.B - NDT Lubricator Component Pressure Test Report

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
15.3.3. BOP Pressure Test Report
PRESSURE TEST B.O.P.
RAMS OPEN RAMS OPEN

Pressure Pressure
Kg/cm Kg/cm
RAMS CLOSED RAMS CLOSED

Pressure Pressure
Kg/cm Kg/cm
Leaks detected :
Rams condition at test end :
Repairing Job Performed Reference Files
Signature Signature
Figure 15.C - NDT BOP Pressure Test Report

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
15.3.4. Magnetic/Ultrasonic Examination Report
TOOL CODE
NDT REPORT
MAGNETIC / ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION
ULTRASONIC INSPECTION
INTERNAL LENGTHWISE
EXTERNAL CROSSWISE
THICKNESS
MAGNETIC PARTICLE INSPECTION
INTERNAL PIN
EXTERNAL BOX
BOROSCOPE CONTROL
OTHER CONTROLS
Defect Detected :
Contractor : Report n :
Ticket n :
Signature Signature
Figure 15.D - NDT Magnetic/Ultrasonic Test Report

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
15.3.5. Radiographic Examination Report
RADIOGRAPHIC EXAMINATION
TEST EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION :
RECORDING SITE :
SAFETY EQUIPMENT :
Welding n Accepted
Position Not Accepted
Welding n Accepted
Welding n Accepted
Welding n Accepted
Defect Detectedi :
Contractor : Report n :
Ticket n :
Signature Signature
Figure 15.E - NDT Radiographic Test Report

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
15.4. FIELD TESTS

Before the rig up of surface equipment a visual inspection must be performed as per
following procedure:
1) Visually inspect the internal surface of all the lubricator components to ensure that
there is no grooving due to the wireline cable, there are no shavings and verify there is
no thickness reduction. This visual inspection must take place before any pressure
tests.
2) Visually inspect each quick union to observe for any thread, seal surfaces or groove
damage.
3) Visually inspect the BOP with particular attention to the seal surfaces, condition of the
elastomeric seals and hydraulic connections. This visual inspection must also be
carried out before the pressure tests.
4) Visually inspect the adapter flange, taking particular attention to the ring joint seats.
15.4.2. Pressure Test Procedure

Primary Pressure Test
The Company Representative is responsible for the pressure test procedure being carried
out on the lubricator equipment and the BOP functional test before use on the well. This is
carried out after rigging up on the well in order to test all the connections.
Note: The BOP should be function and pressure tested on the deck before
rigging up including a pressure test against the rams.
Pressure testing may be carried out via a line directly onto the lubricator or through the
Xmas tree kill wing, if applicable.
1) After completing rigging up with the toolstring in the lubricator and the Xmas tree
valves closed, connect the test pump to the lubricator.
2) With the lubricator bleed off valve open and the stuffing box packing de-energised,
pump water (dosed with glycol if hydrate formation is a risk) and fill the lubricator.
3) Close the bleed off valve and energise the stuffing box.
4) Slowly bring the pump pressure up to the test pressure according to the well
programme but never to exceed the lubricator assembly WP (which is the WP of the
lowest rated component).
5) Hold the pressure for 10min observing that there is no leakage.
6) Bleed off the pressure, record the test in the daily report and begin well operations.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Subsequent Pressure Tests

Subsequent tests may be performed test using the well fluid pressure before making any
further runs.
The pressure test will be carried out as per the followings procedure:
1) With the lubricator installed and the bleed off valve closed, slowly open the swab valve
until pressure is observed on the gauge on the bleed off port. Stop the opening the
valve and allow the pressure to stabilise.
2) Verify the SITHP pressure on the gauge.
3) Check for any leaks on the adapter flanges, quick unions or stuffing box.
4) If there is no leakage, fully open the swab valve.
5) Continue with operations.
15.5. INSPECTION OF WIRELINE AND CABLE

Non Destructive Tests (NDT) must be recorded periodically on both wireline and cable in
order to verify if there is any wear, stress cracking, pitting or diameter variation. These test
are fully described earlier in section 13.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
16. SAFETY
16.1. POLICY
It is the policy of the company to conduct world-wide operations in a manner to protect the
personnel, the environment and property, and which conforms with applicable legislative
requirements.
Although there is a company responsibility for safe operating practices, it is also incumbent
upon each employee or contractor also to work safely.
16.2. SAFETY AUDIT

A safety audit should be conducted for all well operations to ensure that the documentation,
procedures and equipment to be used is effective in achieving and maintaining adequate
levels of health and safety. The audit should identify all potential hazards and be able to
rectify any practical health and safety standards in line with the company policy and legal
requirements.
Safety audits should be drafted locally for each installation to comply with local legislation.
16.3. RISK ASSESSMENT

A risk assessment should be carried out for each operation to identify potential hazards and
estimate the extent of the risk from these hazards. With regard to wireline operations this
should include handling of the tools and equipment, rigging up procedure, the equipment
suitability, the specific well operation procedure, rigging down procedure, level of exposure
to toxic well fluids or chemicals provided and radioactive substances.
Any hazards identified should be weighted in the assessment to evaluate the level of risk
and prioritise appropriate preventive measures.
16.4. SAFETY TRAINING

To minimise the risk of personnel accidents, both Company and contract staff should be
trained to work safely. This training is aimed at personnel being able to conduct their work
competently and safely. If any crew are observed to have not had adequate training, this
should be immediately reported to the Wireline Supervisor for action to be instigated.
New staff should have receive induction training which will make them aware of potential
hazards they may encounter on their first well site.
16.5. PERSONNEL SAFETY EQUIPMENT

All contract companies must supply their personnel with the adequate Personnel Protective
Equipment, (PPE) This equipment must be up to normal company standards and as per
contract.
Any equipment required above this will be supplied by the company (Breathing Apparatus
sets, safety harness, etc.)
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
16.6. WIRELINE UNIT SAFETY EQUIPMENT

The wireline unit shall be safely located and shall be properly secured to prevent movement
when the wireline tension is applied.
The power pack shall be positioned and only operated in areas designated as safe, in
accordance with IP Moral Code of Safe Practices in the Petroleum Industry which classifies
areas as:
Zone 0.
In which a flammable atmosphere is continuously present, or for long periods
(more than 1,000 hours per year).
Zone 1.
In which a flammable atmosphere is likely to occur in normal operation (about 10
to 1,000 hours per year).
Zone 2.
In which a flammable atmosphere is not likely to occur in normal operation, and if
it occurs will exist only for a short period ( less than 10hrs per year).
The wireline unit must be properly guarded to prevent personnel injury.

Lubricator equipment must be properly tested (NDT) and certified in accordance with section
15.2. Lifting tackle must also be properly certified and attached to the lifting points provided
on the equipment.
The operator must check the unit and the tools regularly to ensure they are in good
operating condition according to the manufacturers instructions, especially:
a) Hydraulic hoses and connections.
b) Power pack oil and fuel levels daily as well as leaks.
c) Shut-down systems should be tested before using the unit.
d) The wire must be tested before use with a torsion tester, refer to section 13.1.
e) Ensure all guards are in place and secured before using the unit.
16.7. OPERATIONAL SAFETY

16.7.1. General
Wireline operations are potentially hazardous in not conducted by trained personnel with
suitable well maintained equipment. The following operation safety points should be adhered
to:
a) Personnel must wear mandatory safety gear when working with wireline
equipment and tools. This safety wear includes; safety boots, hard hat, coveralls,
gloves, eye protection.
b) If H2S is present, the crew must be specifically trained in the local H2S
procedures.
c) Safe access must be made available to the top of the Xmas tree. Personnel must
not climb up the tree.
d) Adequate lighting must be provided for work in the dark.
e) All hand tools must be kept in good condition. Anti-sparking tools must be
supplied.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
a) Ear defenders must be worn whenever local regulations on noise levels are
reached or if the operator deem it necessary. As a rule of thumb, ear protection
should be worn if it is necessary to shout to be heard.
b) The handling of chemicals must be in accordance to local Control of Exposure to
Hazardous Substances Regulations.
16.7.2. Site Safety

a) Escape routes from the Xmas tree must be available and clearly marked or
roped off.
b) The winch must always be secured to the ground or deck.
c) Adequate lifting equipment must be available for the lifting of the lubricator onto
and off from the Xmas tree.
16.8. H2S PROCEDURES

Hydrogen Sulphide (H2S) or sour gas can be found at any work site or at any process plant.
It is formed by sulphate reducing bacteria in oil producing wells.
The safe working with H2S is controlled by COSHH regulations and within Eni-Agip, the
Company Health and Safety System.
16.8.1. General H2S Guidelines

a) Prior to commencing operations, all personnel should have received the training
laid out under the company guidelines, as detailed in the Health and Safety
System. Trainees must never be allowed to work on H2S sites.
b) Warning signs should be posted and all areas effected roped off.
c) Only essential personnel should be within the work area.
d) If an H2S leak is suspected or confirmed and cannot be contained immediately,
then persons in areas and follow the emergency procedures.
e) Never enter or work in an enclosed space or area where there is an H2S risk with
wearing breathing apparatus.
f) Never work alone or be unsupervised by a person in a safe are within an H2S
hazardous area.
16.8.2. Operational H2S Guidelines

a) All Eni-Agip personnel will generally be required to follow company procedures
and safety equipment.
b) All areas where potential danger of free H2S can be present should have
continuous gas monitoring taking place using either fixed or portable monitors,
with audible and visual alarms, activated whenever the concentration of H2S in
air exceeds 10ppm. All personnel should also where personnel H2S monitors.
c) All surface pressure control equipment should conform to NACE MR-01075
standards.
d) All wireline tools unsuitable for H2S service shall be plunged in a bath of
corrosion of corrosion inhibitor before being exposed to a H2S environment. All
landing nipples, subsurface devices and plugs shall be suitable for H2S service.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
a) Improved plough steel (IPS) wireline shall only be used in a H2S environment (up
to 50ppm in stream) in conjunction with corrosion inhibitor. In a H2S environment
above 50ppm. consideration should be given to using specialised wireline such
as Bridon Supa 70 or similar.
b) When H2S is present all elastomer seals, including the packing of the stuffing
box, should be made of Viton.
c) Prior to operations commencing, a meeting with all parties concerned with any
operations during the wireline programme must be held to establish hazardous
areas, safe areas, escape routes, etc.
d) Where H2S levels are higher than 50ppm, then a buddy system should be
implemented, i.e. where every operator must constantly in sight of another
person who can raise the alarm in case of an emergency.
e) A communication network is recommended (e.g. radios) between all crew
members is recommended.
Note: This may prove in-operable where personnel are masked up in BA sets
and also due to high noise levels in certain areas.
j) The wireline lubricator should be flushed from top to bottom with water to absorb
any H2S present prior to breaking the lubricator connection.
k) A Gas detector should be used to check for the presence of H2S prior to
breaking the lubricator connection.
16.8.3. Safety Recommendations

a) No H2S should be allowed to escape to atmosphere in a place where it can
accumulate and be dangerous.
b) If a leak develops, every effort should be made to stop the leak at once.
c) BA sets must be used in all operations where personnel might be in contact with
H2S, i.e. breaking the lubricator connection.
d) Adequate BA sets or equipment should be supplied to meet the requirements of
everyone working in the area.
16.8.4. Emergency Procedure

When a H2S alarm is activated, the following procedures should be followed by Eni-Agip
personnel:
a) Obtain a BA set/escape mask and mask up immediately.
b) If it is obvious an equipment failure to atmosphere has occurred, the well should
be closed in immediately using the Surface Valve on the wellhead Surface tree. If
relevant, and safe to do so, the wireline valve should be used as an alternative.
c) Warn all personnel in the area and leave immediately to a safe are upwind of the
incident.
d) The control room should be informed of the situation and/or H2S alarms
activated.
e) Upon safe to do so an investigation team should be formed to investigate the
leak. The team should comprise of at least two members with sufficient air
supply for 30min.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
a) Once the source of the leak has been found then the appropriate remedial action
should be taken.
Personal and portable H2S monitors to be used

<10ppm
in all hazards areas
Mask up with BA set for any operations that
10-50ppm
vent gas
BA set to be masked up and worn continuously
>50ppm
in hazardous areas
Table 16.A - H2S Level Equipment Requirements
16.9. CORROSIVE AND HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES

All wireline operations which require the use of corrosive or hazardous substances shall be
performed within the following general rules:
a) All persons involved in operations which require the use of corrosive or
hazardous substances shall be fully briefed on the procedures. precautions and
first aid procedures required.
b) The transport, handing and storage and use of any corrosive or hazardous
substance shall be carried out in accordance with the Health and Safety at work
Act and COSHH regulation chemical data sheet for that substance.
c) Protective clothing appropriate to the hazard shall be worn in accordance with
COSHH regulation chemical data sheets.
d) Corrosive and Hazardous substances shall be disposed of in a manner
appropriate to the hazard involved and in accordance with COSHH chemical data
sheets.
e) Any person exposed to a hazardous substance through inhalation, ingestion,
absorption through or in contact with shall receive first aid. Contaminated
clothing should be removed and treated and disposed of as appropriate.
16.10. REPORTING OF SAFETY INCIDENTS

All safety incidents resulting in personnel accidents and dangerous occurrences must be
reported immediately according to local regulations and appropriate report forms.
The Wireline Superintendent is responsible for investigation of any such incidents and to
recommend preventative measures.
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Appendix A - Report Forms

A.1. Initial Activity Report (ARPO 01)
INITIAL ACTIVITY WELL NAME
FIELD NAME
District/Affiliate Company
DATE:
REPORT ARPO 01 Cost center
Permit/Concession N Well Code
General Data Depth Above S.L . Joint venture

On shore Off shore Ground Level[m] AGIP: % %
Latitude: Water Depth [m] % %
Longitude Rotary Table Elev.[m] % %
Reference First Flange[m] Type of Operation

Rig Name Top housing [m]
Rig Type Reference Rig Program TD (Measured) [m]

Contractor Ref. Rig RKB - 1st Flange Program TD (Vertical) [m]
Rig Heading [] Cellar Pit Rig Pump

Offset FROM the proposed location Depth [m] Manufacturer
Distance [m] Length [m] Type
Direction [] Width [m]: Liner avaible [in]
Major Contractors
Type of Service Company Contract N Type of Service Company Contract N
Mud Logging
D. & C. Fluids
Cementation
Waste treatment
Operating Time Jack-up leg Penetration Supply Vessel for Positioning

Moving [gg:hh] Leg Air gap Penetration N Name Horse Bollard pull
Positioning [hh:min] N [m] [m] Power [t]
Anchorage [hh:min]
Rig-up [hh:min]
Delay [hh:min]
Lost-time Accidents [hh:min]
Rig Anchorage
Anchor Mooring Line Piggy Back Mooring Line Tension Operative Total
Bow Weight Length Weight Chain Cable [Tested] Tension Time
N Angle Type & Manufacturer [t] Cable Chain N [t] Length Length [t] [t] [hh:min]
[m] [m] [m] [mm] [m] [mm]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Note: Supervisor
Superintendent
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
A.2. Daily Report (ARPO 02)
DAILY REPORT WELL NAME
Completion - Work Over FIELD NAME

DATE: ARPO 02 Modified Cost center
Completion Work Over Well Code Report N of
Rig Name Well Type RT Elevation [m]

Type of Rig Well Drilled On Ground Lelel / Water Depth [m]
Contractor Last Intervention Date RT - 1st flange [m]
Well Head BOP Type w.p. [psi] Costs Daily Cumulative
Type Stack Rig
W.P. [psi] Diverter Service
Production casing Annular Materials
nom. [inch] Annular Logistic
ID [inch] Upper Rams
Steel Grade Middle Rams Personnel Boarding Leaving
Thickness [lb/ft] Middle Rams Agip
Top [m] Middle Rams Rig
Bottom [m] Lower Rams Others
Top cmt [m] Last Test Total
From [hr] To [hr] OP. Code OPERATION DESCRIPTION
Operations at 07:00
Mud Situation Visc. [s/l] Mud in pits Additives Losses

3
Mud Type Cl- / O/W [g/l] Daily [m ]
3
Density [kg/l] pH / ES Progr. [m ]
Contractor Type of Service Working Stand by Arrived on Loc. Left Loc. Daily Service Cumulative Serv.
Hours Hours Date Hour Date Hour Cost Cost
Stock Quantity UM Stock Quantity UM Supervisor:

ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
A.3. Wireline Report (ARPO 11)
WIRELINE REPORT WELL NAME
FIELD NAME
DATE: ARPO - 11 Cost center
SINGLE COMPLETION SELECTIVE SHORT STRING Well Code

DUAL COMPLETION LONG STRING
General Data Flanges
RKB Elevation @ m. Base Flange Tbg Spool Top Flange Psi
Tubing Size OD Weight [lb/ft] @ m. Flowing Flange Psi
Tubing Size OD Weight [lb/ft] @ m. Kill Line Flange Psi
Tubing Shoe @ m. BPV Type
Packer data @ m.
@ m. Wellhead Pressure Check
2 2
Minimum I.D. String THP [Kg/cm ] CHP [Kg/cm ]
2
Previous Bottom Hole @ m. Annulus / P [Kg/cm ]
2
Annulus / P [Kg/cm ]
2
Request Operation Annulus / P [Kg/cm ]
POOL
Perforated Zones Open Hole
From [m] To [m]
Note
Operation Description
Situation After the Job

NO TOOLS IN HOLE SCSSV Actual Bottom Hole:
TSV BPV PLUG OTHER TOOLS Max Size Run in Hole @m
Note Supervisor
Superintendent
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
A.4. Pressure And Temperature Survey Report (ARPO 12)
WELL NAME
PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE
SURVEY REPORT FIELD NAME
DATE: ARPO - 12 Cost center
SINGLE COMPLETION SELECTIVE SHORT STRING Well Code

DUAL COMPLETION LONG STRING
General Data POOL
RKB Elevation @ m Base Flange Tbg Spool Perforated Zones Open Hole
Tubing Size OD Weight [lb/ft] @ m. From [m] To [m]

Tubing Size OD Weight [lb/ft] @ m.
Tubing Shoe @ m.
Minimum I.D. String
Wellhead Pressure Check

2
2
2
Tbg Drifted with Size To [m] Last Depth
B.H. Sample
Survey Report
Well Status Well Status
3 3
SHUT IN Q. GAS [Sm /gg] SHUT IN Q. GAS [Sm /gg]
3 3
FLOWING Q. OIL [m /gg] FLOWING Q. OIL [m /gg]
3 3
CHOKE SIZE Q. WATER [m /gg] CHOKE SIZE Q. WATER [m /gg]
Time M.D. T.V.D. Temp. Press. Gradient T.H.P. Time M.D. T.V.D. Temp. Press. Gradient T.H.P.
2 2 2 2 2 2
[hh:mm] [m] [m] [C] [Kg/cm ] [Kg/cm /m] [Kg/cm ] [1'] [m] [m] [C] [Kg/cm ] [Kg/cm /m] [Kg/cm ]
'Values Referred To D.W.T. - T.H.P. Gauge 'Values Referred To D.W.T. - T.H.P. Gauge
Liquid level @ Gradient [Kg/cm /m] From [m] To [m] Liquid level @ Gradient [Kg/cm /m] From [m] To [m]
Gas Gas
Density [g/l] Oil Density [g/l] Oil
Water Water
Element Type Element Type
Serial N Last calibration Serial N Last calibration
2 2
Work. pressure [kg/cm ] Work. Temperature [C] Work. pressure [kg/cm ] Work. Temperature [C]
Notes: Supervisor
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
A.5. Malfunction & Failure Report(FB-1)
MALFUNCTION & FAILURE REPORT

(FEED BACK REPORT 01)
District/Subsidiary
Report Date:
Well Name: Well Code:
General Information
Contract No: Contract Type: Contractor:
Service/Supply:
Drilling Completion Workover Duration Dates of Failure: Distributed By:
RIG SITE
Description of Failure:
Drilling & Completions Company Man:

Adopted or Suggested Solution(s):
Contractor Contingency Measures:
Contractor Representative:
DISTRICT OR SUBSIDIARY NOTES:
Failure Classification Status Operations Manager:

Technical Normal
Management/Organisation Extreme Time Lost:
Safety/Quality Innovative
Adverse Estimated Cost of Failure:
MILAN HEAD OFFICE NOTES:
Analysis Code:
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
A.6. Contractor Evaluation (FB-2)
CONTRACTOR EVALUATION
(FEED BACK REPORT 02)
District/Subsidiary
Report Date:
Well Name: Well Code:
General Information
Contract No.: Contract Type: Contractor:
Service/Supply: Distributed By:
R1 Technical Requirements
FB_01 REPORT REFERENCES
FB Report No.: Time Lost (Hr.Min): Economic Cost (M):
Category Evaluation Score (0-9)
Suitability of Equipment and Materials
Compliance of Equipment and Materials to the
Adequacy of Personnel
Meeting with Operational Programme Requirements
Meeting with Contract Operation Timings
Equipment Condition/Maintenance
R2 Management and Organisational Requirements
Availability of Equipment and Materials
Technical and Operational Support to Operations
Capability and Promptness to Operational Requests
R3 Safety and Quality Assurance Requirements
Meeting with the Contract Agreement DSS
Availability and Validity of Requested Certificates
Meeting with Contract Quality Assurance Terms
Event Support Documentation
Type of Subject: Issued By: Date:
Document:
Notes:
Failure Status Operations Manager Drilling & Completions Manager

Normal Extreme Adverse Innovative
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Appendix B - ABBREVIATIONS
API American Petroleum Institute
BG Background Gas
BHA Bottom Hole Assembly
BHP Bottom Hole Pressure
BHT Bottom Hole temperature
BJ Blast Joint
BOP Blow Out Preventer
BPD Barrel Per Day
BPM Barrels Per Minute
BPV Back Pressure Valve
C/L Control Line
CCL Casing Collar Locator
CET Cement Evaluation Tool
CGR Condensate Gas Ratio
CMT Cement
CR Cement Retainer
CRA Corrosion Resistant Alloy
CSG Casing
DHSV Down Hole Safety Valve
DLS Dog Leg Severity
D&CM Drilling & Completion Manager
E/L Electric Line
ESD Electric Shut-Down System
ESP Electrical Submersible Pump
ETA Expected Arrival Time
FBHP Flowing Bottom Hole Pressure
FBHT Flowing Bottom Hole Temperature
FC Flow Coupling
FPI/BO Free Point Indicator/Back Off
FTHP Flowing Tubing Head Pressure
FTHT Flowing Tubing Head Temperature
GCT Guidance Continuous Tool
GLR Gas Liquid Ratio
GOC Gas Oil Contact
GOR Gas Oil Ratio
GP Gravel Pack
GPM Gallon (US) per Minute
GPS Global Positioning System
GR Gamma Ray
GSS Gyro Single Shot
HAZOP Hazard and Operability
HHP Hydraulic Horsepower
HP/HT High Pressure - High Temperature
HSI Horsepower per Square Inch
IADC International Association of Drilling Contractors
IBOP Inside Blow Out Preventer
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
ID Inside Diameter
IP Internal Pressure
L/D Lay Down
L/S Long String
LAT Lowest Astronomical Tide
LC 50 Lethal Concentration 50%
LCM Lost Circulation Materials
LCP Lower Circulation Position (GP)
LEL Lower Explosive Limit
LN Landing Nipple
LTA Lost Time Accident
LTT Lower Tell Table (GP)
M/D Martin Decker
M/U Make Up
MAASP Max Allowable Annular Surface Pressure
MD Measured Depth
MLH Mudline Hanger
MLS Mudline Suspension
MODU Mobile Offshore Drilling Unit
MOP Margin of Overpull
MPI Magnetic Particle Inspection
MSCL Modular Single Completion Land
MSL Mean Sea Level
MUT Make up Torque
MW Mud Weight
MWD Measurement While Drilling
N/D Nipple Down
N/U Nipple Up
NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers
NDT Non Destructive Test
OBM Oil Base Mud
OD Outside Diameter
OH Open Hole
OHGP Open Hole Gravel Packing
OIM Offshore Installation Manager
ORP Origin Reference Point
OWC Oil Water Contact
P&A Plugged & Abandoned
P/U Pick up
PBR Polished Bore Receptacle
PI Productivity Index
PKR Packer
PLT Production Logging Tool
POB Personnel On Board
POOH Pull Out Of Hole
PPB Pounds Per Barrel
PPG Pounds Per Gallon
ppm Part Per Million
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
PVT Pressure Volume Temperature

Q Flow Rate
Q/A Q/C Quality Assurance, Quality
R/D Rig Down
R/U Rug Up
RBP Retrievable Bridge Plug
RCP Reverse Circulating Position
RIH Run In Hole
RJ Ring Joint
RKB Rotary Kelly Bushing
ROV Remote Operated Vehicle
RPM Revolutions Per Minute
RPSP Reduced Pump Strokes
RT Rotary Table
S/N Serial Number
SBHP Static Bottom Hole Pressure
SBHT Static Bottom Hole Temperature
SCC Stress Corrosion Cracking
SDE Senior Drilling Engineer
SF Safety Factor
SG Specific Gravity
SICP Shut-in Casing Pressure
SIMOP Simultaneous Operations
SPM Stroke per Minute
SR Separation Ratio
SSC Sulphide Stress Cracking
TCP Tubing Conveyed Perforations
TD Total Depth
TFA Total Flow Area
TOC Top of Cement
TOL Top of Liner
TVD True Vertical Depth
TW Target Well
UAR Uncertainty Area Ratio
UR Under Reamer
VBR Variable Bore Rams (BOP)
VDL Variable Density Log
VSP Velocity Seismic Profile
W/L Wireline
WBM Water Base Mud
WC Water Cut
WOW Wait On Weather
WP Working Pressure
YP Yield Point
ENI S.p.A.
STAP-P-1-M-7110 0
Appendix C - BIBLIOGRAPHY
Document: STAP Number
Completion Design Manual STAP-P-1-7100
Wireline Materials STAP M-1-M-4001
Wireline Sizes STAP- P-1-M-6066
NDE Technical Specification TECN-708444-S-0400
Other
API Specification No 9A- Wireline

Wire Line Procedure Eni

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Wire Line Procedure Eni

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

ARPO ORGANISING TYPE OF ISSUING DOC. REFER TO PAGE.

Agip Division OF 318

Eni - Agip Division Italian Districts

Date of issue: 28/06/99

Issued by G. Albasi C. Lanzetta A. Galletta

REVISIONS PREP'D CHK'D APPR'D

2. RESPONSIBILITIES AND CREWING 11

4. SURFACE EQUIPMENT SELECTION 24

4.8. SWAB VALVE 33

6. WIRELINE UNIT SELECTION 37

8. WIRELINE RIG-UP/DOWN OPERATIONS 46

8.3. RIGLESS OPERATIONS 64

9. GENERAL WIRELINE PROCEDURES 79

10. SPECIFIC FLOW CONTROL PROCEDURES 187

10.9. BAKER TYPE B AND B1 LOCK MANDREL 221

11. WIRELINE PROBLEMS 223

12. TOOLSTRING WEIGHT FOR FLOWING WELLS 271

12.3. FORCE DUE TO FRICTION OF THE TOOLSTRING AT SURFACE 278

13. WIRELINE TESTING 283

14. WIRELINE ANGLE AND STRETCH CORRECTION FACTORS 288

15. WIRELINE EQUIPMENT NDT PROCEDURES 292

16. SAFETY 304

APPENDIX A - REPORT FORMS 309

APPENDIX B - ABBREVIATIONS 315

APPENDIX C - BIBLIOGRAPHY 318

1.1. DEFINITION OF WIRELINE

1.2. MANUAL OBJECTIVES

1.4. DOCUMENTATION AND APPROVAL

1.5. UPDATING, AMENDMENT, CONTROL & DEROGATION

2. RESPONSIBILITIES AND CREWING

2.1. PERSONNEL RESPONSIBILITIES

2.2.1. Light Duty Operations

2.2.2. Heavy Duty Operations

2.3. CREW COMPOSITION

2.3.2. Heavy Duty Crew

2.4. WIRELINE PERSONNEL QUALIFICATIONS

2.4.1. Chief Operator

2.4.3. Assistant Operator

3.2. ASSEMBLY SELECTION

3.2.4. Tubular Jar

Mechanical Up-stroke Jar (Spring Type)

Hydro-Mechanical Up-stroke Jar (Spring Type)

3.2.5. Knuckle Joints

Figure 3.I - Knuckle Joint

3.2.6. Types Of Connections

4. SURFACE EQUIPMENT SELECTION

4.1. LIFTING EQUIPMENT

4.1.1. Gin Pole

4.2. ADAPTER FLANGE

Figure 4.A - Typical Adapter Flange

Figure 4.B - Typical Single Ram Hydraulic Wireline BOP

Figure 4.C - Typical Concentric Piston BOP

4.4. LUBRICATOR RISER

Working Pressure Seal Type

Figure 4.D - Typical Lubricator Section (Lower)

4.5. STUFFING BOX

Figure 4.E - Typical Stuffing Boxes

4.6. INJECTION NIPPLE

Figure 4.F - Typical Injection Sub

4.7. SAFETY CHECK UNION

Figure 4.G - Safety check Union

4.8. SWAB VALVE

5.1. WIRE DIAMETERS

5.3. ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT